Asdasd

MiCOM P433, P435
Distance Protection Devices
P43x/EN M/Am7
Version P433 -308 -410/411 -612

P433 -308 -410/411 -614
P433 -308 -410/411 -615
P433 -308 -410/411 -630
P433 -308 -410/411 -631
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -612
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -614
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -615
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -630
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -631
Technical Manual
Content P43x/EN M/Ac7 (-612)

P43x/EN AD/Ae7 (-614)
P43x/EN AD/Af7 (-615)
P43x/EN AD/Ak7 (-630)
P43x/EN AD/Am7 (-631)
Volume 1 of 2
MiCOM P433, P435
Distance Protection Devices
P43x/EN M/Ac7
(AFSV.12.10220 D)
Version P433 -308 -410/411 -612
P435 -308 -413/414/415 -612
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment.
Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment
and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used,
insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be employed.
The signals 'M a i n : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y ' and 'S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) ' (permanently assigned to the LEDs
labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE' and 'ALARM') can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the
device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made
without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the
warnings in Chapters 5, 9, 10 and 11 and with the content of Chapter 13, before working on the equipment. If
the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Installation of the DHMI:
A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be connected to the DHMI protective
conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.
To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.
The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside high-voltage cables or connections.
Currents can be induced in the cable which may result in electromagnetic interference.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-
energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot
cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do
not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the
necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of
warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
Changes after going to press
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7

8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-3
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-3
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-6
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-6
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-6
2.6 Interfaces 2-9
2.7 Information Output 2-11
2.8 Settings 2-11
2.9 Deviations 2-12
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-12
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-13
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-14
2.10 Recording Functions 2-15
2.11 Power supply 2-17
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications 2-18
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Measured (Function Group LOC) 3-4
Value Panels
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-11
3.4.1 PC interface (Function Group PC) 3-11
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) 3-13
3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) 3-22
3.4.4 Communication interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) 3-25
3.4.5 IEC 61850 Communication (Function groups IEC, 3-30
interface GOOSE and GSSE)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) 3-38
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) 3-39
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group INP) 3-42
of the Binary Inputs
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) 3-44
3.8.1 Direct current input 3-45
3.8.2 Input to connect a resistance 3-48
thermometer
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, (Function Group OUTP) 3-49
and Blocking of the Output Relays
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) 3-52
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output 3-55
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-60
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured 3-66
Data
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group LED) 3-67
of the LED Indicators
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9

Contents
(continued)
3.12 Main Functions of the P43x (Function Group MAIN) 3-70

3.12.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for 3-70
Control
3.12.2 Bay Type Selection 3-73
3.12.3 Conditioning of the Measured 3-74
Values
3.12.4 Operating Data Measurement 3-76
3.12.5 Configuring and Enabling the 3-92
Protection Functions
3.12.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic 3-94
Restraint)
3.12.7 Function Blocks 3-96
3.12.8 Multiple Blocking 3-97
3.12.9 Blocked/faulty 3-98
3.12.10 Monitoring and Processing of CB 3-99
Status Signals
3.12.11 Close Command 3-102
3.12.12 Multiple Signaling 3-104
3.12.13 Ground Fault Signaling 3-106
3.12.14 Starting Signals and Tripping 3-109
Logic
3.12.15 CB Trip Signal 3-120
3.12.16 Enable for Switch Commands 3-122
Issued by the Control Functions
3.12.17 Communication Error 3-124
3.12.18 Time Tagging and Clock 3-125
Synchronization
3.12.19 Resetting Actions 3-127
3.12.20 Assigning Communications 3-130
Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
3.12.21 Test Mode 3-131
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) 3-132
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) 3-134
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) 3-137
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) 3-138
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3-139
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3-141
3.19 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA) 3-144
3.19.1 Measured Ground Fault Data as 3-145
determined by Steady-State
Power Evaluation
3.19.2 Measured Ground Fault Data as 3-147
determined by Steady-State
Current Evaluation
3.20 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC) 3-149
3.21 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) 3-152
3.22 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) 3-162
3.23 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST) 3-168
3.23.1 Starting 3-168
3.23.2 Selection of Measured values 3-188
3.23.3 Distance and Directional 3-190
Measurement
3.23.4 Impedance-time characteristics 3-208
3.23.5 Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1 3-231
(P435 only)
3.24 Power Swing Blocking (Function group PSB) 3-233
10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

Contents
(continued)
3.25 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) 3-241

3.26 Backup Overcurrent-Time (Function Group BUOC) 3-251
Protection (BUOC)
3.27 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) 3-254
3.28 Protective Signaling (Function Group PSIG) 3-255
3.29 Auto-Reclosing Control in the P433 (Function Group ARC) 3-293
3.29.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) in 3-300
the P433
3.29.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in 3-303
the P433
3.29.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) in the P433 3-305
3.29.4 Parallel Blocking in the P433 3-308
3.29.5 Zone Extension in the P433 3-309
3.29.6 General ARC Control Functions in 3-311
the P433
3.29.7 ARC Counters in the P433 3-313
3.30 Auto-Reclosing Control in the P435 (Function Group ARC) 3-314
3.30.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) in 3-322
the P435
3.30.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in 3-332
the P435
3.30.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) in the 3-334
P435
3.30.4 Secondary Fault Treatment in the 3-337
P435
3.30.5 Parallel Blocking in the P435 3-338
3.30.6 Zone Extension in the P435 3-340
3.30.7 General ARC Control Functions in 3-342
the P435
3.30.8 ARC Counters in the P435 3-344
3.31 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) 3-345
3.32 Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) (Function Group GFSC) 3-364
Protection
3.33 Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) (Function Group GSCSG) 3-379
Protection Signaling
3.34 Definite-Time Overcurrent (Function Group DTOC) 3-394
Protection
3.35 Inverse-Time Overcurrent (Function Group IDMT) 3-407
Protection
3.36 Ground Fault Direction Determi- (Function Group GFDSS) 3-422
nation Using Steady-State Values
3.36.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation 3-425
3.36.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation 3-430
3.36.3 Steady-State Admittance 3-432
3.36.4 Counting the Ground Faults 3-438
Detected by Steady-State Power
and Admittance Evaluation
3.37 Ground Fault Tripping (Function group GFTRP) 3-439
3.38 Ground Fault Protective Signaling (Function Group GFSIG) 3-442
3.39 Transient Ground Fault Direction (Function Group TGFD) 3-444
Determination
3.40 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) 3-452
(applic. to software version -602)
3.41 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>) 3-458
3.42 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) 3-470
3.43 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>) 3-477
3.44 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) 3-492
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 11

Contents
(continued)
3.45 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) 3-504

3.46 Programmable logic (Function Group LOGIC) 3-511
3.47 Control and Monitoring of (Function Groups DEV01 3-518
Switchgear Units to DEV03)
3.47.1 Processing Position Signals from 3-519
Manually Operated Switchgear Units
3.47.2 Functional Sequence for 3-521
Controllable Switchgear Units
3.48 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) 3-533
3.49 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) 3-535
3.50 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) 3-536
4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings 4-4
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case 4-4
4.2.2 Flush Mounted Case 4-5
4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI 4-7
4.3 Modules 4-8
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type 5-2
5.3 Location Requirements 5-3
5.4 Installation 5-4
5.5 Protective Grounding 5-12
5.6 Connection 5-13
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-13
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface. 5-21
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-21
5.7 Location Diagrams 5-22
5.8 Terminal Connection Diagrams 5-23
6 Local Control Panel 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing between Display Levels 6-8
6.3 Display Illumination 6-9
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 6-9
6.5 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys) 6-11
6.6 Control at Panel Level 6-12
6.7 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-13
6.7.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree 6-13
6.7.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-14
6.7.3 Param. change enabl. 6-15
6.7.4 Changing Parameters 6-18
6.7.5 Setting a List Parameter 6-19
6.7.6 Memory Readout 6-21
6.7.7 Resetting 6-25
6.7.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-27
6.7.9 Changing the Password 6-28
12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

Contents
(continued)
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameters 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-1
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters 7-5
7.1.3 Function Parameters 7-63
7.1.3.1 Global 7-63
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-69
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets 7-86
7.1.3.4 Control 7-117
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Healthy 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-8
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-17
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-47
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording 8-53
8.2 Events 8-54
8.2.1 Event counters 8-54
8.2.2 Measured event data 8-57
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-61
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1

14.1 Order Information for P433 14-1
14.2 Order Information for P435 14-3
Appendix
A Glossary
B List of Signals
C List of Bay Types
D Overview of Changes
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 13

14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
1. Application and Scope
1 Application and Scope
The MiCOM P43x distance protection devices have been designed for selective short-
circuit protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection in medium- and high-
voltage systems. The systems can be operated as resonant-grounded, grounded-neutral
or isolated-neutral systems. The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the
devices enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cable
and line sections, transformers and motors. Because of the specific functions provided
by the devices the following preferred areas of application have evolved:
MiCOM P433: Medium-voltage systems with 3-pole high-speed reclosure (HSR)

MiCOM P435: Medium- and high-voltage systems with 1-/3-pole high-speed
reclosure (HSR)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-1

(continued)
The P43x distance protection and control devices feature the following general functions:
Protection Functions P433 P435
21 DIST Distance protection

Overcurrent and undervoltage starting
Underimpedance starting with load blinding
Polygonal (quadrilateral) or circular tripping characteristics
Six distance stages, including one that can be used as a special stage
Eight timer stages, including two that function as backup timer stages
Directional voltage memory
68 PSB Power swing blocking and power swing tripping
30 / 74 MCMON Current, voltage measuring-circuit monitoring
BUOC Two-stage backup overcurrent-time protection
50 / 27 SOTF Switch on to fault protection
85-21 PSIG Protective signaling
79 ARC Auto-reclosing control
1/3-
High-speed reclosure (HSR), time-delayed reclosure (TDR), rapid 3-pole
pole
reclosure (RRC)
25 ASC Automatic synchronism check ( ) ( )
67N GFSC Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
85-67N GSCSG Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
GFDSS Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values
GFTRP Ground fault tripping
GFSIG Ground fault protective signaling
TGFD Transient ground fault direction determination ( ) ( )
50/51 P,Q,N DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection
Four-stage, phase, negative-sequence and residual current measuring
systems
Directional residual current stages including
Hold-time stages for intermittent ground faults
51 P,Q,N IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection
Single-stage, directional, phase, negative-sequence and residual
current measuring systems
32 P<> Power directional protection, two stages, active and reactive power direction
49 THERM Thermal overload protection
27/59 P,Q,N V<> Time-voltage protection
Four stages, phase, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and neutral-
point displacement voltage
81 O/U f<> Frequency protection
four stages, may be combined with (df/dt) and (∆f/∆t)
50BF / 62 CBF Circuit breaker failure protection
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LOGIC Programmable logic
= standard; ( ) = Ordering option
1-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Control Functions P433 P435
DEV01
to Control and monitoring of up to three switchgear units ( ) ( )
DEV03
CMD_1 12 single-pole commands ( ) ( )
SIG_1 12 single-pole signals ( ) ( )
ILOCK Interlocking logic ( ) ( )
Communication Functions P433 P435
COMM1, Two RS 485 or fiber-optic communication interfaces

( ) ( )
COMM2
IEC,
GOOSE, RJ45 or fiber-optic (IEC 61850) communication interface ( ) ( )
GSSE
COMM3 InterMiCOM protective interface ( ) ( )
IRIGB IRIG-B time synchronization ( ) ( )
Measured Value Functions P433 P435
MEASI Analog measured value input / output

MEASO PT 100 analog input ( ) ( )
20 mA analog input, one settable input value
Measured value output, two settable output values
= standard; ( ) = Ordering option
For further functions see Appendix A1
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-3

(continued)
Functional diagram
Control/Monitoring of Communication COMM1 COMM2 IEC Recording

up to 3 switchgear units IRIGB Self-Monitoring and Data Overload record.
Acquisition
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ... Ground flt record.
via RS485 or Fibre Optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
DEV ILOCK
via RJ45 or Fibre Optics using IEC 61850 LIMIT Metering Disturb. record.
Vref
21 50/27 VTS/CTS 51 P,N 50/51 P,Q,N 51/67 P,Q,N 32 49 50BF/62 25 79 67N

DIST SOTF MCMON BUOC DTOC IDMT P<> THERM CBF TGFD ASC ARC GFSC
I
V
85-21 68 27/59 P,Q,N 81 O/U 85-67N

PSIG PSB V<> f<> GFDSS GFSIG GFTRP GSCSG LOGIC
Signaling
InterMiCOM COUNT SIG_1 CMD_1 MEASI MEASO

always available Distance Protection
conventional serial
optional and Control P433/P435
1-1 Functional diagram
1-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
General functions
The functions listed in the tables above are complete function groups, which may be
individually configured or cancelled (except for ILOCK), depending on the application
(e.g. included in or excluded from the protection device’s configuration).
A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:
Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user (except for the configuration
parameter) and are not supported. (An exception is the function MAIN, which is always
visible.) Communication functions and measured value functions may also be
configured or excluded.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection devices possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme (and optional
control purposes) can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be included in or
excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch "General Functions" of
the menu tree.
Control functions
The optional control functions are designed for the control of up to three electrically
operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of
a medium-voltage substation or a high-voltage station with basic topology. The MiCOM
P433 and P435 devices have over 80 predefined bay types stored for selection, and it is
also possible to load user-defined bay templates.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-5

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P43x distance
protection and control devices offer the following global functions:
Parameter subset selection

Operating data measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and
operation
Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)
Ground fault data acquisition
Ground fault recording (time-tagged event logging)
Fault data acquisition
Time-tagged fault event logging as well as fault value recording of the three phase
currents, the residual current, the three phase-to-ground voltages and the neutral-
Design
The distance protection devices P43x are modular in design. The plug-in modules are
housed in a robust aluminum case and are electrically interconnected via one analog
module and one digital module.
Function keys
There are six freely configurable function keys available for both the 40TE case and
84TE case devices. These may be used for easy control operation access.
Inputs and outputs

The P433 has the following inputs and outputs:
Current-measuring inputs
Four voltage-measuring inputs
Up to 20 binary signal inputs (opto couplers) with user-definable function assignment
Up to 30 output relays with user-definable function assignment
One PT 100 input (optional)
One input, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
Two outputs, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
1-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
The P435 fitted in the 40TE case has the following inputs and outputs:
4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs (ordering option)
The P435 fitted in the 84TE case has the following inputs and outputs:
4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs (ordering option)
The nominal current and voltage values for the measuring inputs on the P43x can be set.
The nominal voltage range for the binary signal inputs (opto coupler) is 24 to 250 VDC.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed with an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 VDC and 100 to 230 VAC. A 24 VDC version
is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for both signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100
resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,

zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input value via
20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a
selectable measured value can be output by contacts coded in BCD form.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-7

(continued)
Interfaces
Control and display:
Local control panel

23 LED indicators, 18 of which allow freely configurable function assignment for the
colors red and green. Furthermore there are various operating modes and flashing
functions available.
PC interface
One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation control system
(optional)
Information is exchanged through the local control panel (HMI), the PC interface, or the
optional communication interfaces.
One channel of the communication interfaces is designed to comply either with

international standard IEC 60870-5-103 or with IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0.
The second channel is designed to comply with international standard IEC 60870-5-103.
The P43x can be integrated into a substation control system through the communication
interfaces.
1-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P433, version 308-410/411-612 and P435 version -308-413/414/415-612
Declaration of conformity
(As per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC)
The products designated as "P433 and P435 Distance Protection and Control Units"
have been designed and manufactured in compliance with European standards
EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the 'EMC Directive' and the 'Low Voltage
Directive' as issued by the Council of the European Community.
2.2 General Data
General device data

Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cubicles and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case
(IP 10 for ring-terminal connection)
Weight
40TE case: approx. 7 kg
84TE case: approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5)
Terminals
PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication interfaces - COMM1, COMM2, COMM3:

Optical fibers (X7, X8 and X31, X32):
F-SMA fiber-optic connection per IEC 874-2
for plastic fibers
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-(ST®) 2.5 connector
per IEC 60874-10-1 for plastic fibers
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
wire leads (X9, X10, X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections to
1.5 mm2
or (only for COMM3/InterMiCOM):
RS 232 (X34): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Communication interface IEC 61850:

Optical fibers (X7 and X8):
Optical fiber connection BFOC-(ST®) 2.5 connector
per IEC 60874-10-1 for plastic fibers
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
Optical fiber (X13):
SC connector per IEC 60874-14-4 for glass fibers and
wire leads (X12): RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
Current Measuring Inputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M5 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor
cross-sections = 4 mm²
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends
Other inputs and outputs:

Pin-terminal connection:
M3 threaded terminal ends, self-centering with wire protection for conductor
cross-sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm².
Ring-terminal connection:
M4 threaded terminal ends
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2.3 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5 °C to +55 °C (23 °F to 131 °F)
Storage and transit: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to 158 °F)
Ambient Humidity Range

≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40 °C (104 °F), condensation not permissible.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.4 Tests
2.4.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 / IEC 60255-6 or EN 50121-5.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
Immunity to Damped Oscillatory Waves

Per IEC 61000-4-12, Class III:
100 kHz damped oscillatory wave
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200 Ω
Per IEC 60255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III:
1 MHz damped oscillatory wave
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2§ or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3:
Contact discharge,
single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3:
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100 %
Immunity to Electrical Fast Transients / Burst Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B:
Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Per EN 61000-4-4, severity level 3:
Power supply: Amplitude: 4 kV, Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz and 5 kHz
Inputs and outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-7, Class A:
Phase-to-phase:
RMS value 150 V,
Coupling resistance 100 Ω
Coupling capacitor 0,1 µF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground:
RMS value 300 V,
Coupling resistance 220 Ω
Coupling capacitor 0.47 µF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, the parameter
I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) should be set as advised
in Chapter 7.
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4:
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Fault current: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV,
Impulse: > 5 / min,
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 61010-1 or IEC 255-5, 2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 W
Corrosion resistance
Flowing Mixed Gas Corrosion Test
Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, part 2, test Ke, severity level 3
21 days at 75 % relative humidity and 30 °C
with reaction to increased concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2
_______________________________________________________________
§
For this EN, ENV or IEC standard, the DIN EN, DINV ENV or DIN IEC edition,
respectively, was used in the test.
2-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness
1 (*)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 1, 2 g for 11 ms;
Shock withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness
2(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
Shock withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
test severity class 1, 15 g for 11 ms,
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify the endurance to
permanent shock (during transport),
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
_______________________________________________________________
(*)
Mechanical robustness 1:
Applicable to the following case variants:
- Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Applicable to the following case variants:
- Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
- Surface-Mounted Case
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.4.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s.
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current
Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous: 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom
Voltage
Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
2-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Binary signal inputs

Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V DC
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal input voltage
(i.e. definitively 'low' for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively 'high' for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC

Power consumption per input

Standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Notes
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special variants with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
Direct current input

Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Input load: 100 Ω
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (settable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (settable)
Resistance thermometer
Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted,
Value range: -40.0 °C to +215.0 °C
3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215 °C and Θ < -40 °C
Analog measured data

output
Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Permissible load: 0 to 500 Ω
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Output relays
Binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO):
for switchgear control
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 8A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
Binary I/O module X (4xOH):

fitted with heavy duty contacts for switchgear control, use only for direct voltage/current
Rated voltage: 250 V DC
Continuous current: 10 A
Short-duration current: 250 A for 30 ms,
30 A for 3 s
Making capacity: 30 A
Breaking capacity: 7500 W (resistive load) or 30 A at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 30 A and 300 V DC
2500 W inductive (L/R 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A and 300 V DC
All other modules:

Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp
Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
2-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces
Communication interfaces
COMM1, COMM2,
COMM3
The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels,
depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect
wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 870-5-103,

IEC 60870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (settable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (settable).
Communication interface 3 permits end-to-end channel-aided digital communication

schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection
devices (Point-to-point connection, asynchronous, full duplex; called InterMiCOM
protection signaling interface).
Transmission rate: 600 or 19200 baud (settable).
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged1): max. 45 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical output: min. -16 dBm
___________________________________________________________________
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
IEC Communication
interface
Wire Leads
IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
Transmission rate: 10 or 100 Mbit/s
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Maximum distance: 100 m
for optical fibers (100 Mbit/s)

IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
ST connector or SC connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. -20 dBm
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
Date in binary coded decimal (BCD)
Local control panel

Input or output:
via 13 keys and a 4 x 20 character liquid crystal display (LCD)
State and fault signals:

23 LED indicators (5 permanently assigned, 18 freely configurable)
2-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data and signals: see Chapter 8.
2.8 Settings
Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for a trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (settable)
Output pulse duration for a close command: 0.1 to 10 s (settable)
Distance protection
Minimum starting time: 12 ms
Starting reset time: 30 ms ± 10 ms
Directional sensitivity
up to 2 s after general starting: ∞
up to 2 s after general starting and for switching on to fault: 200 mV ± 20 mV
Shortest tripping time: approx. 19 ms
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection

Operate time including output relay (measured value from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured value drops from 2-fold operate value to 0):
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Time-voltage protection
Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or
measured value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (settable)
Power directional protection

Operate time including output relay (measured value from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured value from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured value from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or
measured value from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for
P>, Q>: 0.05 to 0.95 (settable)
P<, Q<: 1.05 to 20 (settable)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
Reference conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20 °C (68 °F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Distance protection
Starting V<, VNG>, VNG>>
Deviation: ± 3 %
Starting I>, I>>, IN>

with setting range 0.1 to 0.25 Inom: ± 5 %
with setting range > 0.25 Inom: ± 3 %
Starting Z< at ϕk = 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°

Deviation: ± 5 %
Impedance measurement Z<

Deviation at ϕk = 0°, 90°: ± 3 %
Deviation at ϕk = 30°, 60°: ± 5 %
Direction determination
Deviation: ± 3°
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
Deviation: ± 3 %
Time-overcurrent
protection
Operate values I>, IN>
Deviation: ± 5 %
Thermal overload
protection
Operate value
Deviations: ± 7.5 %
Over-/underfrequency
protection
Operate values f<>
Deviation: ± 30 mHz (for fnom = 50 Hz)
Deviation: ± 40 mHz (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Operate values df/dt

Deviation: ± 0.1 mHz (for fnom = 50 Hz)
Deviation: ± 0.1 mHz (for fnom = 60 Hz)
2-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Over-/undervoltage
protection
Operate values
V<>, Vpos<>: ± 1% (in the range: 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
VNG>, Vneg>: ± 1% (in the range: > 0.3 Vnom)
Power directional
protection
Operate values P<>, Q<>
Deviation: ± 5 %
Ground fault direction

determination using
steady-state values
(GFDSS)
Operate values VNG>, IN,act>, IN,reac>, IN>
Deviation: ± 3 %
Sector angle:
Deviation: 1°
20 mA direct current input

Deviation: ± 1 %
PT100 Resistance
Thermometer
Deviation: ± 2 ° or ± 1 %
20 mA analog measured
data output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
Reference Conditions
temperature 20 °C (68 °F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Definite-time stages
Deviation ± 1 % + 20 to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
or for "extremely inverse" IEC characteristics and for thermal
overload characteristics: ± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
Reference Conditions
temperature 20 °C (68 °F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Operating data
measurement
Measuring input currents
Deviation: ± 1 %
Measuring input voltages

Deviation: ± 0.5 %
Derived residual, positive-sequence and negative-sequence currents

Deviation: ± 2 %
Derived neutral-point displacement, positive-sequence

and negative-sequence voltages
Deviation: ± 2 %
Active and reactive power / active and reactive energy

Deviation: approximately ± 2 % of the measured value for |cosϕ| = ≥0.7
approximately ± 5 % of the measured value for |cosϕ| = ≥0.3
Load angle
Deviation: ± 1°
Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Fault data acquisition

Fault values for current and voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance)

Deviation: ± 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min):

Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
2-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory

Scope for signals: All operation-relevant signals from a total of
1024 different logic state signals
Depth: The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope for signals: All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of
Depth: Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of
Depth: 200 entries per overload event
Ground fault memory

Number: The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of
Depth: 200 entries per ground fault event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events
Scope for signals: Signals:

All fault-relevant signals from a total of
Depth for fault values: Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals Signals:

200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values: max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz)
or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resolution of the Recorded Data:
Signals
Time resolution: 1 ms
Fault values
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period
Phase currents system

Dynamic range: 100 Inom / 25 Inom (settable)
Amplitude resolution: 6.1 mAr.m.s. / 1.5 mAr.m.s. at Inom = 1 A
30.5 mAr.m.s. / 7.6 mAr.m.s. at Inom = 5 A
Residual current
Dynamic range: 16 Inom
Amplitude resolution: 1.0 mAr.m.s. for Inom = 1 A
4.9 mAr.m.s. for Inom = 5 A
Voltages
Dynamic range: 150 V AC
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVr.m.s.
2-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:

24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
with case size: 40TE 84 TE
relays de-energized approx.: 11 W 11 W
relays energized approx.: 25 W 44 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms

Permitted supply interruption: ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
(
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) ⋅ n ⋅ I nom = Rop + Ri ⋅ k ⋅ I1' ,max )
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
I'1,max: non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
Inom: rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rnom: rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
( )
Vsat = Rop + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
n≥
(Rop + Ri ) ⋅k ⋅
I1' ,max
=
(Pop + Pi ) ⋅k ⋅
I1' ,max
( Rnom + Ri ) Inom ( Pnom +P i ) Inom
with
Pnom = Rnom ⋅ Inom

2
Pop = Rop ⋅ Inom

2
Pi = Ri ⋅ Inom
2
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max ≈ 1 + ωT1
with:
ω: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant
2-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-dimensioning

factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed
under the given conditions.
The over-dimensioning factor 'k' necessary for the distance protection may be read from
figure 2-1. The dotted line depicts the theoretical characteristic k(T1) = 1 + ωT1.
Specifications for current transformers should be within the error limit values for class
5P. CTs class TPY per IEC 44-6 Part 6 ("Current Transformers with Anti-remanence
Cores") should preferably be used in case a HSR is applied.
2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fnom = 50 Hz
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-19

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-20
3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P43x, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P43x.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals internally generated by the device are connected to the external plant via
contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to
the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required
internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog values, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The
processor handles the processing of digitized analog values and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X
via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device
communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the
processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated local control panel (LOC)

PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
‘Parameters’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces
to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the
process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that
the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
‘Operation’ branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Events’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions, operation during a ground fault, and finally to
operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P43x provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels;

Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)
The P43x offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured
values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload or ground fault
events, the display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the
event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or
the fault memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to
the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at
L O C : H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel
is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC: AAutom. LOC: Autom.

return time return time
Measured value n [ 003 014 ]
LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time

Selected meas. values for Panels for panels
[ 031 075 ]
FT_RC: Record.
in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC: Record.
in progress ≥1
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
GF_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01CXA_EN
3-2 Operation Panel
3-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - ti m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Fault

Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected meas.values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA_EN
3-3 Fault Panel
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
Ground Fault Panel

The Ground Fault Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when
there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Ground Fault Panel remains on display until the ground fault ends, unless a fault
occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Ground Fault
Panel by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for
display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set
of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - ti m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Grd.

Fault Panel
[ 053 004 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected
measured values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Ground Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0139 B_EN
3-4 Ground Fault Panel
3-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the overload panel by
setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than
the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at
intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - ti m e fo r P a n e l s or when the
appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0140 A_EN
3-5 Overload panel
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the
control point
Function keys may also be configured as control keys (e.g. Local/Remote, Device
selection, Device OPEN, Device CLOSE). See figure 3-6 and section 'Configurable
Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)' in Chapter 6. Therefore new
settings have been added to function group LOC.
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between
local and remote control is achieved using either an appropriately configured function
key on the local control panel or an external key switch. The position of this key switch
is interrogated via an appropriately configured binary signal input (configuration at
M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w .) .
To see details on the use of a function key as a switch between local and remote control
see section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' in Chapter 3 and
section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)' in Chapter 6.
The setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether switching, using

the key switch, is between local and remote control (L ↔ R) or between local + remote
and local control (R & L ↔ L).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local
control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
3-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
F_KEY: Fct. LOC: Fct. assign.

assignm. F1 L/R key
[ 080 112 ] [ 225 208 ]
1
2
1: R <-> L
Local/Remote key 2: R & L <-> L
[006 004]
1)
F1 S1 1 ≥1 1 ≥1
& &
R1 0 ≥1 2,3 LOC: Rem.acc.block.
& active
& [ 221 004 ]
&
Local 1 LOC: Loc.acc.block.
& active
Remote 2 [ 221 005 ]
& LOC: Local &
Local & Remote 3 Remote Control
305 560
MAIN: Inp.asg.
L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal
1
1) Key of the local

control panel 12Z6261A_EN
3-6 Selection of the control point.

(The same is valid for the other function keys F2 to F6.)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
Function keys on the

local control panel
The local control panel is fitted with 6 freely configurable function keys. At parameter
F _ K E Y : F u n c t i o n a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) each function key may be
configured either with a single function, with one of the two group resetting functions or
with one of the two menu jump lists.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in the figure in section

'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)'. Function key F1 is enabled only
after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 ,
has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain
active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the
function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for
function keys F2 to F6.
Further information on function keys and their application is given in Chapter 3, section
'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as
well as in Chapter 6, section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)'.
Note: There is an LED indicator situated next to each function key which – just as the
other LED indicators – is freely configurable independently of the configuration of the
function keys (e.g. there is free function assignment to red and green LED indicators).
Configuration of the
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from
the same menu jump list at L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y . They are triggered in
sequence by repeatedly pressing the key.
CLEAR key ('C')
Similarly to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions
may be selected from a list at L O C : F c t. r e s e t k e y. These are carried out by
pressing the C CLEAR key. Details on the resetting functions are given in section
'Resetting Actions' of Chapter 3 'Main Functions of the P43x (Function Group MAIN)'.
3-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P43x has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is

optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels – depending on
the design version. Communication between the P43x and the control station’s
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all the P43x's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P43x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
If tests are run on the P43x, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section
"Main Functions").
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P43x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P43x.
There is a support software available as an accessory for P43x control (see Chapter 13).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
3-7 PC interface settings
3-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
There are several different interface protocols available at the communication interface
1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P43x:
IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P43x.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition,

a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P43x/EN M/Ac7-S // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
COMM1: Command
block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0
1
0: No COMM1: Command
>-1 blocking
1: Yes [ 003 174 ]
COMM1: Command
block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1: Basic
IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1: Com-
municat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1 c
0: No c
1: Yes c
c
COMM1: Addit.
-101 enable c
[ 003 216 ]
c
0 Selected protocol COMM1: Selected
protocol
1 304 415
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: Addit.
ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: MODBUS
enable
[ 003 220 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: DNP3
enable
[ 003 231 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: COURIER
enable
[ 103 040 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
2 220 64Z51FEA
3-8 Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
3-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: -103 prot. COMM1: Select.

variant spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.
state enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V

[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I
monitoring
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P

polling
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f
comm. address
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Address COMM1: Delta
mode meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 168 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta t

monitor on
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta t

manufacturer (energy)
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Contin.
address ASDU general scan
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. enable
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415
COMM1: IEC C
870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
C
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ] C
1: Yes
COMM1: Command C
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Test mode Communication

interface COMM1:Communication
[ 037 071 ] error
304 422
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No COMM1: Sig./meas.
1: Yes val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
45Z63FFA_EN
3-9 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Delta t

state
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Delta t
(energy)
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Contin.
general scan
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Comm.
monitoring address length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Octet 2
polling comm. addr.
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Cause
comm. address transm. length
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Address
monitor on length ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Octet 2
manufacturer addr. ASDU
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Addr.length
address ASDU inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Oct.3 addr.
sig. enable inf.obj.
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: Transm. COMM1: Inf.No.<-
enab.cycl.dat >funct.type
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: Cycl. data COMM1: Time tag
ILS tel. length
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: Delta V COMM1: ASDU1 /
ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: Delta I COMM1: ASDU2
conversion
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: Delta P COMM1: Initializ.
signal
COMM1: Selected [ 003 054 ] [ 003 199 ]
protocol COMM1: Delta f COMM1: Balanced
304 415
operation
COMM1: IEC [ 003 052 ] [ 003 226 ]
870-5-101
[ 003 218 ] COMM1: Delta COMM1: Direction
meas.v.ILS tel bit
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 227 ]
COMM1: Select. COMM1: Time-out
spontan.sig. interval
COMM1: General [ 003 179 ] [ 003 228 ]
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes C
C
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
C
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./ C
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0 COMM1: Communic-
Communication interface ation error
304 422
1
0: No COMM1: Sig./
meas.val.block.
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.

disabled
[ 038 046 ] 49Z64FGA_EN
3-10 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
3-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.

state enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl. data
ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]

COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I
monitoring
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P
polling
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f
comm. address
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta
monitor on meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta t
manufacturer
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta t
address ASDU (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Contin.
sig. enable general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Select.
spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Selected C
protocol
304 415
COMM1: IEC 870-5,

ILS C
[ 003 221 ]
C
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes C
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ] COMM1: Communic-
Communication interface ation error
304 422
MAIN: Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
1
COMM1: Sig./
0: No meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
1: Yes
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.

disabled
[ 038 046 ]
49Z64FHA_EN
3-11 Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
3-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-13 Communication interface 1, settings for DNP 3.0
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
3-14 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
3-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
COMM1: Sel.
spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1: Test
spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig.start
0 [ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1: Test
spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1: Spontan.
sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
49Z64FKA_EN
3-15 Checking spontaneous signals
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P43x.
3-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-16 Settings for communication interface 2
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
COMM2: Sel.
spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2: Test
spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2: Spontan.
sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don’t execute
1: execute
COMM2: Test
spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2: Spontan.
Sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don’t execute
1: execute
49Z64FLA_EN
3-17 Checking spontaneous signals
3-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between
two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.
Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to
connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access, communication
interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time
signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its main application is to transmit
signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or
external binary signals may also be transmitted.
Physical medium
COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface.
To transmit data the following physical media are available:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting
parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.
After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated with this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General enable USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel's requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
(C O M M 3 : S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i v i n g a d d r e s s can be set
to different values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of

eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . s e n d x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 t o 8 ) , thus defining the required
checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected
telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of
"Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip'
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command-based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-18). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Direct intertrip'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
3-26 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
47Z1030A_EN
3-18 Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Communication monitoring
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received
telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission
times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking
scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s f a u l t
and
S F M O N : C o m m u n i c . f a u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals are
automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C O M M 3 : D e f a u l t v a l u e r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG or GSCSG (or both) with the C O M M 3 : S i g . a s g . c o m m . f a u l t
setting.
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . is used to determine a persistent

failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k f a i l u r e and S F M O N : C o m m . l i n k f a i l . C O M M 3 are
issued.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
Message
received
Character frame &

Source address check
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals

accepted
(Re-)Trigger
COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault
[120 033]
COMM3:
1 Communications
fault
[120 043]
COMM3: Time-out
link fail
[120 035]
COMM3: Comm. link

1 failure
[120 044]
47Z1031B_EN
3-19 Message processing and communication monitoring
3-28 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication
link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as an updating measured value C O M M 3 : N o . t e l . e r r o r s
p . u . and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored.
If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the
corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .
and S F M O N : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All the corrupted telegrams
are counted (C O M M 3 : N o . t e l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
C O M M 3 : R s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . U S E R (as well as via the binary signal
C O M M 3 : R e s e t N o . t l g . e r r . E X T ).
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : S t a t e s e n d x and C O M M 3 : S t a t e r e c e i v e x , with
x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for the commissioning of the
protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time
set at C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . For this test only, the source address is set
to ' 0 '; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can
be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon
as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to
the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The transmission
channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual
binary signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value
for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . The 7 remaining binary
signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual
values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device,
e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode
is automatically reset and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5 Communication Interface IEC61850

(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and
the Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
As a further option the P43x now includes an interface protocol according to the Ethernet
based communication standard IEC 61850.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used
with the P43x, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of the data, properties and services, available from the device, that
are to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3-30 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two
interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the
parameter I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . For the optical interface on the Ethernet
communications module the user may either select the ordering option ST connector or
SC connector with 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s
and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P43x can be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.

The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
IEC: General enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE are not
automatically activated in the device. Activation occurs either when the command
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is
switched online at
MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P43x can supply up to 16 clients with information.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the P43x functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization is
effected via a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the
network, and in the second operating mode the P43x requests the device specific time
signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no
longer received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically
active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units
Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P43x can be carried out from all
clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is
executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the
execution of such a command are rejected. To control external devices the following
operating modes can be set at
IEC: DEV control model:
Control service mode
Direct enh. security (Direct control with enhanced security)
SBO enh. security (SBO [Select before operate] with enhanced security)
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by
the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the
switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are
rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P43x resets
this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.
The switchgear units’ contact positions signaled to the clients are made with the Report
Control Blocks of the switchgear units.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
3-32 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independently of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, reverse interlocking, transfer
tripping or decentralized substation interlocking. In the future the "Goose Message" will
therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by
'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE enables transmission
of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values
or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with
the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With
IEC-GOOSE the P43x at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information
or two-pole external device states.
Communication with the
MiCOM S1 support
software via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated MiCOM S1
support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished
over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication
and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P43x provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure
transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands,
blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
"Goose Messages" are transmitted only by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
GOOSE: General enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the command
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is
switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition function group IEC must
be configured and enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals and up to 3 two-pole states from the
maximum of 3 possible external devices associated with the P43x can be sent.
Selection of binary state signals is made by setting
G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The up to 3 two-pole states of the
external devices are a fixed part of GOOSE for which there is no necessity to set
parameters. The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the
range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. The two-pole state
signals from external devices 1 to 3 receive a permanent assignment of data object
indexes in ascending order from 33 to 35.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after
2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at
2-second intervals.
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through setting parameters. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
3-34 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GOOSE DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification: Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID: 12288
Goose ID: "This IED"
DataSet Ref. : "This IED System/LLNO"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range: ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

… …
ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
ServernameCONTROL/CSWI1/Pos/stVal DEV01: Control state
12Z6001A _EN
3-20 Basic structure of sent GOOSE
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE, up to 16 logic binary state signals and the two-pole contact position
signals from up to 16 external devices can be received. Configuration of the logic state
signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 16) is made on the
basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). Contact position
signals received from external devices are listed in the selection table for interlocking
equations of the ILOCK function group, which are available to design a decentralized
substation interlock.
For each state or contact position signal to be received from an external device the
"Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the
Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the
data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the required
information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The device will not evaluate the
identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset Configuration Revision’ that are also
included in the GOOSE received.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values: G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t or G O O S E : E x t . D e v . n d e f a u l t
(n = 1 to 16).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-36 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P43x provides, as an additional functionality, the GSSE
function group (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse
interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the G S S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p
G S S E parameter. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet
communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points
associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.)
become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
GSSE: General enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the I E C : E n a b l e
c o n f i g u r a t i o n command is executed or automatically when the device is switched
on-line at
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each selected state signal is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will
transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
with the G S S E : I n c r e m e n t parameter. Should no further state changes occur up
to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then
GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32)
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(G S S E : b i t p a i r ) .
Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the validity
duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P43x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P43x, the P43x calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Synchronization readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P43x checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P43x. If the P43x does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-21 IRIG-B interface
3-38 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P43x includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. Function
keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at
F_Key: Password funct.key x.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure 3-22. After the
password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at
F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the
password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a
function key is configured as a control key a password request is only issued when the
command "Local/Remote switching" has been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function
keys with a single function
A single function can be assigned to each function key by selecting a logic state signal at
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1, F2, F3 or F4), with the exception of
L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing
the respective function key on the P43x.
Configuration of function
keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function, it is possible to assign to each function key one of the two
menu jump lists created at F _ K E Y : F u n c t i o n a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by
selecting the list at L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the
selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned
function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).

Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be
selected.
Note: LED indicators including the six situated directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective
function key configuration.
READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2) up to 16 functions may also be
selected from the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered
in sequence by repeatedly pressing the "READ" key.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
Configuring function keys

as control keys
Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the lists at
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).
• MAIN: Local/Remote key
• MAIN: Device selection key
• MAIN: Device OPEN key
• MAIN: Device CLOSE key
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above commands
have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function keys.
Operating mode of the

function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected at
F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether
the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the 'Key' operating mode the
selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the 'Switch' operating
mode the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is irrelevant
and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a
function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered
when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
3-40 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
F_KEY: Fct.
assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function Activate Function
F_KEY: Operating
mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 F_KEY: State F1
[ 080 122 ]
2
1: Key
2: Switch
1) Keys, local control

40Z5003C_EN
3-22 Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P43x has opto-coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated in the P43x by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. In order to ensure that
during normal operation the P43x will recognize an input signal, it must persist for at
least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general starting this time period may have to be
increased to 40 ms under unfavorable conditions.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands

should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have
an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (Active 'high' mode) or absence (Active 'low' mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the state of a binary signal
input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal
input.
Filter function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference
peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt. or Active "low", filt.).
With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is signaled only when
the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps
(sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter
INP: Filter.
3-42 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
INP: Fct.assignm.
Uxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Meas. Function & Function enabled
INP: Mode U xxx

[ YYY XXX ]
2
3
0: active "Low"
1: active "High"
2: active "Low", filt.
3: active "High",filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: Filter &

[ 010 220 ]
&
INP: Control
& U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213 A_EN
3-23 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
The P43x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed
to the P43x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed to connect a
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and

monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").

measured data input
function
The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
3-24 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-44 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.1 Direct current input
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity in certain ranges only, linearization can be arranged, provided that
the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for some applications it may
be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range
that have a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M E A S I : I D C x and
M E A S I : I D C , l i n x , the user specifies which input current (IDC) will correspond to the
current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting
points, called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin
diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two
interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-25). Up to
20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a monotonically
increasing curve is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If an invalid setting is entered, the
S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C signal will be generated.
IDC,lin / IDC, nom

1.2
1.1
IDC,lin 20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDC,lin 1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC / IDC, nom
IDC 1 IDC 20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-25 Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom

Enable IDC p.u.
D5Z52KEC_EN
3-26 Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom shown as a broken line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current I DC p.u. and the
current IDClin will be displayed as having a value of ‘ 0 ’.
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the
M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . signal is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the
M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t signal is issued.
3-46 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-27 Analog direct current input
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-28 Scaling of the linearized measured value
3.8.2 Input to connect a resistance thermometer
This analog input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.

The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in standard
IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method,
then no further calibration is required.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the M E A S I : O p e n c i r c .
P T 1 0 0 signal is issued.
c
MEASI: Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI: PT100
faulty
PT 100 Analog Input [ 040 190 ]
SFMON: PT100 open

circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
49Z64H3A_EN
3-29 Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer
3-48 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P43x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually via setting parameters, or by an appropriately configured binary signal
input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Blocking the output relays

The P43x offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if self-
monitoring detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for
M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y will not be included in the blocking signals.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
OUTP: Outp.rel.
block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP: Outp.
1 ≥1 relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: Block 1: Yes
outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN: Prot.
ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
OUTP: Oper. mode

K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
4 -K xxx
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
OUTP: State K xxx
5: NE updating & ≥1 [ zzz zzz ]
6: NE manual reset &
&
& ≥1
OUTP: Fct. & S1 1

assignm. K xxx
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signals
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress OUTP: Latching
[ 035 000 ] 1 reset
& [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1 1
100 ms
0: don’t execute
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
50Z0141 A_EN
3-30 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3-50 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting
parameters. Therefore the device must be switched to 'off-line'. Triggering persists for
the duration of the set hold time.
3-31 Testing the output relays
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measured values made available by the P43x can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as
direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD
output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not.

measured data output
function
The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters.
3-32 Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3-52 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data

output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input,
then the measured data output is always enabled.
3-33 Enabling measured data output
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold time
if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either using a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
MEASO: Reset
output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO: Reset MEASO: Output

reset
output EXT [ 037 117 ]
[ 036 087 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER MEASO: Reset
[ 003 002 ] meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
49Z64H6A_EN
3-34 Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device's inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measured values, in particular fault location in percent.
3-54 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output
The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.
The selected measured value is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling of BCD output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated
BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD

MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this
should occur or if the measured value is outside the acceptable measuring range, then
the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measured values Range

Measured values of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measured values to be Range

output
Measured values to be Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
output
Scaled measured values to Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
be output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
values in the data model
Measured values BCD display values

Measured values in the BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
range "Measured values to (Valid BCD value)
be output"
Measured values: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measured values Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measured values Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-56 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

BCD output
The value range for the fault measured value is set from –320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.

Fault measured value: -320.00% ... +320.00%
FT_DA: Fault
locat. percent
values

output
Measured values to be 0% ... 200%
output
Scaled measured values to 0.5 ... 0.813
be output with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
Measured values BCD display values

Measured values in the 0 ... 200
range "Measured values to
be output"
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER Yes
053 002 MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
010 010 MEASO: Hold time output BCD 1.00 s
037 140 MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 0.500
037 141 MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 0.813
037 142 MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 0
037 143 MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 200
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' signal are issued only
in the value range of 0% to 200%.
[004.027] FT_DA: [037.050] MEASO: [004.027] FT_DA:

Fault locat. percent = Not measured Valid BCD value = Yes Fault locat. percent = Not measured
200
BCD value
0
-320% 0% 200% 320% [004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
47Z1040A_EN
3-35 Example of BCD output of fault location
Note:
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value
only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is
more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible
range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.
3-58 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-36 BCD Measured Data Output
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measured values available in the P43x for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be
defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring
instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of set hold time
M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measured value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x o u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-60 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range in
scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for
the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-37.
Measured value range to

be output
The measured value range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measured value range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measured value range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)

Measured values of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
values

output
Measured values with knee- Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
point to be output
Scaled measured values Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
with a scaled knee-point to
be output with:
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. Ax" … "Scaled knee val. Ax"
values in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Measured values Analog display values

Measured values in the "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...
range "Measured values to ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
be output" ... "AnOut max. val."
(Value A-x valid)
Measured values: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-62 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measured value to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.

Measured values of the 0 V ... 150 V
variable Mx
values

output
Measured values with knee- 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
point to be output
Associated scaled measured 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
values
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measured values Analog display values

Measured values in the 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
range "Measured values
to be output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER Yes
053 000 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MAIN:
Voltage A-B PU
010 114 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with
0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 0.067 (corresponds with
0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 0.667 (corresponds with
1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 16 mA
037 109 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 18 mA
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines
the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By
defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
monotonically increasing or decreasing curve is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not
allowed). If the setting was not properly entered, the S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g A -
x signal will be issued.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, set to M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , is
switched on-line again.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
6
Min.
output value 4
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013 0,067 0,667 1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN
3-37 Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-64 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-38 Analog Measured Data Output
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P43x via the communications interface.
MEASO: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P43x either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-66 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P43x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are
freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or
amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured
independently).
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors),
if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 1 (green) “HEALTHY” Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) “EDIT MODE” Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when the
device is in this mode, can setting parameters be changed by pressing
the “Up“ and “Down“ keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and
Keypad')
H 2 (amber) “OUT OF SERVICE” Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y .

H 3 (amber) “ALARM” Permanently configured with function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) .
H 4 (red) “TRIP COMMAND” With the P43x this LED indicator is customarily configured with function
M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l - but the configuration may be modified.
H 4 (green) ---- Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely configurable.
H 5 to H 16 ---- For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may be
configured freely and independently.
The following figures illustrate the layout of LED indicators situated on the local control
panel with case 40TE/84TE devices.
H4
H3
TRIP
ALARM
F1 H18
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1
H17
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
F2 H19
H5
H6
F3 H20
H7
H8 C
G
H9
H10
G F4 H21
H11
H12
G G F5
G
H22
H13
H14
H15
H16
G F6 H23
12 Z6100B_EN
P43x/EN M/Ac7-S // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually using setting
parameters or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of
the P43x"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:
• flashing / continuous,
• energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
• updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-68 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating
mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-Hxx
12 (red)
1: ES updating ! G !
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) ≥1
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
2: ES manual reset
8: ES manual reset bl
3: ES reset (fault) LED: State H xx
& red
9: ES reset (fault) bl [ zzz zzz ]
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl &
11: NE updating bl &
12: NE manual reset bl
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED: State H xx
Signal n & green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected signals
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx
Signal 3 m out of n (green)
Signal n
Selected signals &
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
&
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
12Z6200 A_EN
3-39 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Main Functions of the P43x (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the real time acquisition (time tagging),
debouncing and chatter suppression functions are included by default. Each of these
signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for each of these groups the
debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters
achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.
3-40 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
3-70 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer
stage.
If the signal remains stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing
the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be
generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value
'After debounce time'.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the
same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has
elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the
value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in
the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value
'1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the
operating data memory.
3-41 Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge
(e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem sorted'.)
Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms
s: start
e: end
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
Chatter suppression
The transmission of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated for the
admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can be set.
After the first "inadmissible" signal change, no further telegrams are generated and the
timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing, it is re-triggered by each
new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed, each signal change triggers a
telegram.
3-42 Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression

Example: Set debouncing time: 20 ms
Set chatter monitoring time: 200 ms
Number of admissible signal changes: 4
s: start
e: end
3-72 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.2 Bay Type Selection
The P43x is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The bay type defines the
topology of a bay with its switchgear units.
The P43x offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. If the required bay type is not
included in the standard selection, the user can contact the manufacturer of the P43x to
request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P43x. By applying
the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also define new
bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at
MAIN: Customized bay type.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P43x can automatically configure the binary
inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the
List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
3-43 Bay type selection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.3 Conditioning of the Measured Values
The secondary phase currents and voltages of the system transformers are fed into the
P43x and are – electrically isolated – converted to standardized electronics levels. Air-
gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC
decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus
available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P43x to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection arrangement of the measuring circuits must also be set on the P43x.
Figure 3-44 shows the standard connection. The phase of the digitized currents is
rotated by 180° by this setting.
3-74 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
A
B
C
MAIN: Vref,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
Vref
2U
MAIN: Conn. MAIN: Inom

meas. circ. IP device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
IA
X X. Y IA
IB
IB
X X. Y
IC X X. Y IC
1: Standard
IN (Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: Conn. MAIN: IN,nom

meas. circ. IN device
[ 010 019 ] [ 010 026 ]
IN
X X. Y
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: VNG,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
N(e)
E(n) VN-G
MAIN: Vnom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
U
VA-G
e V
VB-G
W VC-G
N
Line
49Z6400A_EN
3-44 Connecting the measuring circuits of the P43x
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.4 Operating Data Measurement
The P43x has an operating data measurement function for the display of the measured
currents and voltages as well as quantities derived from these measured values. Set
minimum thresholds must be exceeded for measured values to be displayed, so as to
avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these minimum thresholds are not
exceeded, 'not measured' is displayed in place of a value. The following measured
values are displayed:
Phase currents for all three phases (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Maximum phase current (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Minimum phase current (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Delayed and stored phase currents for all three phases (as primary quantities and as
per-unit quantities
Delayed and stored maximum phase current (as primary quantitiesand as per-unit
quantities
Positive- and negative-sequence current, based on the set phase sequence
(alternative terminology: rotary field)
Residual current measured by the P43x at the T 4 transformer and calculated
residual current (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Phase-to-ground voltage (as a primary quantity)
Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit
quantity)
Phase-to-phase voltages (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage (as a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Positive- and negative-sequence voltage, based on the set phase sequence
(alternative terminology: rotary field)
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P43x at the T 90 transformer (as
a primary quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Reference voltage measured by the P43x at the T 15 transformer (as a primary
quantity and as a per-unit quantity)
Active, reactive and apparent power (as primary quantities and as per-unit quantities)
Active power factor
Load angle ϕ in all three phases (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to
100°)
Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement
voltage (as an angle and as a per-unit quantity referred to 100°)
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
Angle between the sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages and the measured
residual current (as an angle and as a per-unit quantity referred to 100°)
Frequency (as a quantity and as a per-unit quantity referred to fnom)
Active and reactive energy
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted when a general
starting signal is issued or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-76 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P43x and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P43x.
According to the following equations the P43x will determine the negative-sequence
current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
clockwise rotating field) anti-clockwise rotating field)
1
(
Ineg = ⋅ I A + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3
) 1
(
Ineg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ IB + a 2 ⋅ IC
3
)
Ipos =
1
(
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
) Ipos =
1
(
⋅ I + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j 240°
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Meas. value

MAIN: Hardware C rel. IP
fault [ 011 030 ]
306 618
IA C1
IB C2
IC C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
MAIN: Current A
1 p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN: Current B
2 p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN: Current C
3 p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
+ MAIN: Current
+ 4 (IP) p.u.
+ [ 005 011 ]
MAIN: Current
COMP 5 IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: Current
6 IP,min p.u.
Imax [ 005 056 ]
Imin MAIN: Current

7 Ineg p.u.
[ 009 015 ]
MAIN: Current
8 Ipos p.u.
[ 009 016 ]
MAIN: Rotary MAIN: Inom C.T.

field prim.
[ 010 049 ] [ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Current A
Ineg prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN: Current B
Ipos prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN: Current C
prim.
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN: Current
(IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
45Z6301A_EN
3-45 Measured operating data – phase current, part 1: phase currents, negative-sequence current, and positive-sequence current
3-78 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: IA p.u.,
demand
[ 006 235 ]
MAIN: IB p.u.,
demand
[ 006 236 ]
MAIN: IC p.u.,
demand
[ 006 237 ]
MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: IP,max

IP,max,del p.u.,demand
[ 010 113 ] [ 005 037 ]
MAIN: Current A MAIN: IA p.u.,

p.u. demand stor.
[ 005 041 ] R [ 006 232 ]
MAIN: Current B MAIN: IB p.u.,

p.u. demand stor.
[ 006 041 ] R [ 006 233 ]
MAIN: Current C MAIN: IC p.u.,

p.u. demand stor.
[ 006 234 ]
[ 007 041 ] R
MAIN: Current MAIN: IP,max
IP,max p.u. p.u.,demand.st
[ 005 051 ] [ 005 035 ]
R
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: IA prim,
demand
[ 006 226 ]
MAIN: IB prim,
demand
[ 006 227 ]
MAIN: IC prim,
demand.
[ 006 228 ]
MAIN: IP,max
prim.,demand
[ 005 036 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER MAIN: IA prim,
[ 003 033 ]
demand stor.
[ 006 223 ]
0
MAIN: IB prim,
1 demand stor.
[ 006 224 ]
MAIN: General 0: don`t execute
reset USER 1: execute MAIN: IC prim,
[ 003 002 ] demand stor.
1: execute [ 006 225 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT MAIN: IP,max
[ 005 255 ] prim,demand.st.
MAIN: Reset [ 005 034 ]
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
19Z6404 A_EN
3-46 Measured operating data – phase current, part 2 delayed and stored measured current values
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
3-47 Measured operating data - residual current
Delayed maximum phase

current display
The P43x offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an
exponential function of the maximum phase current I (see upper curve in Figure 3-48).
The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached
95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .
Stored maximum phase

current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-48). The stored maximum phase current to the
actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-48).
3-80 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: Settl. t.

IP,max,del IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]

[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]

[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ] 50Z0115A_EN
3-48 Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P43x and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the
P43x.
According to the following equations the P43x will determine the negative-sequence
voltage and positive-sequence voltage, taking into account the set phase sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C

(alternative terminology: clockwise rotating field)
V neg =
1
3
(
⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G )
V pos =
1
3
(
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a 2 ⋅ V C −G )
Phase sequence A-C-B
(alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotating field)
V neg =
1
3
(
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a 2 ⋅ V C −G )
V pos =
1
3
(
⋅ V A −G + a 2 ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j 240°
3-82 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-49 Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the negative-sequence and positive-
sequence voltages
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
3-50 Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
3-84 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-51 Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage
3-52 Measured operating data – reference voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values for

power, active power factor,
and angle
Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following conditions:
Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and displayed as these
quantities are required for the subsequent energy measurement. Greater deviations
in measurements may occur with low phase currents or a critical power factor value
(see Chapter "Technical Data").
The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value exceeds
5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds 0.1 Inom
(0.025 Inom with the 'Dynamic range' set to Sensitive) and if the phase-to-ground
voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the neutral-point
displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual current exceeds 0.02 IN,nom
and the neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
The setting at M A I N : M e a s . d i r e c t i o n P , Q may be changed from 'Standard' to
'Opposite' if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data displayed
with the opposite sign (see figure 3-53):
MAIN: Active power P p.u.

MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
MAIN: Active power P prim.
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim.
This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating values.
It must be noted that by inverting the sign will only affect the display of measured
operating data, all protection functions will still apply internally non-inverted measured
values.
The load angle and the angle between the measured values for the residual current and
the neutral-point displacement voltage are only determined when associated currents
and voltages exceed the defined minimum thresholds (see above for the acceptable
range).
3-86 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Active
power factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T. MAIN: Meas.
prim. direction P,Q
[ 010 001 ] [ 006 096 ]
MAIN: Active
MAIN: Vnom V.T. power P p.u.
prim. X X. Y [ 004 051 ]
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
> 0.05 Snom X X. Y Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
+ X X. Y MAIN: Active
+ power P prim.
+ X X. Y [ 004 050 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
1: Standard Q prim.
(Y = 1) [ 004 052 ]
MAIN: Dynamic 2: Opposite
range I (Y = -1)
[ 031 082 ]
IA > 0.1 Inom
IB > 0.1 Inom
IC > 0.1 Inom
VA-G > 1.5 V
VB-G > 1.5 V MAIN: Angle VPG/

& C IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]
VC-G > 1.5 V
MAIN: Angle VPG
vs. IN
[ 005 009 ]
IN > 0.02 INnom
MAIN: Load angle
& C phi A p.u
VN-G > 1.5 V [ 005 073 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi A
[ 004 055 ]
MAIN: Load angle

& C phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi B
[ 004 056 ]
MAIN: Load angle

& C phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi C
[ 004 057 ]
C MAIN: Angle phi N

& p.u.
[ 005 076 ]
MAIN: Angle phi N

[ 004 072 ]
MAIN: Hardware
fault C
306 018
MAIN: Appar.
power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]
MAIN: Appar.
power S prim.
[ 005 025 ]
49Z6404 A_EN
3-53 Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle. Not displayed in the diagram: With the 'Dynamic range' set to Sensitive
the condition for phase currents changes from 'exceeding 0.1 Inom' to 'exceeding 0.025 Inom'.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase relation IN
The P43x checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured
residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the two currents is
≤ 45°, then the indication ‘Equal phase’ is displayed.
3-54 Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
Frequency
The P43x determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for the frequency to be determined.
MAIN: General C
starting
306 539
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018 >0.65*Vnom
MAIN: Frequency f
VA-G + C p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
VB-G -
f MAIN: Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
12Z6209 A_EN
3-55 Frequency measurement
3-88 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Active and reactive energy

output and input
The P43x determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the
primary active or reactive power.
There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy. If
procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s
(approximately) as in software versions –601. If procedure 2 is selected, active and
reactive energy are determined every 100 ms (approximately). In this way higher
accuracy is achieved. Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h
is exceeded, a counter is incremented and the determination of the energy output is
restarted. The value that exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
The total energy is calculated as follows:
Total energy = number of overflows · 655.35 + current count
MAIN: Op. mode

energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]
MAIN: Active
power P prim.
[ 004 050 ] MAIN: Act.energy
P(t) dt outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
R
- P(t) dt MAIN: Act.energy

inp. prim
R [ 005 062 ]
MAIN: Reac.
power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ] MAIN: React.en.
Q(t) dt outp. prim
MAIN: Reset [ 005 063 ]
meas.v.en.USER R
[ 003 032 ]
0 - Q(t) dt MAIN: React. en.

inp. prim
R [ 005 064 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute Overflow MAIN: No.overfl.
act.en.out
[ 009 090 ]
Transfer
MAIN: Reset
meas.v.en. EXT
[ 005 212 ]
Overflow MAIN: No.overfl.
act.en.inp
Transfer [ 009 091 ]
Overflow MAIN: No.ov/fl.

reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
Transfer
MAIN: No.ov/fl.
Overflow reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Transfer
45Z6302A_EN
3-56 Determining the active and reactive energy output and input
3-90 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the procedure

to determine energy output
Procedure Characteristics Applications
1 Determination of the active and reactive energy Constant load and slow load variations (no
every 2 s (approximately) significant load variations within 1 second).
Reduced system loading Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
2 Determination of the active and reactive energy Fast load variations

every 100 ms (approximately).
Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
Increased system loading
The 1° maximum phase-angle error of the P43x leads to greater errors in measurement
when the phase angle increases, as shown (for the range 0° ≤ ϕ < 90°) in the following
diagram.
Fault
Fehler
5%
2%
45° 70° Angle ϕ S8Z0401B

Phasenwinkel
Phase
3-57 Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P43x
Error of measurement: approx. ± 2 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.7

approx. ± 5 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.3
where the whole measuring range is -180° ≤ ϕ ≤ 180°.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
For phase angles ϕ with |cosϕ| < 0.3, or when the error of measurement resulting from
the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to
determine the energy output.
3.12.5 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the desired device functions in the
configuration and canceling all the others, the user creates an individually configured
device adapted to the specific application. Parameters, signals and measured values of
cancelled device functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of
general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions
(MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Canceling a device
function
The following conditions must be met before a device function can be cancelled or
removed:
The device function must be disabled.

None of the functions of the device function to be cancelled are assigned to a binary
input.
None of the signals of the device function are assigned to a binary output or to an
LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled are selected in a list setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant to the device function to be cancelled. If, for example,
the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, access the L I M I T : F u n c t i o n g r o u p
L I M I T parameter and set its value to 'Without'. To re-include the "LIMIT" function in
the device configuration, access the same parameter and set its value to 'With'.
The device function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined
by the function group designation (example: "LIMIT"). In the following sections of this
manual, it is presumed that the device function being described is included in the
configuration.
3-92 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

protection function
Besides canceling device functions from the configuration, it is also possible to disable
the device via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. The device may be disabled
or enabled through binary signal inputs only if functions
M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as 'Protection externally enabled'. If the triggering signals of the
binary signal inputs are implausible – such as when they both have a logic value of ‘ 1 ’ –
then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note: If the protection function is disabled via a binary signal input that is
configured for M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T , then no M A I N :
B l o c k e d / f a u l t y signal is issued.
3-58 Enabling or disabling a protection function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.6 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are switched on or connected. It will then block the following
functions:
Overcurrent and underimpedance fault detection logic of distance protection.

Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC)
Definite-time overcurrent protection
Inverse-time overcurrent protection
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set
threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current
trigger blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the
operating mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or
across all phases.
3-94 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Op. rush

restr. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
&
1: Not phase-
selective
2: Phase-
selective
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN: I>lift rush

& C restr PSx
MAIN: Protection [ * ]
active MAIN: Rush restr.
306 001 A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
&
IA
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
&
IB
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
&
IC
0.1 Inom
MAIN: Rush
I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
fnom
I(2*fn)/I(fn)
2*fnom
fnom
2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)
fnom
2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)
Parameter MAIN: Op. rush MAIN: I>lift rush MAIN: Rush

restr. PSx restr PSx I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
set 1 017 097 017 095 017 098
set 2 001 088 001 085 001 091
set 3 001 089 001 086 001 092
set 4 001 090 001 087 001 093
12Z6206 A_EN
3-59 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.7 Function Blocks
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be
prevented independently of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external
"CB drive not ready" signal or by the trip command from an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output

signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to function blocks 1 and 2
by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts a
timer stage. Once this has elapsed, the M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . X a c t i v e signal is
issued.
3-60 Function blocks
3-96 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.8 Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined by selecting 'm out of n' parameters.
The selected functions may then be blocked by way of an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
3-61 Multiple Blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.9 Blocked/faulty
If the protection functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber H 2 LED indicator on the local control panel and by a signal
from an output relay configured for M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition functions
can be selected that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting an ‘m
out of n’ parameter.
3-62 'Blocked/faulty' signal
As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input only if
this coupling is implemented.
(Figure number 3-63 is reserved for the next device version.)
3-98 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.10 Monitoring and Processing of CB Status Signals
Extended CB status
signals
The extended monitoring of the circuit breaker (CB) status signals is now available in the
main function group. It is now possible to select whether the multiple signals
"C B c l o s e d 3 p " / "C B o p e n 3 p " or (for P435 only) pole selective "Closed" status
signals will be monitored. Simultaneous monitoring of all status signals is not feasible
and should therefore not be undertaken.
If only the M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T binary signal input has been configured
then the M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p signal will also be issued (see Figure 3-).
Figure 3- shows the logical processing of the various input signals. The plausibility logic
will be triggered should one of the following discrepancies be detected:
A minimum of one 3-pole monitoring signal and one 1-pole monitoring signal are
configured at the same time.
Both multiple signals M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T and
M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T are present simultaneously.
For P435 only: There is no pole-selective status signal
M A I N : C B c l o s e d x E X T present (i.e. CB contact is open) but at the same time
there is a current flow exceeding 0.05 Inom in this conductor.
The plausibility logic has been modified accordingly to permit that the binary signal input
only be configured at M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T . This makes a backward
compatible operation possible (for example in an existing plant where only this signal
has been wired).
In order to suppress triggering during transient actions, the signal issued when a
plausibility discrepancy is detected has a generally delayed pickup of 100 ms.
Besides monitoring for signaling purposes, status signals are also processed in these
functions:
MAIN: Ending a CB (re-)close command

If the (re-)close command is to be terminated by the 'CB closed' signal (setting at
M A I N : R C i n h . b y C B c l o s e d = 'Yes') then the resulting
M A I N : C B c l o s e d 3 p signal will now be interrogated (instead of the previously
interrogated M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T input signal).
ARC: Ready indication
If the ARC should only be available when the circuit breaker has already been closed
(setting at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . P S x = "With") then the resulting signal
M A I N : C B c l o s e d 3 p will now be interrogated (instead of the input signal
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T previously interrogated).
Note: The 1pHSR plausibility logic of the P437 device (when pole selective status
signals are used the 1-pole HSR was terminated if exactly the same pole, or at least
a further pole, were not opened) is not available with the P43x!
PSIG and (for P435 only) GSCSG: Un-delayed echo if CB is open
If the CB is open, the echo signal (if enabled) is issued without additional delay. For
this the M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p signal is now used instead of the previously used
inverted M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T input signal.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: Release of negative-sequence voltage protection using CB status

indication
With the operating mode set to 'Vneg w.CB cont.enab.' the internally generated
M A I N : C B c l o s e d 3 p signal is now used instead of the
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T input signal.
GFTRP: Release of the trip signal
The internally generated M A I N : C B c l o s e d 3 p signal is now used as the trip
enabling criterion instead of the M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T input signal.
3-100 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: CB open 3p & MAIN: CB open 3p

EXT [ 031 040 ]
[031 028] &
&
&
[031 028] & MAIN: CB open >=1p

configured & [ 031 039 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT MAIN: CB closed 3p
[036 051] & & [ 031 042 ]
&
&
[036 051] MAIN: CB closed

configured & >= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
MAIN: CB closed A
EXT MAIN: CB closed A
[031 029] & & [ 031 035 ]
MAIN: CB open A
& & [ 031 032 ]
[031 029]
configured
MAIN: CB closed B
EXT MAIN: CB closed B
[031 030] & & [ 031 036 ]
MAIN: CB open B
& & [ 031 033 ]
[031 030]
configured
MAIN: CB closed C MAIN: CB closed C

EXT & & [ 031 037 ]
[031 031]
MAIN: CB open C
& & [ 031 034 ]
[031 031]
configured
10 100 ms
5 0 t MAIN: CB pos.sig.
unplaus.
[ 031 041 ]
>0.05
Inom Plausibility
check
IA
IB
IC
45Z1101B_EN
3-64 Monitoring of CB status signals (The P433 does not feature pole-selective CB status signals)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.11 Close Command
The circuit breaker can be closed from the P43x by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC), using a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
The close command issued using a setting parameter or via a binary signal input is
executed only if there is no trip command 1 present and that no trip has been issued by
a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the setting of
M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l o s e to 'Yes', the close command is not executed if
there is a "CB closed" position signal present. The duration of the close command is
settable.
Close command counter

The close commands are counted. This counter may be reset individually or together
with other counters (see section 'Resetting Actions').
3-102 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Gen. trip

signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Parallel
trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN: Trip A 1)
parallel EXT
[ 036 052 ]
MAIN: Trip B 1)
parallel EXT
[ 036 053 ]
MAIN: Trip C 1)
parallel EXT
[ 036 054 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN: RC inh.by
CB cl.
[ 015 042 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: En.man.
clos.cmd.USER
[ 003 105 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes MAIN: Man. cl.
cmd.enabl.
[ 039 113 ]
MAIN: Man. close

cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
MAIN: Man. close
command
0 500ms [ 037 068 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd. MAIN: Man. close

enabl.EXT cmd. EXT
[ 041 023 ] [ 041 022 ]
GRUND: Man.
Ein K. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Close cmd.
C pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
1
t
ARC: Close command
303 021
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
MAIN: No. close

0 + commands
[ 009 055 ]
1
MAIN: General 0: don't execute
reset USER R
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.c EXT 1) only P435
[ 005 210 ]
45Z63CKA_EN
3-65 Close command
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.12 Multiple Signaling
Multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR
operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is
defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding
multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored
signal is reset by the following actions:
General reset
Latching reset
LED indicators reset
A command received through the communication interface.
If the multiple signal is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow the
updated signal.
3-104 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Mult.
Selected signal sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN: Mult.
sig. 1 stored
S1 1 [ 221 054 ]
MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
Selected signal MAIN: Mult.

sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 1 MAIN: Mult.
[ --- --- ] sig. 2 stored
S1 1 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latching
402 102
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
12Z62FMA_EN
3-66 Multiple signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.13 Ground Fault Signaling
If a ground fault has been detected by either the GFDSS function (ground fault direction
determination by steady-state values) or the TGFD function (transient ground fault
direction determination), the P43x analyzes the phase-to-ground voltages and identifies
the phase on which the ground fault has occurred.
The P43x will first determine the lowest phase-to-ground voltage. Then it will check
whether the other two phase-to-ground voltages exceed a threshold of 0.2 Vnom.
In addition, the two highest phase-to-ground voltages must exceed the lowest phase-to-
ground voltage by a factor of 1.5. If these conditions are met, a ground fault signal is
issued for the phase with the lowest phase-to-ground voltage.
During a ground fault in Petersen coil-compensated power systems, the faulted phase
determination process is stopped as soon as the faulted phase is determined. Then
there will be no further measuring done until the end of the ground fault. Thus erroneous
signaling at the end of the ground fault is avoided, as the voltages of the healthy phases
may transiently fulfill the faulty phase criteria.
B C B C B C
N N N
(G)
(G) (G)
A A A
a) under -compensation b) tuned circuit c) over-compensation

( A-B-C-A) ( A-C-B-A)
49Z6409 A_EN
3-67 Transient condition of ground potential from faulted phase A back to the neutral point in Petersen coil-grounded systems (Petersen coil
and ground-capacitance of the system form a 50 Hz resonant circuit)
3-106 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-68 Phase-selective ground fault signaling
Ground fault signals generated either by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS) or transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD)
are grouped together to form multiple signals.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
3-69 Multiple ground fault signals
3-108 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.14 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
Starting signals
The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time protection
functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of general starting
signals (GS) is counted.
MAIN: General + MAIN: No. general

reset USER start.
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 000 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: General MAIN: General
starting starting
[ 036 240 ] [ 036 000 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
DIST: Starting A
303 529
MAIN: Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
BUOC: IA>
triggered
304 750
DIST: Starting B MAIN: Starting B

303 530
[ 036 002 ]
BUOC: IB>
triggered
304 751
DIST: Starting C MAIN: Starting C

303 531
[ 036 003 ]
BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752
DIST: Starting
303 535
N MAIN: Starting N
[ 036 004 ]
BUOC: SN
304 757
49Z6402A_EN
3-70 Fault detection signals of the P433
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General MAIN: No. general

reset USER + start.
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 000 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: General MAIN: General
starting starting
[ 036 240 ] [ 036 000 ]
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
DIST: Starting MAIN: Starting A

A [ 036 001 ]
303 529
BUOC: IA>
triggered
304 750
DIST: Starting MAIN: Starting B

B [ 036 002 ]
303 530
BUOC: IB>
triggered
304 751
DIST: Starting MAIN: Starting C

C [ 036 003 ]
303 531
BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752
DIST: Signal
block start.G &
303 594
DIST: Starting MAIN: Starting GF
N1 [ 036 004 ]
303 535
BUOC: SN
304 757
45Z63ASA_EN
3-71 Fault detection signals of the P435
3-110 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command
The P43x provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be selected by
setting an 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip commands. The
minimum trip command time is settable. The trip signals are present only as long as the
conditions for the signal are met.
DIST: Trip signal MAIN: Trip

zone 1 signal
[ 035 072 ] 306 025
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
PSIG: Not ready

[ 037 028 ]
DIST: Trip signal

Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Trip 2
305 156
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG: Trip V<
305 158
BUOC: Trip
signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: Test HSR

A-B-C int.
303 022
ARC: External
trip
303 023
ARC: 3p final
trip
[ 036 043 ]
MAIN: 3-pole
trip
306 013
BUOC: Operating
mode
[ 014 000 ]
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
3: With ARC, 1/3p.

HSR
49Z6403A_EN
3-72 Trip in Zone 1 (for P433 only)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip cmd.

blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
MAIN: Trip signal 1
signal [ 036 005 ]
306 025
DIST: Trip sig. MAIN: Gen. trip

zone 2-8 command 1
[ 035 073 ] [ 036 071 ]
MAIN: Min.dur.
trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]
MAIN: Fct.assig.
trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Trip
Selected signals signal 1
306 017
MAIN: Fct.assig.
trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip

m out of n command
[ 035 071 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip

[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN: Min.dur.
MAIN: General trip cmd. 2 MAIN: Gen. trip
starting [ 021 004 ] signal
[ 036 000 ] [ 036 251 ]
45Z6303A_EN
3-73 Forming of trip commands by the P433
3-112 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-74 Phase-selective trip (for P435 only)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip cmd.

blocked
[ 021 013 ] MAIN: Trip
signal 1, A
MAIN: Trip A [ 036 006 ]
306 009
MAIN: Trip
command 1, A
[ 036 072 ]
MAIN: Trip
signal 1, B
[ 036 007 ]
MAIN: Trip B
306 010
MAIN: Trip
command 1, B
[ 036 073 ]
MAIN: Trip
signal 1, C
[ 036 008 ]
MAIN: Trip C
306 011
MAIN: Trip
command 1, C
[ 036 074 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip

signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
DIST: Trip MAIN: Gen. trip

zone 2 command 1
303 585 [ 036 071 ]
DIST: Trip
zone 3 MAIN: Min.dur.
303 586
trip cmd. 1
DIST: Trip [ 021 003 ]
zone 4
303 587
DIST: Trip
zone 5
303 588
DIST: Trip
zone 6
303 621
DIST: Trip
zone 7
303 622 MAIN: Fct.assig.
DIST: Trip signal trip cmd.1
zone 8 [ 021 001 ]
[ 037 130 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Trip
306 017
MAIN: Fct.assig.
trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]
m out of n
MAIN: Gen. trip

[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN: General MAIN: Min.dur.
starting trip cmd. 2 MAIN: Gen. trip
[ 036 000 ] [ 021 004 ] signal
[ 036 251 ]
45Z6305A_EN
3-75 Forming of trip commands by the P435
3-114 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Direct underreaching
transfer trip
Direct transfer tripping independently of the protective signaling scheme logic (function
group PSIG) is possible by using the following input signal:
M A I N : Transfer trip. EXT

This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical scheme
logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) concurrently.
Direct transfer trip

As of version -611 there are special send signals for the direct transfer trip of the switch
at the remote end:
MAIN: Send transfer trip

M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p A (for P435 only)
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p B (for P435 only)
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p C (for P435 only)
These send signals were designed for applications with bi-directional transfer tripping so
as to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only because such a transfer
trip signal was received from the remote station.
With a 3-pole trip, the M A I N : s e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p signal is sent as soon as the

M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 signal has been issued, except when this trip
command was issued when the M A I N : t r a n s f e r t r i p . E X T signal was received
(see figure 3-).
For the P435 with 1/3-pole tripping the same applies to 1-pole send signals.
Note:
The P435 should either be used with phase-selective transfer tripping (1-pole) or 3-pole
transfer tripping, but never with both transfer trip types used simultaneously.
The reason for this is that with each 1-pole trip command a 3-pole general trip
command 1 is issued. If, for instance, the M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p . A E X T signal is
received without a local trip signal being present, then the P435 will issue a 1-pole
M A I N : T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , A as well as the 3-pole
M A I N : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d 1 . Since no 3-pole transfer trip signal
M A I N : T r a n s f e r t r i p . E X T was received, the P435 will send the
M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p signal (but not the M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p A
signal).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
Signal assignment Kxx:

Signal assignment Kxx: MAIN: Send
MAIN: Send transfer trip
transfer trip [001 207]
[001 207]
Signal assignment Uxx: Vin

Signal assignment Uxx:
MAIN: Transfer MAIN: Transfer &
trip. EXT Vin trip. EXT
[120 046] [120 046]
MAIN: Gen. trip

command 1 S 1 1
[036 071]
R 1
P43x P43x
45Z6304A_EN
3-76 3-pole transfer trip
Manual trip command

A three-pole manual trip command may be issued using setting parameters or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The manual trip is only executed, however,
if it is included in the selection of the possible functions that will bring about tripping.
3-77 Manual trip command
3-116 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately configured binary
signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip commands. The trip signals are
not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the
continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured to 'Blocked/faulty'.
3-78 Blocking of the trip commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command counters

The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a
group.
DIST: Trip signal MAIN: No. final

[ 036 009 ] + trip cmds.
[ 004 005 ]
BUOC: Trip signal R
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN: Final trip
S1 1 1 100 ms [ 038 103 ]
R1
MAIN: Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN: Trip signal 1
303 021
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked

[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 MAIN: No.

+ gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] [ 004 006 ]
R
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 MAIN: No.
[ 036 022 ] + gen.trip cmds. 2
[ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: Reset c. cl/
tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.c.cl./
tripc. EXT
[ 005 210 ]
49Z64CJA_EN
3-79 P433 counter of trip commands
3-118 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: No. final

ARC: External trip A + trip cmds.
303 016 [ 004 005 ]
ARC: External trip B R
303 017
ARC: External trip C

303 018
DIST: Trip signal

[ 036 009 ] 1 100 ms MAIN: Final trip
[ 038 103 ]
BUOC: Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
S1 1
R1
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN: Trip signal 1
306 017
MAIN: Trip cmd.

blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: Trip MAIN: No. trip

command 1, A + cmds. 1, A
[ 036 072 ] [ 005 006 ]
R
command 1, B + cmds. 1, B
[ 036 073 ] [ 005 007 ]
R
command 1, C + cmds. 1, C
[ 036 074 ] [ 005 008 ]
R
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: No. gen.
command 1 + trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] [ 004 006 ]
R
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: No. gen.
command 2 + trip cmds. 2
[ 036 022 ] [ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
45Z63CJA_EN
3-80 P435 counter of trip commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.15 CB Trip Signal
The M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l signal is issued if the following conditions are met

simultaneously:
The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of ' 1 ' or the
selected trip command from the P43x is present.
At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of ' 1 ' is present.
The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two
binary signal inputs need to be configured as “CB trip enable ext.“ and as “CB trip ext.“.
3-120 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Inp.assign.
tripping
[ 221 010 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB
MAIN: Gen. trip tripped
command 1 [ 221 012 ]
[ 036 071 ]
0
1
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2 2
[ 036 022 ]
3
0 3
0 Without function
1 Gen. trip command 1
2 Gen. trip command 2
3 Gen.trip command 1/2
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB

trip
[ 221 013 ]
BM01: Switch.
device open
[ 210 036 ]
BM02: Switch.
device open
[ 210 086 ]
BM03: Switch.
device open MAIN: CB trip
[ 210 136 ] internal
Selected signal [ 221 006 ]
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB
tr.en.ext
[ 221 050 ]
MAIN: CB tripped
[ 221 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB
trip ext
[ 221 024 ]
Selected signal
ARC: Sig.interr.
CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
12Z6269B_EN
3-81 CB trip signal
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.16 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the
P43x, the P43x first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch
command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the
interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic
for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each
control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock
equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station
interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units
within a bay. If station interlocking is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each
switching unit and each control direction (see “Control and Monitoring of Switchgear
Units”).
If 'Local' has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be
cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-122 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-82 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the interlocks
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
3-83 Rejection of the switching commands
3.12.17 Communication Error
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, a

'Communication error' signal will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.
3-84 Communication Error
3-124 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.18 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct time-tagging, the date and time
need to be set in the P43x.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The P43x evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-85 Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronization source
The P43x provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full
time)
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3- and previous
paragraph
With older device versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock synchronization
was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No conflicts have to
be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master,
IRIG-B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the
synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in
the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization
is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while
the SCADA communication is out of service.
With the current device versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above.
M A I N : Prim.Source TimeSync
M A I N : BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams (or minute signal pulses) are received within a time-out
period set at M A I N : T i m e s y n c . t i m e - o u t . The backup source is required if after
the set time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
3-126 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.19 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only
the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories
such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the local control panel.
By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories
may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-
by-step description in Chapter 6 "Local Control", section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is,
assign parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal
input, e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 after memories to be reset have been
assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is

assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115 A_EN
3-86 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset
3-128 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.

active ≥1 EXT
310 024 & [ 005 213 ]
LOC: Fct. reset

key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record.

EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]
1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]
m out of n
x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249
12Z61RMB_EN
3-87 "CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal OP_RC: Reset record. EXT); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- TGFD: Reset signal EXT
- MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
- MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
- MAIN Reset meas.v.en. EXT
- MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
- GF_RC: Reset record. EXT
- FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- ARC: Reset counters EXT
- GFDSS: Reset counters EXT
- TGFD: Reset counters EXT
- MAIN: General reset EXT
- COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT
- ASC: Reset counters EXT
- f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
- MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT
- LOGIC: Reset x EXT (x=1...8)
- MEASI: Reset output EXT
- THERM: Reset replica EXT
- OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
- MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
- M A I N Reset indicat. EXT
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.20 Assigning Communications Interfaces to

Physical Communications Channels
There are two communication channels available. These physical communications

channels may be assigned to 'logical' communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If 'logical' communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,

then the settings of 'logical' communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P43x if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 will become "dead".
3-88 Assigning 'logical' communications interfaces to physical communications channels
3-130 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.21 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P43x, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
3-89 Setting the test mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P43x, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter

subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary
signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or
via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the
parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals.
The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning
logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P43x
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function setting will be active. The P43x also checks whether the signals present at the
binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true
when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of ' 1 '. If more than one signal
input is set to a logic level of ' 1 ', then the parameter subset previously selected remains
active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is
the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of ' 0 '), then the stored hold time is
started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset
remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of ' 1 ', the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no
signal input with a logic level of ' 1 ', the parameter subset selected via the function
parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter
subset selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer
stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a general starting condition. In this
case, however, the settings for distance measurement and impedance-time
characteristics remain unchanged. They are not updated until the general starting
condition ends. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum
inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-132 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-90 Activating the parameter subsets
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P43x ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
Tests during start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P43x. If the P43x detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P43x can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured to
S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is
detected.
3-91 Monitoring signals
3-134 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P43x is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure.
A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm
restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial
interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked
but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that
the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the
cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring
signal memory.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 “Troubleshooting”.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior parameter S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n

is applied. This parameter may either be set to ‘blocked’ or to a time period (in hours).
The default for this timer stage is ‘blocked’ i.e. blocking of the protection device with two
identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first fault monitoring
signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. To defuse
this problem it is suggested to set the function parameter to a specific time period so that
blocking will only occur if the same fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise,
the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart.

time tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-136 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events,

a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals,
each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared/reset.
Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC: Operat.
data record.
[ 003 024 ]

MAIN: Oper.-
relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: General
reset USER + OP_RC: No. oper.
[ 003 002 ] data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA_EN
3-92 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries.
If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm
out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel.
Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).
MT_RC: Mon. signal

record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN: Time tag

306 021
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
Select monit.
signal
MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON: Overflow
≥1 MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC: No. monit.
1 ≥1 signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A_EN
3-93 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-138 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
Overload duration
In the event of an overload, the P43x determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
p r o g r e s s signal.
OL_RC: Record. OL_DA: Overload

in progress + duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A_EN
3-94 Overload duration
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquiring measured
overload data from the
thermal overload protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s measured
operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Status OL_DA: Status

THERM replica THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: I OL_DA: Load

305 202
current THER
[ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: Object OL_DA: Object

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: Coolant OL_DA: Coolant

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: Pre-trip OL_DA: Pre-trip

time left t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: Temp. OL_DA: Offset

offset replica THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A_EN
3-95 Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection
3-140 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the
T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > signal is issued.
Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Starting OL_RC: No.
k*Iref> + overload
[ 041 108 ] [ 004 101 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
45Z63DXA_EN
3-96 Counting overload events
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC
or communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then
O L _ R C : O v e r l . m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
3-142 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
OL_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 1 ≥1 + CT200 OL_RC: Overl. mem.

overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 007 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC: Overload
recording n
[ * ]
OL_RC: Overload
n
Measured value 1 recording n
1 033 020
Measured value 2
2 033 021
Measured value 3
3 033 022
Measured value n
MAIN: Time tag 4 033 023
306 021
5 033 024
FT_RC: Record. in & 6 033 025

progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R 8 033 027
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117 A_EN
3-97 Overload memory
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA)
In the event of a ground fault, the P43x acquires the following measured ground fault
data:
Duration of ground fault recording

When ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is
enabled
Duration of the ground fault with steady state value evaluation, steady state power
evaluation or admittance evaluation
Neutral-point displacement voltage VNG with steady state value evaluation or
admittance evaluation
Residual current IN
Active component of the residual current as determined by steady state power
evaluation
Reactive component of the residual current as determined by steady state power
evaluation
Filtered ground fault from steady state power evaluation
Admittance, conductance and susceptance with admittance evaluation.
Resetting measured
ground fault data
After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the measured ground fault
data value is displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can
continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
Duration of ground fault

recording
The duration of ground fault recording is defined as the time between the start and end
of the G F _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
GF_RC: Record. GF_DA: GF

in progress + recording time
[ 035 005 ] [ 009 100 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 005 242 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
49Z64DWA_EN
3-98 Duration of ground fault recording
3-144 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19.1 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Value Evaluation
Ground fault duration

The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the
G F D S S : V N G > trigger. However, a time is only output after the end of the ground
fault if the G F D S S : V N G > trigger has operated for at least the duration of set timer
stage G F D S S : t V N G > . Once G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed the display of the
ground fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: VNG> GF_DA: GF

triggered & + duration pow.meas
304 151 [ 009 024 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.) R
ready
[ 038 026 ] R
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0144A_EN
3-99 Measurement and storage of the ground fault duration from steady state power evaluation
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
The residual current flowing when timer stage G F D S S : t V N G > elapses is stored in
memory. Also stored is the active and reactive component of the residual current
determined at the time when the directional decision is output. All measured values are
output as per-unit quantities referred to the device’s nominal current Inom.
Neutral-point displacement
voltage
The neutral-point displacement voltage present when timer stage G F D S S : t V N G >
elapses is stored in memory.
GFDSS: Grd. C
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GF_DA: Current
IN IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: Current GF_DA: Curr.
IN,act p.u. IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ] [ 009 022 ]
& R
GFDSS: Curr. GF_DA: Curr.

IN,reac p.u. IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ] [ 009 023 ]
R
GF_DA: Voltage
GFDSS: VNG VNG p.u.
304 150 [ 009 020 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0145A_EN
3-100 Residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage from steady state value evaluation
3-146 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19.2 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Power Evaluation
Ground fault duration

The ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the
G F D S S : I N > trigger. However, a time is only output after the end of the ground fault
if the G F D S S : I N > trigger has operated for at least the duration of the set operate
delay (G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y IN). Once the operate delay has elapsed, the
display of the ground fault duration of the last ground fault is automatically cleared.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: IN> GF_DA: GF durat.

triggered + curr.meas.
304 158 [ 009 026 ]
R
R
GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed
304 157
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0148A_EN
3-101 Measurement and storing the ground fault duration as determined by steady state current evaluation
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
The unfiltered and filtered residual currents that are present when the operate delay
elapses (G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y IN) are stored.
GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed C
304 157
GF_DA: Current IN
IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GF_DA: Curr. IN
GFDSS: 2IN filt. p.u.
filtered [ 009 025 ]
304 159
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: ausführen
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0151A_EN
3-102 Ground fault as determined by steady state current evaluation
3-148 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC)
Start ground fault recording

A ground fault exists and ground fault recording begins if at least one of the following
conditions is met:
A ground fault has been detected by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS).
A ground fault has been detected by transient ground fault direction determination
(TGFD).
Counting ground fault
events
Ground fault events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
MAIN: Ground fault GF_RC: Record. in

[ 041 087 ] ≥1 progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
forw./LS
[ 041 088 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
backw./BS
[ 041 089 ]
MAIN: General GF_RC: No. ground

reset USER +
[ 003 002 ] faults
1: execute [ 004 100 ]
MAIN: General ≥1 R
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
50Z01B8A_EN
3-103 Counting ground fault events
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each ground fault event is stored. A ground fault’s individual start or end
signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a ground fault event
when the event begins can be read out from the ground fault memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the ground fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the
ground fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Ground fault logging

Protection signals during a ground fault event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific ground fault event. A total of eight ground fault logs, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile ground
fault memories. After eight ground fault events have been logged, the oldest ground
fault log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single ground fault, then
F T _ R C : G F m e m o r y o v e r f l o w is stored as the final signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured ground fault data will also be entered in the
ground fault memory.
The ground fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-150 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GF_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 005 ]
Signal 1 ≥1 + CT200 GF_RC: GF memory

1 overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 006 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 GF_RC: Ground
flt.record. n
[ * ]
GF_RC: Ground
n flt.record. n
Measured value 1
Measured value 2 1 033 010

3 033 012
Measured value n
306 021
5 033 014
& 6 033 015
FT_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 016
R 8 033 017
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
12Z6141 A_EN
3-104 Ground fault memory
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P43x collects the following measured fault
data:
Running time
Fault duration
Fault current
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance)
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in Ω
Fault angle
Fault distance
Ground fault current
Ground fault angle
Fault location in km or percentage of the protected line
Load data at end of fault
3-152 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
MAIN: General FT_DA: Running

starting + time
[ 036 000 ] [ 004 021 ]
R
FT_RC: Record. FT_DA: Fault

in progress + duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
49Z64DMA_EN
3-105 Running time and fault duration
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The setting at F T _ D A : S t a r t d a t a a c q u . P S x determines the point during a
fault at which acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are possible:
End of fault
Acquisition at the end of the fault.
Trigger/Trip/End
Acquisition at the following points:
When an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general
starting state.
When a general trip signal is issued.
At the end of the fault.
The setting at F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x determines the conditions under

which calculation and output of the fault location occur. The following settings are
possible:
'Always'
Calculation and output of the fault location always occurs if the other measured fault
data are also being determined.
'Only after trip t1'
Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the P43x decides in favor of a trip
in impedance zone 1 with standard reach (non-extended zone).
'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'
Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the P43x decides in favor of a trip
in impedance zone 1 with standard and extended reach.
3-154 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-106 Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of fault data

(short circuit data)
The fault data (short-circuit data) are determined using the measured values Imeas and
Vmeas selected by the distance protection function if the fault is detected by distance
protection. One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the
selected measuring loop. In the case of multi-phase starting, this is the current of the
leading phase in the cycle. When measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.2 V the set angle α is
used for fault reactance calculation. Then the set angle α is also displayed as the fault
loop angle. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance
using the nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected
for measurement by the distance protection function. The geometric sum of the three
phase currents is displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault angle is the
phase displacement between the ground fault current and the selected measuring
voltage.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then only the
fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom.
If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring range, the
‘Overflow’ indication will be displayed.
3-156 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Output
meas. values C 1,2
305 050
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Vnom V.T.
prim.
[ 010 002 ]
DIST: Select.
meas.loop P-G C 2
303 543
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] FT_DA: Fault
1,3,4 1 current P p.u.
BUOC: Starting 2 [ 004 025 ]
[ 036 013 ] R
FT_DA: Flt.volt.
1 1 PG/PP p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
IA 2
IB Imax FT_DA: Fault loop
IC 1 angle P
[ 004 024 ]
3 R
FT_DA: Fault
4 1 impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
R
DIST: Select. 2 ... 3
meas.loop A-G 1
303 537 1 FT_DA: Fault
1 reactance,sec.
DIST: Select. 4 [ 004 028 ]
meas.loop B-G 2 R
303 538
DIST: Select. FT_DA: Fault

meas.loop C-G 3 1 react., prim.
303 539 [ 004 029 ]
R
DIST: Select.
meas.loop A-B 1
303 540
FT_DA: Fault loop
2 angle N
DIST: Select. [ 004 048 ]
meas.loop B-C 2 R
303 541
DIST: Select. FT_DA: Fault

meas.loop C-A 3 2 curr. N p.u.
303 542 [ 004 049 ]
R
1
2
3
FT_DA: Meas. loop
1 ... 3 selected
[ 004 079 ]
< 0.2 V
DIST: Vmeas 1
303 546
2
1
DIST: α 2
MAIN: General
reset USER 1 ... 2
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
45Z6320A_EN
3-107 Acquisition of fault data (short circuit data)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of fault location

In order to determine the fault location as a percentage of the line length and in km, the
value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the monitored line section, as
well as the corresponding line length in km, must be set.
FT_DA: Line
length PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA: Line
reactance PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA: Outp. C
fault location
305 051
FT_DA: Fault
FT_DA: Fault location
reactance,sec. [ 004 022 ]
[ 004 028 ] R
MAIN: General FT_DA: Fault

reset USER locat. percent
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 027 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
Parameter FT_DA: Line FT_DA: Line

length PSx reactance PSx
set 1 010 005 010 012
set 2 010 006 010 013
set 3 010 007 010 014
set 4 010 008 010 015
49Z64DQA_EN
3-108 Acquisition of fault location
3-158 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of load data

In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when
the general starting signal of distance protection drops out:
Load impedance
Load angle
Residual current
The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load
impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the
thresholds 0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be
determined. If the thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal of distance
protection was shorter than 60 ms, the message ‘Not measured’ will be displayed.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General 1
starting
[ 036 240 ]
60 ms 0
S1 1
R1
C 1
DIST: Select. & S
meas.loop A-G R
303 537
& S C 2
DIST: Select.
meas.loop B-G R
303 538
S C 3
DIST: Select. &
meas.loop C-G
303 539 R
DIST: Select. & S C 4

meas.loop A-B
303 540 R
DIST: Select. & S C 5

meas.loop B-C
303 541 R
& S C 6
DIST: Select.
meas.loop C-A ≥ 0.1 Inom
303 542 R
DIST: IA-kG
303 601 &
1
DIST: IB-kG
303 602 2
DIST: IC-kG
≥ 0.1 Vnom
303 603 3
4
VA-G C
VB-G
5
FT_DA: Load
VC-G imped.post-flt.
6 [ 004 037 ]
R
1 ... 6 FT_DA: Load angle

IA post-flt.
[ 004 038 ]
IB R
FT_DA:
Resid.curr. post-
IC flt
[ 004 039 ]
R
IN
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
49A6421A_EN
3-109 Acquisition of load data
3-160 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset

After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present:
MAIN: General starting

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2
FT_RC: Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
parameter) which appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-162 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Fct.
assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Trigger

EXT [ 037 076 ]
[ 036 089 ]
FT_RC: Trigger
USER
[ 003 041 ]
0
1 FT_RC: Record.
in progress
0: don't execute [ 035 000 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: General FT_RC: No. of

reset USER + faults
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 020 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT FT_RC: No. system
[ 005 255 ] + disturb.
FT_RC: Reset [ 004 010 ]
record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: System
& disturb. runn
ARC: Cycle [ 035 004 ]
running & S1 1
[ 037 000 ]
R1
45Z6325A_EN
3-110 Start of fault recording and fault counter
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or
through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the
onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory
or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times,
are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight
faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault recording
will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199
start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then
F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and
date are changed during the pre-fault time, the F T _ R C : F a u l t y t i m e t a g signal is
generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-164 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC: Fault mem.
Signal 1 + CT200 overflow
1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1
FT_RC: Fault
recording n
1 [ * ]
FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]
n FT_RC: Fault
recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value n 7 033 006

306 021
MAIN: General
reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don’t execute
1: execute
12Z6161 B_EN
3-111 Fault memory
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
Phase currents
Phase-to-ground voltages
Residual current measured by the P43x at the T 4 transformer
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P43x at the T 90 transformer
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of
16.4 s (at 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (at 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be
divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be
set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording
time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are
overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the
last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-166 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
FR_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 000 ]
FR_RC: Max.
recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FR_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FR_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]
IA Analog channel 1
R
IB Analog channel 2
R
IC Analog channel 3
R
VA-G Analog channel 4

R
VB-G Analog channel 5

R
VC-G
Analog channel 6
R
IN Analog channel 7
R
VN-G
Analog channel 8
R
Vref Analog channel 9

R
FR_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FR_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
12Z6220A_EN
3-112 Fault value recording
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)
Disabling or enabling
distance protection
Distance protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter
(see figure 3-113).
3.23.1 Fault Detection Logic
The fault detection logic in distance protection serves to detect short-circuits phase-
selectively. Fault detection logic is divided into the following areas:
Overcurrent detection
Ground fault detection
Undervoltage detection
Underimpedance fault detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault detection
logic.
Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents can be
detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic is provided for
short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In order to control
difficult conditions for fault detection, the P43x is also equipped with a highly angle-
dependent ‘true’ underimpedance detection logic function. Ground fault detection logic
distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded faults.
The fault detection logic starts the timer stages of the trigger levels and – as a function of
the phase-selective fault detection decision – selects the measuring loops in which the
fault impedances are determined. The fault detection logic is blocked if one of the
following conditions is met:
The protection function is disabled using setting parameters or appropriately

configured binary signal inputs.
Monitoring (VT supervision) detects a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
If distance protection is blocked, the user may switch to backup overcurrent-time

protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
3-168 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: General
enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
0
1 DIST: Enabled
0: No [ 036 104 ]
1: Yes
>1
DIST: Starting
- blocked
303 500
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
1 60 D5Z5029A_EN
3-113 Fault detection blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)
Overcurrent detection
Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of the
threshold values I>> and I>>>. The I>> threshold can be set. I>>> is equal to 2 I>>.
The thresholds are identical for all three phases.
The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of ’ 1 ’ if the threshold is
exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only one
half-wave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic value of
‘ 1 ’. Triggering of inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>> trigger.
If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if I>>> is
exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is shortened since
there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave.
Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point treatment set
in the P43x. If ‘isolated neutral/resonant grounding’ or ‘short-duration grounding’ is set,
then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s) in which the I>> threshold is
exceeded. With the setting ‘low-impedance grounding’ the following condition must also
be satisfied:
2
I≥ ⋅I
3 max
3-170 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
MAIN: Rush restr.

A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DIST: I>>
DIST: Starting C PSx
blocked [ * ]
303 500
IA
IB
IC
DIST: I>>
triggered
303 597
I>>> = 2*I>>
DIST: I>>>
triggered
303 501
COMP
(2/3)*Imax
Imax
DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. DIST: I>>
treat. PSx PSx
set 1 010 048 010 054
set 2 001 076 010 074
set 3 001 077 010 094
set 4 001 078 011 014
47Z1155B_EN
3-114 Overcurrent detection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)

To detect ground faults, the ground fault detection function monitors the average
magnitude of the residual current calculated from the phase currents and the neutral-
displacement voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages for values exceeding
set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one
parameter each is available for setting the fault detection value for ground fault
monitoring.
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>, which
means that the operate value of the ground current function increases with an increasing
phase current level as a form of stabilization.
3-172 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Dynamic
range 1
[ 031 082 ]
2: Sensitive
range
1: Highest range
IA COMP
IB DIST: IN> sens.
C range PSx
[ * ]
IC
Imax C DIST:
range
IN> high
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502
|Ix|
0.05*|Imax| |Ix|+IN>
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Starting C
blocked DIST: tIN>
303 500 elapsed
303 503
DIST: tIN>
running
[ 036 105 ]
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx 0 50ms
[ * ]
4: Short-durat.
ground.
DIST: VNG>
C PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
VNG>> exceeded
303 596
VA-G DIST: Start.

VNG> triggered
VB-G 303 504
VC-G
DIST: VNG>> DIST: tVNG>>

C PSx PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DIST: tVNG>>
MAIN: Neutr.pt. elapsed
303 506
treat. PSx
[ * ]
DIST: VNG>>
1: Low-imped. triggered
grounding [ 036 015 ]
DIST: tVNG>>
elapsed
[ 036 016 ]
* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. DIST: IN> high DIST: IN> sens. DIST: tIN> DIST: VNG> DIST: VNG>> DIST: tVNG>>
treat. PSx range PSx range PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 010 048 010 055 010 123 010 057 010 056 010 062 010 061
set 2 001 076 010 075 010 124 010 077 010 076 010 082 010 081
set 3 001 077 010 095 010 125 010 097 010 096 011 002 011 001
set 4 001 078 011 015 010 126 011 017 011 016 011 022 011 021
47Z1156B_EN
3-115 Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set in the
P43x.
M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t m e n t 'Low-impedance grounding'
Ground fault detection D I S T : S t a r t i n g G occurs with this setting when the
threshold of the IN> or VNG> trigger is exceeded. Furthermore, triggering of stage
VNG>> and the lapse of timer stage tVNG>> is signaled (see Figure 3-115).
M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t m e n t 'Isolated neutral/resonant grounding'
If the setting 'Isolated neutral/resonant grounding' is selected, instantaneous ground
fault detection D I S T : S t a r t i n g G operates in the event of multiple phase-to-
ground fault detection when the thresholds of the IN> and VNG> triggers are
exceeded. Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in the event that only one
base point is detected, ground fault detection will operate, but not until tIN> has
elapsed.
M A I N : N e u t r . p t . t r e a t . = 'Short-duration grounding'
Operation here corresponds to operation with the setting 'Isolated neutral/resonant
grounding' except that in the case of a sustained ground fault the timer stage tIN>
remains activated due to the operating trigger VNG>> and therefore no longer has
any effect in the event of subsequent short-duration grounding.
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o
st. PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
1: Low-imped. DIST: Starting G

grounding 303 507
DIST: Start.
IN> triggered
303 502
DIST: Start.
DIST: Start. switch. to PG
VNG> triggered [ 040 052 ]
303 504
DIST: tIN>
elapsed
303 503
DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
DIST: VPP<
triggered
303 509
* Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
DIST: Start. set 1 010 048
ZPP< triggered
303 510 set 2 001 076
set 3 001 077
set 4 001 078
47Z1150B_EN
3-116 Evaluation of trigger signals
3-174 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling undervoltage
and underimpedance
fault detection
The undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection functions are enabled by I>(Imin)
in the corresponding measuring systems. For the two possible dynamic ranges of
current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection
value for I>(Imin). In order to control contention problems when current and voltage
appear at the same time (branch voltage transformers), measuring system enabling is
delayed by 15 ms.
For sensitive detection of double ground faults with isolated neutral/resonant grounding,
the P43x checks to determine whether the base point current I>(Imin) is exceeded in one
phase only and whether the measured value falls below the set threshold for
underimpedance fault detection in two phases. Enabling proceeds in the phases where
the voltage is below the set threshold.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Starting
blocked
303 500
C DIST: I> (Ibl)

MAIN: Dynamic
range I sens. r.PSx
[ 031 082 ] [ * ]
2: Highest range DIST: I> (Ibl)

C high r. PSx
1: Sensitive [ * ]
range
IA DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598
IB
DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.
IC 303 599
DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 600
DIST: V<
PSx Meas.value > Set value
[ * ] C DIST: Enable
15ms 0 V<, Z<, A
303 514
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G DIST: Enable

15ms 0 V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST: Enable
15ms 0 V<, Z<, C
303 516
C
Meas.value < Set value
VA-G* 3
VB-G* 3
MAIN: Neutr.pt. VC-G* 3
treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./
res.w.start.PG
4: Short-durat.
ground.
* Parameter DIST: V<

PSx
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
DIST: I> (Ibl)
sens. r.PSx
DIST: I> (Ibl)
high r. PSx
set 1 010 069 010 048 010 119 010 068
set 2 010 089 001 076 010 120 010 088
set 3 011 009 001 077 010 121 011 008
set 4 011 029 001 078 010 122 011 028
49Z6430B_EN
3-117 Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection
3-176 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the phase-to-
phase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set threshold V<.
Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the operating

mode. The following operating modes are possible:
Undervoltage fault detection is disabled.

The undervoltage fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the phase-
to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.
3-118 Undervoltage detection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)
Underimpedance fault
detection
Underimpedance fault detection determines the impedances of the phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase loops.
The underimpedance fault detection mode can be set by selecting the operating mode.
The following operating modes are possible:
Underimpedance fault detection is disabled.

The underimpedance fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the
phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault
detection.
Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground
loops.
All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the I>>> trigger
operates (see ‘Overcurrent Fault Detection’). When overcurrent or undervoltage fault
detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are blocked phase-selectively.
3-178 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-119 Enabling underimpedance fault detection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)
If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance is determined and compared to

ascertain that it is within the set impedance range. The loop impedance of the phase-to-
ground loops is determined, depending on the setting, by using the ground current
corrected by the set ground factor kG or by using twice the phase current. The following
values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault detection
characteristic:
Reactance in forward direction Xfw

Load angle β
Ratio Zbw/Zfw
(Impedance in backward (reverse) direction: Zbw
Impedance in forward direction: Zfw)
Phase-to-ground impedance in forward direction Zfw,PG
Phase-to-phase impedance in forward direction Zfw,PG
Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction Rfw,PG
Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction Rfw,PG
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is greater
than 3 Znom, then the range is limited to 3 Znom (Znom = Vnom / Inom).
3-180 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-120 Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)
3-121 Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor
3-182 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-122 Underimpedance detection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault detection logic

The fault detection logic links the phase-selective output signals from
Overcurrent detection (I>>)

Undervoltage detection (V<)
Underimpedance detection (Z<)
to form common phase-selective starting decisions (SA, SB, and SC) and SN1.
The phase-selective starting decisions are combined to form ‘general starting’ – and thus
produce the M A I N : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal. Ground fault detection alone does
not bring about general starting.
If fault detection operates via overcurrent fault detection, single-phase fault detection
may operate without ground fault detection. In order for the measuring loops for
distance and directional measurement to be properly selected even in this case, either
SN1 or starting in another phase must be triggered as well. It is possible to specify
whether, in the case of single-phase starting, SN1 will always be triggered or whether –
depending on the magnitude of the phase currents – SN1 or starting in one phase will be
transfer-triggered.
M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 p ‘Ground’
With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred after the
timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see ‘Ground fault detection’ for setting).
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to
multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p
‘P or G = f(Imed,Imax)’
For single-pole overcurrent fault detection, the decision as to whether starting in one
phase or SN1 starting will be transferred depends on the Imed / Imax ratio.
The magnitude of the medium phase current must be more than 2/3 the magnitude of
the maximum current for the phase to be transfer-triggered. If the current with the
medium-sized magnitude is smaller, SN1 will be triggered after timer stage tIN> has
elapsed.
If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to
multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will
occur instantaneously.
3-184 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: VA< DIST: Starting A

303 529
triggered
303 517
DIST: ZA< start.

triggered
303 526
DIST: IA>>
triggered
303 511
DIST: VB<
triggered DIST: Starting B
303 518 303 530
DIST: ZB< start.

triggered
303 527
DIST: IB>>
triggered
303 512
DIST: VC<
triggered DIST: Starting C
303 519 303 531
DIST: ZC< start.

triggered
303 528
DIST: General
DIST: IC>> starting
[ 036 240 ]
triggered
303 513
DIST: 1-pole
starting
303 533
DIST: Multipole
starting
DIST: Starting G 303 534
303 507
DIST: Starting
303 535
N
DIST: tIN>
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Zero-
sequ. starting
[ 036 021 ]
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
[ * ]
1: Ground
2: P or G
=f(Imed,Imax)
IA
COMP |Imedium|/|Imax|<2/3
IB
IC
Imax |Imedium|/|Imax|>2/3
Imedium
COMP
COMP
COMP
BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753
* Parameter DIST: tIN>

PSx
MAIN: Transfer
for 1p PSx
set 1 010 057 010 040
set 2 010 077 001 079
set 3 010 097 001 080
set 4 011 017 001 081
49Z6431A_EN
3-123 Fault detection and starting Logic
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)
If a general starting condition is present, then the decisions of the following systems are
signaled:
Overcurrent fault detection

Undervoltage fault detection
Underimpedance fault detection
3-186 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] DIST: Starting
I>> A
[ 040 064 ]
DIST: IA>>
triggered DIST: Starting
303 511
I>> B
[ 040 065 ]
DIST: IB>>
303 512 I>> C
[ 040 097 ]
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
DIST: Starting
U< A
[ 040 067 ]
DIST: VA<
303 517 U< B
[ 040 075 ]
DIST: VB<
303 518 U< C
[ 040 096 ]
DIST: VC<
triggered
303 519
DIST: Starting
Z< A
[ 040 070 ]
DIST: ZA< start.
303 526
Z< B
[ 040 071 ]
DIST: ZB< start.
triggered
303 527
DIST: Starting
Z< C
[ 040 072 ]
DIST: ZC< start.
303 528
Z<
[ 036 241 ]
49Z6432 A_EN
3-124 Fault detection signals of distance protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23.2 Selection of Measured Values
The P43x selects a measuring loop based on the phase-selective starting decision and
the phase preference selected. The fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) and the
fault direction are determined from the voltage and current values collected from these
measuring loops.
For three-phase starting signals with or without ground the minimum voltage value and
the associated phase-to-phase current are selected from the phase-to-phase voltages
as measured values. In case of a two-phase to ground fault detection the set phase
preference is decisive for the selection of the measured values.
Only the fundamental of the selected measured voltage is evaluated. If stabilization for
capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization) has been enabled, the device checks
to determine whether the second harmonic exceeds the 0.01 Vnom threshold. If so, a
special filter designed specifically for CVTs is activated.
Phase Phase to Phase to C before A before A before C before B before A before C before B before
Priority Phase Ground A, B before C, B before A, B, B, C,
Loop Loop C, A,
Vmin Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Cyclic Acyclic Acyclic Acyclic Acyclic
Fault Selected Measured Values Imeas, Vmeas

Detection
A, B, C, G IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin)
1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin
A, B, C IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin) IPP(Vmin)
1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin 1VPPmin
A, B, G IA-B IP-kG(Vmin) IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IB-kG IB-kG IA-kG IB-kG IB-kG
1VA-B VPGmin 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VA-G 1VB-G 1VB-G
A, C, G IC-A IP-kG(Vmin) IC-kG IC-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IC-kG IC-kG
1VC-A VPGmin 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VC-G 1VC-G
B, C, G IB-C IP-kG(Vmin) IC-kG IB-kG IC-kG IC-kG IB-kG IB-kG IC-kG IB-kG
1VB-C VPGmin 1VC-G 1VB-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VC-G 1VB-G
A, B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B IA-B
1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B 1VA-B
A, C IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A IC-A
1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A 1VC-A
B, C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C IB-C
1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C 1VB-C
A, G IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG IA-kG
1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G 1VA-G
B, G IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG IB-kG
1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G 1VB-G
C, G IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG IC-kG
1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G 1VC-G
3-188 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase prio. Parameter MAIN: Phase prio.

2pG PSx 2pG PSx
[ * ]
set 1 010 041
set 2 001 082
set 3 001 083
set 4 001 084
49Z6439 A_EN
3-125 Selection of the measured values
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23.3 Distance and Directional Measurement
The P43x determines the fault impedance and the fault direction on the basis of the
selected measured values. A voltage memory is available so that measurement will
function correctly, even with very low fault voltages.
Voltage memory
Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage exceeds the
fixed value of 0.65 Vnom and there is no starting of the distance protection function, then
the voltage memory will be synchronized. Synchronization requires approximately
300 ms. Then a check is carried out to determine whether the frequency satisfies the
following condition:
0.95 ⋅ f nom < f < 1.05 ⋅ f nom
If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency condition is
checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer met, the enable is
canceled.
If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below 0.65 Vnom or if a starting of the
distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory will be
terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains enabled for 2 s.
3-190 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: I>>
triggered
303 597
DIST: General >0.65*Vnom

starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: corr
303 547
corr
f/fnom = f
+
R 0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
1 DIST: Voltage
S1 1 memory enabled
303 549
300ms
R1
1 DIST: tVmemory
2s running
[ 040 034 ]
C C C
VA-G DIST: VA-B

(stored)
303 548
VB-G
49Z6433 A_EN
3-126 Storing the reference voltage in memory
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination
When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles ϕF and ϕS are
determined. Angle ϕF is the fault angle that is determined using the selected measuring
voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle ϕS is determined on the
basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected measuring current Imeas.
Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ from the nominal frequency, a phase
correction must be made. This correction is determined by the frequency deviation and
the time that has elapsed since synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle
correction based on the selected measuring loop and the setting at
M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e is required. The resulting angle, ϕX, is used for further
processing.
3-127 Angle determination
3-192 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
For distance and directional measurement, the following angles are used – as a function
of the magnitude of the selected measuring voltage and the fault duration:
Fault angle ϕF
Angle ϕX
Set angle α
Selecting the angle for

direction determination
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas is above the threshold set at
D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x when the fault occurs, then the direction is
determined using fault angle ϕF. If the measuring voltage is below the threshold set at
D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x angle ϕX is used for directional measurement.
If the voltage memory is not enabled, angle ϕX cannot be determined. In this case the
P43x checks whether the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x If such is the case then
the direction is determined with fault angle ϕF. Direction determination using ϕX or ϕF is
not possible if the voltage memory is not enabled or if the measuring voltage is less than
0.002 Vnom. In these cases, set angle α is used for directional measurement.
This means that a decision is made for the forward direction.
Angle for Direction Determination with:

V memory 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx Vmeas < 0.002 Vn
om
Enabled ϕX ϕX
Not enabled ϕF α
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction
determination is in the range -45° < ϕ < +135°. In the case of angles outside this range,
a decision is made for the backward (reverse) direction.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Voltage
memory enabled
303 549
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom DIST: Forw. w/o
measurem.
[ 038 044 ]
DIST: Direct.
using Vmeas
[ 038 045 ]
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Direct.
using memory
[ 038 047 ]
1
2
3
DIST: 1
303 552
DIST: F 2
303 550
DIST: X 3 DIST: Fault

303 551 C -45° < N < 135°
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST: Fault
* Parameter DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx 1 ... 3 C
135° < N < 315°
backward / BS
N [ 036 019 ]
set 1 010 109
set 2 010 116
set 3 010 117
set 4 011 118
49Z6435 A_EN
3-128 Direction determination
3-194 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the angle for

impedance calculation
The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance is selected according to the following
criteria:
If the measuring voltage Vmeas is greater than the set threshold

(D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x ) when the fault occurs, then fault angle ϕF is
used to calculate fault impedance.
If the fault voltages are lower than the set threshold (D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y
P S x ) and the voltage memory is enabled, a check is made to determine whether
angles ϕF and ϕX are in the forward direction (-45° < ϕ < +135°).
If both angles are in the same direction, either forward or backward, then fault
angle ϕF is selected for distance measurement.
If angle ϕF is in the forward direction and angle ϕX is in the backward direction,
then an angle of 180° + α is specified for the calculation.
If angle ϕX is in the forward direction and angle ϕF is in the backward direction,
then set angle α is used for distance measurement.
If voltage memory is not enabled, the checks whether

the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x . If such is the case
then the impedance is calculated using fault angle ϕF.
the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom. In this case, the impedance
is calculated using set angle α.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-195

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Voltage
memory enabled
303 549
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Oper.val.
Vmemory PSx
[ * ]
DIST: F -45° < F < 135°

303 550
DIST: X -45° < X < 135°

303 551
1
2
3
4
2
1 1
DIST: 180°+ 2 3
303 552
3
1
4
2
1 ... 4 3
1 ... 3 DIST: Z
303 553
* Parameter DIST: Oper.val.

Vmemory PSx
set 1 010 109
set 2 010 116
set 3 010 117
set 4 011 118
49Z6436 A_EN
3-129 Selecting the angle for impedance calculation
3-196 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Distance measurement
One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance measurement
by way of the setting at D I S T : C h a r a c t e r i s t i c :
Circle
Polygon
3-130 Selecting the characteristic
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-197

3 Operation
(continued)
Circle characteristic
The fault impedance value ZF is determined using the selected measuring quantities
Vmeas and I meas. If the setting ‘Arc compensation: yes’ has been chosen, then a
correction to the measured fault impedance is calculated for angles ϕZ in the range of
−45 ° < ϕ Z < α or 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) as follows:
ZF
Z F ,corr =
1 + sin δ
The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α : δ = α − ϕ Z
The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) : δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °
3-131 Impedance measurement with the circle characteristic
3-198 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-132 is obtained. If the
characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
‘Arc compensation: yes’, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
3-132 P43x impedance and direction characteristic for the ‘Circle’ setting
n = 1 to 6
α = 60°
Dot-dash line: with arc compensation
Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in Zone 1 only)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-199

3 Operation
(continued)
The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
DIST: Zn (circle)
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: n (circle)
PSx DIST:
[ * ] 303 552
DIST: |Zmeas| |Zmeas| f(Zn, n) DIST: Dist.

decision zone n
303 567 303 561
Impedance zone 2 (n=2)
* Parameter DIST: Z2 (circle) DIST: 2 (circle)

PSx PSx
set 1 012 043 072 095
set 2 073 092 073 095
set 3 074 092 074 095
set 4 075 092 075 095

PSx PSx
set 1 012 044 072 096
set 2 073 093 073 096
set 3 074 093 074 096
set 4 075 093 075 096

PSx PSx
set 1 012 045 072 099
set 2 073 094 073 099
set 3 074 094 074 099
set 4 075 094 075 099

PSx PSx
set 1 012 148 012 164
set 2 012 149 012 165
set 3 012 150 012 166
set 4 012 151 012 167

PSx PSx
set 1 012 152 012 168
set 2 012 153 012 169
set 3 012 154 012 170
set 4 012 155 012 171
47Z1467B_EN
3-133 Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
3-200 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-to-
ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1. The impedances
modified by zone extension factor kze are calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = k ze ⋅ Z1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:
Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a time-
delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-201

3 Operation
(continued)
3-134 Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement
3-202 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The ZF fault impedance value is determined using the selected measuring quantities:
Vmeas and I meas. By multiplying this value by the cosine or sine of the angle selected for
distance measurement, ϕZ, we then calculate the fault resistance RF or fault
reactance XF.
3-135 Impedance measurement with the polygon characteristic
The calculated quantities, RF and XF, are compared with the reference quantities, Rref
and Xref, of the four impedance zones. The reference quantities are determined using
the settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both quantities lie within the set
impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:
Reactance X
Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
Angle α
Angle σ
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in
Figure 3-136.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-203

3 Operation
(continued)
3-136 P43x impedance and directional characteristics for the ‘Polygon’ setting
Example for: Xn = 6.5 Ω
Rn = 2.0 Ω
αn = 70°
σn = -20°
n = 1 to 4
Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in Zone 1 only)
3-204 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops can be set separately for
each zone. The different impedances are therefore compared with different impedance
characteristics.
3-137 Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-205

3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the kze zone extension factors for high-speed
reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-to-
ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1.
As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R and X

directions. The R and X values modified by the kze zone extension factor are calculated
according to the following equations:
R1,kze = k ze ⋅ R1
X1,kze = k ze ⋅ X1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:
Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or – irrespective of
the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose command.
Switch on to fault protection (S O T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d )
An external signal (D I S T : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a time-
delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
3-206 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-138 Setting impedance Zone 1 and distance measurement
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-207

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23.4 Impedance-Time Characteristics
A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for impedance
time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward direction, backward
(reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distance-independent timer stage t7 can also
operate forward-directionally, backward- (reverse-) directionally, or non-directionally.
Timer stage t8 operates independently of distance and direction. All timer stages are
started by the general starting of distance protection.
Timer stage logic for

extended zone 1
The measuring range of zone 1 can be extended by the set zone extension factors.
The timer stage logic for the two devices is described below.
The following applies to the P433:

If neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone
extension proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the
extended zone takes place once the set time (D I S T : t 1 , z e ) has elapsed. If
protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed.
If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then a trip is issued in extended
zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-
extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or
after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is dominant.)
DIST: t1
PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: Meas.r.extd. DIST: t1,ze

ext./RC C PSx
306 002
[ * ]
DIST: General t1 0 DIST: t1 elapsed

starting [ 036 026 ]
[ 036 240 ]
t1,ze 0
DIST: Zone
extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: Zone
extension TDR DIST: Timer st.1
[ 038 022 ] elapsed
303 614
DIST: t1,ze
ARC: Trip time elapsed
elapsed [ 035 079 ]
303 003
PSIG: Trip time

elapsed
305 150
* Parameter DIST: t1
PSx
DIST: t1,ze
PSx
set 1 012 028 026 025
set 2 012 078 027 025
set 3 013 028 028 025
set 4 013 078 029 025
49Z6437 A_EN
3-139 Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1 in the P433
3-208 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 DE /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)

If neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone
extension proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the
extended zone takes place once the set time (D I S T : t 1 , z e ) has elapsed. If
protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the protective
signaling tripping time has elapsed.
If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then the following occurs in the
‘1-/3-pole’ and ‘3-pole’ ARC modes: in extended zone 1 a trip is issued once the ARC
tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-extended zone) it is issued
after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of
ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is dominant.) In the ‘1-pole’ ARC mode, a
three-pole trip occurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed and in extended zone 1 after timer
stage t1,ze of distance protection has elapsed. A single-pole trip is issued in extended
zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-
extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or
after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting prevails.)
DIST: t1
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: t1,ze
MAIN: Meas.r.extd. C PSx
ext./RC [ * ]
306 002
DIST: General t1 0 DIST: t1 elapsed

[ 036 240 ]
t1,Ü 0
ARC: HSR oper.

mode PSx
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
2: 1-/3-pole
3: 3-pole
DIST: Zone
extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: Zone DIST: Timer st.
extension TDR 1 elapsed
303 614
[ 038 022 ]
ARC: Trip time

elapsed
303 003
MAIN: 1-pole
trip
306 006
DIST: t1,ze
elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
PSIG: Trip time

elapsed
305 150
* Parameter DIST: t1 DIST: t1,ze ARC: HSR oper.

PSx PSx mode PSx
set 1 012 028 026 025 015 051
set 2 012 078 027 025 024 025
set 3 013 028 028 025 024 085
set 4 013 078 029 025 023 045
45Z6330A_EN
3-140 Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1 in the P435
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 DE /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-209

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: t2
PSx
[ * ]
DIST: General t 0
starting DIST: t2 elapsed
[ 036 240 ] [ 036 027 ]
DIST: t3
PSx
DIST: Op. mode [ * ]
zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DIST: t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
1
2
DIST: t4
3 C PSx
[ * ]
4
5 t 0 DIST: t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
6
1: Normal
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4 DIST: t5
PSx
[ * ]
3: Section cable - line
4: Section line - cable t 0 DIST: t5 elapsed
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff [ 036 030 ]
6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
DIST: t6
PSx
[ * ]
[ 036 031 ]
DIST: t7
PSx
[ * ]
[ 037 127 ]
DIST: t8
PSx
[ * ]
[ 037 128 ]
Parameter DIST: Op. mode DIST: t2 DIST: t3 DIST: t4

zone 4 PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 012 000 012 029 012 030 012 031
set 2 012 050 012 079 012 080 012 081
set 3 013 000 013 029 013 030 013 031
set 4 013 050 013 079 013 080 013 081
Parameter DIST: t5 DIST: t6 DIST: t7 DIST: t8
PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 012 032 012 033 012 140 012 144
set 2 012 082 012 083 012 141 012 145
set 3 013 032 013 033 012 142 012 146
set 4 013 082 013 083 012 143 012 147
49Z6438 A_EN
3-141 Time settings for timer stages 2 to 8

3 Operation
(continued)
3-142 Directional settings

3 Operation
(continued)
Zone 4 operating modes

Zone 4 can be used as a special zone by means of the
D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x setting. This makes it possible to implement
special characteristics for applications in cable/line systems or for compensating bundle
conductor effects. The following operating modes can be set for zone 4:
Normal
1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4
Section cable - line
Section line - cable
Compensation for bundle conductor effects
1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
Mode: 'Normal'
A trip signal is issued in zones 1 to 6 when the following criteria are satisfied
simultaneously:
A distance decision exists for the zone.

The timer stage of this impedance zone has elapsed.
The measured direction matches the directional setting of this impedance zone.
If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip occurs
in the zone having the highest number.
A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
Timer stage t7 has elapsed.

The measured direction matches the direction of measurement setting for N7.
After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued.
With the P435 distance trips from zones 1 to 7 that are used to form the trip command
may be blocked by the power swing blocking function.

3 Operation
(continued)
3-143 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: Normal

3 Operation
(continued)
3-144 Examples of feasible impedance-time characteristics

3 Operation
(continued)
Mode:
'1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4'
With this setting, timer stage t4 is assigned to impedance zone 1. All other settings for
impedance zone 4 are irrelevant in this operating mode and thus inactive.
For single-pole starting, a zone 1 trip signal will be issued once timer stage t1 has
elapsed; for multi-pole starting, it is issued once t4 has elapsed.
If t2 or t3 = t4 and N2 or N3 = N1 have been set, then timer stage t4 is set to ∞.
3-145 Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic

3 Operation
(continued)
3-146 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: '1p:Z1/t1(3p), 3p:Z1/t4'

3 Operation
(continued)
Mode:
'Section cable – line'
This setting is selected for a mixed cable-line section provided that auto-reclosing will
occur only when there is a fault in the line area. For this mode, the cable must form the
front part of the transmission section and the line the rear part.
Timer stage t1 and direction setting N1 are assigned to impedance zones 1 and 4.
Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.
A zone 1 or zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following conditions are satisfied:
A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.

The measured direction matches direction setting N1.
In order for the P43x to be able to determine the section in which the fault is located,
impedance zone 1 must be set to the total length of the power transmission section (e.g.
cable plus line) and impedance zone 4 to the cable length. If a distance trip for zones 1
and 4 occurs after t1 has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function will be blocked because
the fault lies in the cable section.

3 Operation
(continued)

3 Operation
(continued)
3-148 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 'Section cable – line'

3 Operation
(continued)
Mode:
'Section line – cable'
This setting is selected for a mixed line-cable section provided that auto-reclosing will
only occur when there is a fault in the line area. For this mode, the line must form the
front part of the transmission section and the cable the rear part.
The 'Distance trip Zone 1' or 'Distance trip Zone 4' decision is reached if the following
conditions are satisfied:
A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.

In order for the P43x to determine the section in which the fault is located, impedance
zone 1 must be set to the total length of the transmission section and impedance zone 4
for the length of the line. If a distance trip occurs only in after t1 has elapsed, the auto-
reclosing function will be blocked because the fault lies in the cable section.

3 Operation
(continued)

3 Operation
(continued)
3-150 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 'Section line – cable'

3 Operation
(continued)
Mode: 'Compensation for

bundle conductor effects'
In the event of a short circuit, the distance between the conductors of a bundle is
reduced and the line impedance is increased. This is known as the bundle conductor
effect. Since the effect occurs approximately 70 ms after the onset of the fault, it is not a
factor in impedance zone 1 (where t1 = 0 s). Compensation therefore takes place during
impedance measurement in zone 2 – with assistance from impedance zone 4.
The settings for impedance zone 2 need to be made without regard to the bundle
conductor effect. The setting values for impedance zone 4, on the other hand, need to
take the bundle conductor effect into account.
The P43x checks 30 ms after distance protection has started to determine whether the
following conditions are satisfied:
A distance decision exists for zone 2.

This information is then stored. The zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following
conditions are satisfied:

The buffer has been initiated 30 ms after distance protection has started.

3 Operation
(continued)

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Op. mode zone 4

PSx
[ * ]
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff Parameter- DIST: Op. mode
zone 4 PSx
DIST: General starting satz 1 012 000
[ 036 240 ] satz 2 012 050
satz 2 013 000
satz 2 013 050
DIST: Dist.decision zone 2
303 581
DIST: N2,fw
303 574
DIST: N2,bw
303 573
DIST: Trip zone 1
DIST: Dist.decision zone 4 303 584
303 583
DIST: t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST: Dist.decision Z1 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze

303 562 303 595
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST: N1,fw
303 572
DIST: N1,bw
303 571
DIST: Dist.decision Z1,ze DIST: Trip zone 2

303 563 303 585
DIST: t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: Trip zone 3

303 586
DIST: Dist.decision zone 3 DIST: Trip zone 4

303 582 303 587
DIST: t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST: N3,fw
303 576
DIST: N3,bw
303 575

303 619 303 588
DIST: t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST: N5,fw
303 580
DIST: N5,bw
303 579

303 620
303 621
DIST: t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST: N6,fw
303 616
DIST: N6,bw
303 615
DIST: t7 elapsed DIST: Trip zone 7

[ 037 127 ] 303 622
DIST: N7,fw
303 618
DIST: N7,bw
303 617
DIST: t8 elapsed DIST: Trip zone 8

[ 037 128 ] 303 626
DIST: Fault forward / LS

[ 036 018 ]
DIST: Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
45Z6332A_EN
3-152 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 'Compensation for bundle conductor effects''

3 Operation
(continued)
Mode:
'1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4'
With this setting, timer stage t4 is assigned to impedance zone 1. All other settings for
impedance zone 4 are irrelevant in this operating mode and thus inactive.
For single-pole starting, a distance trip signal is issued in zone 1 once timer stage t1 has
elapsed; for multi-pole starting, it is issued once t4 has elapsed.
If t2 or t3 = t4 and N2 or N3 = N1 have been set, then timer stage t4 is set to ∞.

3 Operation
(continued)

3 Operation
(continued)
3-154 Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: '1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4'

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip signal
036 009
45Z5273B_EN
3-155 Distance protection trip signals

3 Operation
(continued)
For special applications, the P43x issues the D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 signal

if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

The measured direction matches the direction setting for zone 6.
3-156 D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n zo n e 6 signal

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23.5 Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1 (P435 Only)
For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in zone 1 shall be single-pole
or three-pole. This choice is separately available both for single-pole starting and for
two-pole starting without ground.
In the case of three-pole starting with or without ground or two-pole starting with ground,
there is always a three-pole distance trip in zone 1. In the case of two-pole starting
without ground - and selection of a single-pole trip for this type of starting - the zone 1
distance trip will be issued in the leading or trailing phase, depending on the setting.
This is based on the setting at M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d . A three-pole trip can be forced
via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If the P435 has reached a trip decision in zone 1, then a change in starting from two-pole
without ground to single-pole or two-pole with ground is ignored for 100 ms - as long as
the same phases that were involved in starting before the change are still involved.
If starting occurs in the third, previously unaffected phase, after the change in starting,
then a three-pole trip transfer occurs instantaneously.

3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 1

PG PSx
[ * ]
3: 3-pole 3
1: 1-pole 1
DIST: 1-pole
starting
303 533
DIST: Trip
DIST: Starting A enable zone 1
303 529 303 593
DIST: Starting B
303 530
DIST: Starting C DIST: Trip

303 531
enable zone 1,A
303 590
DIST: Starting N1
303 535
DIST: Trip
enable zone 1,B
303 591
DIST: Trip
enable zone 1,C
303 592
DIST: Trip
zone 1 DIST: Signal
303 584 block start.G
303 594
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST: Op. mode

zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
2: 1p:Z1/ DIST: Trip zone 1
t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4 PP PSx
[ * ]
6: 1p:Z1/t1,
3p:Z1/t4
3: 3-pole 3
1: 1-pole 1
leading phase
2: 1-pole 2
MAIN: Rotary field trailing phas
[ 010 049 ]
2: Anti-
clockwise rot.
1: Clockwise
rotation
MAIN: Blocking 1p
trip EXT Parameter DIST: Trip zone 1 DIST: Trip zone 1 DIST: Op. mode
[ 041 078 ] PG PSx PP PSx zone 4 PSx
set 1 011 050 011 054 012 000
set 2 011 051 011 055 012 050
set 3 011 052 011 056 013 000
set 4 011 053 011 057 013 050 45Z6331B_EN
3-157 Selection of zone 1 trip mode in the P435

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Power Swing Blocking (Function group PSB)
The power swing blocking (PSB) function offers these options should a power swing
occur in the power system:
The user can block distance trip signals in selected distance zones. This will prevent
unwanted tripping by apparent low impedances during a power swing.
AND / OR
An asynchronous trip signal can be generated so as to end a power swing, by
initiation of islanding/system splitting..
power swing blocking
The power swing blocking function can be disabled or enabled using a setting
parameter.
Furthermore the PSB function can be enabled individually in each parameter subset at
PSB: Enable PSx.
When the monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit is triggered the PSB function will
be blocked.
PSB: General
enable USER
[ 014 050 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSB: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
PSB: Enabled
0 [ 040 095 ]
1
PSB: Ready
0: No 304 859
1: Yes
MAIN: Protection
active * Parameter PSB: Enable
306 001
PSx
set 1 015 090
MCMON: Meas. set 2 015 091
circ. V faulty set 3 015 092
[ 038 023 ]
set 4 015 093
47Z11CBB_EN
3-158 Disabling or enabling power swing blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-233

3 Operation
(continued)
Measurement
The P43x continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance and the apparent
power of the positive-sequence system. Because of this measurement in the positive-
sequence system, the protection function is still available during a single-pole HSR.
Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing trip occurs only
when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the settable power swing
polygon.
PSB
PSB
¼AN PSB
¼BN ¼pos
¼CN
ºA
pos PSB: Z within
ºB ºpos polygon
ºC
PSB: swing. asynchr.
Þpos PSB Þpos
42Z50CCA.E
3-159 Measurement
3-234 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Zpos (t)
42Z50CFA.E
3-160 Trajectory of the positive-sequence impedance during a power swing

1 stable power swing
2 instable power swing
Setting parameters: R, X, α
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-235

3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking,

∆S operating mode
Every 40 ms the P43x determines the apparent power change as referred to the actual
apparent power.
S pos ,2 − S pos ,1
∆Spos =
S pos ,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1

Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms
If the apparent impedance lies within the swing polygon and the deviation is greater than
the value set at P S B : O p e r a t e v a l u e then a blocking of the selected distance
zones will be issued after an associated time delay, set at P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y ,
has elapsed. This blocking signal will be prolonged by the value set at
PSP: Release delay.
In order to avoid problems arising from mutual interference the PSB function is blocked
when a starting signal is issued by zone Z1 or the overreach zone Z1,ze.
The maximum duration of this blocking has a time limit. This time limit can be set.
The PSB function is unblocked without time delay if the following current elements detect
a short circuit during a power swing:
Phase current element for measurement of symmetrical 3-pole faults:
IP > PSB: IP>
Negative-sequence current element for sensitive measurement of 2-pole faults:
Ineg > (0.1 Inom + PSB: Ineg> * IP,max)
Residual current element for sensitive measurement of ground faults:
IN > (0.1 Inom + PSB: IN> * IP,max)
The distance zones to be blocked are set at P S B : F c t . a s s i g n . b l o c k . These
zones may be selected: Zx (x = 1...8) and Z1,ze
3-236 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking,

∆Z operating mode
The P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e setting defines that a power swing detection can be

based on impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change
(Delta S).
In the ∆Z operating mode, the rate of change of the resistance component of positive-
sequence impedance, when entering the power swing polygon, is measured and
interpreted. The function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller
than the ∆Rx/∆T set threshold and subsequently blocks all selected zones.
The ∆Rx threshold has a fixed value:

∆Rx = 5 Ω for Inom = 1A
∆Rx = 1 Ω for Inom = 5A.
Timer stage ∆T can be set at P S B : D e l t a T.
A power swing decision once made is stored until any of the following conditions is met:
The positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon.
The set maximum blocking time has elapsed.
One of the PSB current stages has started.
The available time delay of the blocking effect may be used to holdup distance protection
blocking for a short time. This may become necessary with series-compensated lines on
which, in some cases, a relatively slow swing subsidence of the measured short circuit
impedance is observed.
With the ∆Z operating mode general blocking of the power swing function after the trip
decision by the overreach zone is no longer necessary. Only blocking by the trip
decision from zone 1 is available.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-237

3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Ready
304 859
PSB: Z within
polygon
[ 036 024 ]
DIST: Trip signal
zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSB: Operate PSB: Operate PSB: Release
value delay delay
[ 014 054 ] [ 014 052 ] [ 014 053 ]
PSB: Spos |S1-S2|/|S2|

304 861
PSB: Enable delay

runn.
[ 036 058 ]
PSB: Max.
blocking time
[ 014 055 ]
PSB: IP>
[ 014 058 ]
PSB: IP>
IA triggered
[ 036 012 ]
IB PSB: Ineg>
IC [ 014 057 ]
|Imax| 0.1 Inom

+ Ineg>*Imax
PSB: Ineg>
Ineg triggered
[ 036 011 ]
PSB: IN>
[ 014 056 ]
0.1 Inom+ IN>*Imax
IN PSB: IN>
triggered
[ 036 010 ]
PSB: Blocking PSB: Blocking
init. EXT initiated
[ 036 069 ] [ 036 032 ]
PSB: Fct. assign.

block.
[ 012 017 ]
PSB: Block.
sel. zone
304 862
Selected zone
45Z63CDA_EN
3-161 Power swing blocking
3-238 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Out-of-step tripping
A power swing trip may become necessary when a power swing with low damping has to
be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such a procedure the device
has two independent methods available:
1st criterion – for an early system split at high swing frequencies.
The ∆Spos apparent power change exceeds the threshold set to a high value at
P S B : O p e r a t e v a l u e , t r i p for the duration set at
P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y , t r i p and the positive-sequence impedance lies within
the power swing polygon.
This criterion may be applied with high swing frequencies (and therefore large
changes in the apparent power). The system split will then occur very early so as to
avoid system loads from high currents during the first power swing cycle.
Every 40 ms the P43x determines the apparent power change as referred to the
actual apparent power.
Spos,2 − Spos,1
∆Spos =
Spos,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1

Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms
2nd criterion – for a safe system split at an instable power swing.
The positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon on the opposite
side (see impedance trajectory 2 in figure 3-160).
The sign for the positive-sequence impedance’s real component is stored when the
measured positive-sequence impedance locus enters the power swing polygon.
This stored sign is compared with the sign when exiting the power swing polygon.
Should the signs differ, a trip signal is issued immediately after exiting the power
swing polygon.
When this criterion is applied an instable power swing will be determined, regardless
of swing frequencies.
PSB: Ready
PSB: Swing. asychr.
PSB: Z within polygon

PSB: Operate value, PSB: Operate delay,
trip trip
PSB: Trip signal

PSB: Þpos
42Z50CEA.E
3-162 Out-of-step tripping
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-239

3 Operation
(continued)
Counters
The following counters for stable power swing and instable power swing are available:
PSB: No. stab. PSwing

This counter is incremented each time a stable power swing ends, i.e. as soon as the
positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon on the same side
from where it has entered the power swing polygon
(= same sign for R upon entering and exiting the power swing polygon).
PSB: No. OOS

This counter is incremented each time an instable power swing ends, i.e. as soon as
the positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon on the
opposite side from where it has entered the power swing polygon
(= differing signs for R upon entering and exiting the power swing polygon).
Reset timer stage

A timer stage is started each time the counter is incremented. It can be assumed that
the power swing has subsided (or was interrupted) when this time-delay has elapsed
before the counter was again incremented and the counter is then reset to 0.
The available setting at P S B : M a x . b l o c k i n g t i m e is used for this timer stage,

and it should be set with respect to the expected maximum power swing duration.
Signaling
An additional signal is issued when set counter values are reached, and such signals
may also be used for tripping.
P S B : P e r m . n o . s t a b . P S [Setting range: 1 to 10 / blocked]

this is the number of stable power swings permitted after which the
P S B : P e r m . n o . P S r e a c h signal is issued.
P S B : P e r m . n o . O O S [Setting range: 1 to 10 / blocked]

this is the number of instable power swings permitted after which the
P S B : P e r m . n o . O O S r e a c h signal is issued.
These signals will remain present until the associated counter is reset (via
PSB: Reset counters).
These signals can also be configured to any output relay, LED indicator and signaling
outputs (e.g. InterMiCOM, GOOSE, GSSE). They are stored in the fault recording and
(depending on the extent of the configuration) (spontaneously) signaled via the process
control interface (COMM1).
In addition these signals may be configured to the trip commands so as, for example, to
cause a delayed out-of-step trip if the power swing is not dampened within an acceptable
time.
3-240 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)
The P43x monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system
operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is
taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
DIST: General 10s 0 MCMON: Zero sequ.

starting starting
[ 036 240 ] [ 041 080 ]
DIST: Starting G SFMON: Zero sequ.

303 507 starting
[ 098 015 ]
MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ] 300ms 0 SFMON: M.c.b.
trip V
[ 098 000 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip MCMON: Meas.
V EXT circ. V faulty
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
MCMON: Under-
voltage SFMON: Meas.
[ 038 038 ] circ. V faulty
MCMON: Vneg> [ 098 017 ]
triggered MCMON: M.circ.
[ 041 079 ] V,Vref flty.
MCMON: FF, V [ 040 078 ]
triggered SFMON: M.circ.
[ 035 081 ] V,Vref flty.
[ 098 023 ]
MCMON: FF, Vref MCMON: M.circ.
triggered Vref flty.
[ 038 100 ] [ 007 213 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip
Vref EXT 300ms 0 SFMON: M.c.b.
[ 036 086 ] trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. MCMON: M.circ.
trip VNG EXT VNG flty.
[ 002 183 ] [ 007 214 ]
MCMON: Meas.circ.
V,I faulty
MCMON: Meas. [ 037 020 ]
circ. I faulty SFMON: Meas.circ.
[ 040 087 ] V,I faulty
GFSC: Monitor. 1) [ 098 016 ]
triggered
[ 038 095 ] MCMON: Peripheral
fault
PSIG: Telecom. [ 038 024 ]
faulty
[ 036 060 ] SFMON: Peripheral
fault
GFSIG: Telecom. [ 098 018 ]
faulty
[ 038 017 ]
1) only P435
45Z6340A_EN
3-163 Monitoring signals
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the event of

a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
Monitoring the starting

conditions
If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the following
monitoring signal is issued: MCM O N : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g (see Figure 3-163).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-241

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the current-

measuring circuits
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
the value 0.125 ⋅ Inom in at least one phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute
value of the negative-sequence component of the current system is determined in
accordance with the definition of the symmetrical components. This is based on the
setting at M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e (alternative terminology: Rotary field).

For clockwise rotary field direction (ABC): For anti-clockwise rotary field direction (ACB):
Ineg =
1
3
2
(
IA + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC ) I
neg
=
1
3
( 2
IA + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC )
0
a = e j120
0
2
a = e j240
This value is divided by the maximum phase current ⏐Imax⏐ and compared with the set
threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is
issued once the operate delay +300 ms have elapsed.
3-242 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
164 Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-243

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the voltage-

measuring circuits
The voltages used by distance protection as measured values are monitored for
plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function.
Monitoring of voltage-measuring circuits is based on the following criteria:
Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the default
threshold of 0.4 ⋅ Vnom . This monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds
0.05 ⋅ Inom in one phase.
The negative-sequence component of phase-to-ground voltages is monitored in

accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. Monitoring is enabled
when a phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the default threshold of 0.7 ⋅ Vnom / 3 .
In addition to this criterion, either a minimum current with the default threshold setting
of I > 0.05 ⋅ Inom or the closed position of the circuit breaker can be used as enabling
criteria. If there is an enable, the absolute value of the negative-sequence
component of the voltage system is determined in accordance with the definition of
symmetrical components. This is based on the M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d setting
(alternative terminology: Phase sequence).
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: Clockwise rotating field):
V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B − G + a ⋅ V C −G )
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: Anticlockwise rotating field):
V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B − G + a ⋅ V C −G )
0
a = e j120
0
a 2 = e j 240
This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2 ⋅ Vnom / 3 . If the
threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the operate
delay has elapsed.
If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance protection is
blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time protection – provided the
appropriate setting has been selected.
In addition, the M C M O N : M e a s . vo l t a g e O K monitoring signal is issued if all

phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65 ⋅ Vnom and negative-
sequence monitoring has not operated.
3-244 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Rotary
field
[ 010 049 ]
MCMON: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext. >0.7*Vnom/ 3

disabled C
[ 038 046 ]
VA-G
VB-G >0.2*Vnom/ 3
C
VC-G
|Vneg|
MCMON: Operate
delay
[ 017 011 ] SFMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 098 014 ]
t 0
MCMON: Vneg>
triggered
[ 041 079 ]
DIST: General t 0
starting S1 1 SFMON: Under-
[ 036 240 ] voltage
R1 [ 098 009 ]
MCMON: Under-
voltage
BUOC: Starting [ 038 038 ]
[ 036 013 ]
MCMON: Op. mode MCMON: Phase

volt. mon. sequ. V faulty
[ 014 007 ] [ 038 049 ]
SFMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
1: Vneg
2: Vneg with
curr. enab
3: Vneg w.CB
cont.enab.
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
>0.05*Inom
C
IA
IB
IC
<0.4*Vnom
C
>0.65*Vnom
C
0 5s MCMON: Meas.
voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
45Z6341A_EN
3-165 Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-245

3 Operation
(continued)
Fuse failure monitoring of

phase-to-ground voltages
In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the P43x
also provides for fuse failure monitoring. This function is used in particular when there is
no voltage transformer m.c.b. auxiliary contact. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it
can be disabled by setting parameters.
The fuse failure monitoring function must distinguish between a short circuit in the three-
phase current system and a lack of measuring voltage due to a short circuit or open
circuit (broken wire) in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A short circuit exists in the three-phase current system being monitored, if one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
Distance protection has started.

Major current variations occur in at least one phase current and in the positive-
sequence current system.
The P43x uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or three-phase
faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A single- or two-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage

transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
The base point release for the distance protection has operated in none or all of
the three phases.
A current rise ∆I/∆t > 10% occurs in not exactly one phase.
The negative-sequence current does not exceed the set threshold.
The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded the set threshold Vneg, FF.
A three-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer if the
following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
The base point release for the distance protection has operated in at least one
phase.
The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos, FF.
The positive-sequence current may only vary less than -10% or +5% within 50 ms
after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos<, FF.
3-246 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set; it is reset when the positive-
sequence voltage exceeds the fixed threshold of 0.5 Vnom and the negative-sequence
voltage falls below the set threshold Vneg<, FF.
If the memory is set and the base point release for the distance protection has operated
in at least one phase, or if the negative-sequence voltage set threshold is exceeded, the
P43x determines that the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer is faulty. In this
case distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time
protection – provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-247

3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: FF, V
enabled USER
[ 014 009 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
DIST: IA>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 598
DIST: IB>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 599
DIST: IC>(Ibl)
trigg.
303 600
DIST: General 0 30 ms
starting
[ 036 240 ]
IA I/ t > 5%
IB I/ t > 5%
IC I/ t > 5%
MAIN: Rotary
field
[ 010 049 ]
Ipos Ipos/ t > 5%
-10%< Ipos/ t<5%
MCMON: Ineg>, FF
[ 031 057 ]
MCMON: Set FF, V
304 650
|Ineg|
MCMON: Vneg>, FF
[ 031 056 ]
VA-G
|Vneg| MCMON: Vneg>, FF
VB-G trigg.
304 651
VC-G
MCMON: Vpos<, FF
[ 031 053 ]
|Vpos| 1 50 ms
45Z63FKA_EN
3-166 Fuse failure monitoring, Part 1 of 2
3-248 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-167 Fuse failure monitoring, Part 2 of 2
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-249

3 Operation
(continued)
"Fuse Failure" monitoring

of the reference voltage
The P43x includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is
required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC). Fuse Failure monitoring of the
reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has been configured. This is
specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer
m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the three-
phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is
present when the following conditions are met:
The circuit breaker is closed.

The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom.
3-168 "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
3-250 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Backup overcurrent-time protection (Function Group BUOC)
If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked, since

accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent-time protection
(BUOC) is then automatically activated – if set accordingly.
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) is enabled if there is a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit. It monitors the phase currents for overcurrents exceeding the set
values I>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage tI> is started. After the
set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If inrush stabilization is triggered,
BUOC protection is blocked.
If the ‘Low impedance-grounding’ setting has been selected for the neutral point
treatment, ground current IN is also monitored by the settable trigger IN>, in addition to
the phase currents. If the ground current exceeds the set value, timer stage tIN> is
started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. Inrush stabilization
blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection.
The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection function will
trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer stages tI> and tIN>
will be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase starting, the trip signal will
then be issued instantaneously; with ground starting, it will be issued after an 80 s delay.
Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is elapsing.

If auto-reclosure is not required or if auto-reclosure with three-pole HSR is required, then
the trip signal is always three-pole.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-251

3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC: General
enable USER
[ 014 011 ] SFMON: BUOC not
active
[ 098 002 ]
0
BUOC: Enabled
1 [ 040 093 ]
0: no
1: yes
BUOC: Operating
mode
[ 014 000 ] SFMON: BUOC
active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1
SFMON: BUOC
2 active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
3
BUOC: Active
1: Without ARC [ 037 021 ]
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
3: With ARC, 1/3p. HSR
AWE: Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC: tI>
GRUND: Rush C PSx
restr. A trig. [ * ]
[ 041 027 ]
GRUND: Rush
restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
GRUND: Rush BUOC: Trip
restr. C trig. signal
[ 041 029 ] [ 036 014 ]
BUOC: I>
C PSx
MAIN: Protection [ * ] BUOC: IA>
active triggered
306 001
304 750
IA
BUOC: IB>
IB triggered
304 751
IC BUOC: IC>
triggered
304 752
BUOC: tIN>
C PSx
ARC: Dead time [ * ]
running
[ 037 002 ]
GRUND: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx BUOC: IN>
[ * ] C PSx C
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
BUOC: Starting
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: SN
304 757
BUOC: IN>
triggered
304 753
* Parameter GRUND: Neutr.pt.

treat. PSx
BUOC: I>
PSx
BUOC: tI>
PSx
BUOC: IN>
PSx
BUOC: tIN>
PSx
set 1 010 048 010 058 010 059 010 064 010 065
set 2 001 076 010 078 010 079 010 084 010 085
set 3 001 077 010 098 010 099 011 004 011 005
set 4 001 078 011 018 011 019 011 024 011 025
49Z6434 A_EN
3-169 Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) in the P433
3-252 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-170 Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) in the P435
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-253

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)
When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing

fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were inadvertently left
connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance protection function would not
clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest
possible clearance is desired.
To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be applied
not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P43x. The M A I N : M a n u a l c l o s e
E X T signal must be configured separately to a binary signal input (and triggered during
the closing action) even if the close command is issued via the P43x. The manual close
signal is converted to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The pulse time can be set.
The user may specify whether the following shall occur during operation of this timer
stage:
The occurrence of a general start shall cause a trip (S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l )

(see section 'Starting Signals and Tripping Logic' for a definition of general starting).
A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur (SO T F : Z 1 e xt e n d e d ) .
Switch on to fault protection can be blocked by external auto-reclosing control (ARC),

provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly. An internal blocking
signal is generated together with the trigger signal for the timer stage. This internal
blocking signal will prevent that ARC is activated during an existing fault when a manual
close signal is issued.
3-171 Switch on to Fault Protection
3-254 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)
The reach of the first impedance zone of the distance protection function is normally set
for values less than 100%. Protective signaling is used to extend protection to 100% of
the line section. This is achieved by logical linking of the signals that are transmitted by
the remote station’s protection device.
protective signaling
The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through binary
signal inputs.
The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via

P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via P S I G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, protective
signaling can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have
equal status. If only the P S I G : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal
input, then protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is
disabled by a negative edge. If only the PSIG: D i s a b l e E X T function is assigned to
a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
Readiness of protective
signaling
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
It must be enabled.
There must be no external block.
There must be no transmission fault.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-255

3 Operation
(continued)
3-172 Enabling, disabling and readiness of protective signaling
3-256 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place in zone 1.
With normal reach: After distance protection stage t1 has elapsed.

With extended reach: after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed.
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
8: Direction
comparison
MAIN: Meas.r.extd.
ext./RC
306 002
PSIG: Tripping PSIG: Timer

time PSx stage elapsed
[ * ] 305 164
PSIG: Trip
time elapsed
PSIG: Ready t 0 305 150
[ 037 027 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
* Parameter PSIG: Tripping PSIG: Operating

time PSx mode PSx
set 1 015 011 015 000
set 2 024 003 024 000
set 3 024 063 024 060
set 4 025 023 025 020
49Z6442 A_EN
3-173 Protective signaling tripping time
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-257

3 Operation
(continued)
Three-ended line
application
In general the P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T or P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T signals
are simply used in an 'OR' combination.
In case a permissive scheme is applied to 3-ended lines, the permissive signals from
both remote end units must be received, and these two signals have then to be used in
an 'AND' combination.
Forming such an 'AND' combination externally would mean having to accept additional
delays and loss of data with respect to the transmitted signals. In order to have this
operation available and overcome the shortcomings of the usual single channel data
transmission links, the P43x features the possibility to use these two signals directly by
setting parameters P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x to 'Yes'.
These two signals are further processed as shown in the figure below to create a new
signal (P S I G : R e c e i v e ) which is used in the various PSIG operating modes. (This
new signal replaces the P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T signal previously available in
software versions up to -611.)
If 3-ended line protection is enabled then both receive signals are linked in an 'AND'
gate, otherwise they are linked in an 'OR' gate. The latter permits the use of either the A
or the B signal, or even both signals in case of redundant signaling channels, on
2-ended lines.
PSIG: 3ended
line prot PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG: Receive (A) & PSIG: Receive

[ 006 036 ]
EXT
[ 036 048 ]
&
&
PSIG: Receive (B)
EXT
[ 006 037 ]
Parameter PSIG: 3ended
line prot PSx
set 1 006 039
set 2 006 046
set 3 006 047
set 4 006 048 47Z12
04B_EN
3-174 Three-ended line protection
3-258 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the
transmission section
A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function (see
Figure 3-175). If protective signaling is being carried out via a signal transmission or
communication device, the device's fault signal can be connected. With protective
signaling over pilot wires or with the operating mode set to 'reverse interlocking' the
internal monitoring function will detect a fault in the transmission channel.
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ] PSIG: Telecom.
6: DC loop faulty
operat. mode [ 036 060 ]
PSIG: Release
t. send PSx SFMON: Telecom.
[ * ] faulty/PSIG
[ 098 006 ]
PSIG: Receive Set value+600ms 0

[ 006 036 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG: Telecom.
faulty int.
305 151
PSIG: Telecom.
faulty EXT
[ 004 064 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release
mode PSx t. send PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
45Z6347A_EN
3-175 Transmission fault
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-259

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring
Failure of frequency transmission may be signaled to the P43x via an appropriately
configured binary signal input (P S I G : F r e q . m o n . t r i g . E X T ). If frequency
monitoring is enabled, the P43x – once a time-delay of approximately 20 ms has elapsed
– will generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms.
PSIG: Frequency
monit. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
PSIG: Receive 20ms 0 305 152
[ 006 036 ] 1
150ms
PSIG: Freq. mon.
trig. EXT
[ 038 080 ]
Parameter PSIG: Frequency
monit. PSx
set 1 015 025
set 2 024 011
set 3 024 071
set 4 025 031 45Z6348A_EN
3-176 Frequency monitoring
3-260 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking
In the event of a direction change, protective signaling will be blocked for the time set at
PSIG: tBlock PSx.
PSIG: tBlock PSIG: tBlock

PSx PSx
DIST: Fault [ * ] [ * ]
forward / LS S1 1
[ 036 018 ]
R1
PSIG: Transient
DIST: Fault blocking
backward / BS S1 1 305 154
[ 036 019 ]
R1
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
* Parameter PSIG: tBlock
PSx
set 1 015 024
set 2 024 010
set 3 024 070
set 4 025 030
49Z6444 A_EN
3-177 Transient blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-261

3 Operation
(continued)
Protective signaling
operating modes
Protective signaling can be operated in eight different modes. The following operating
modes require a signal transmission device:
Direct underreaching transfer trip

PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer trip)
Zone extension
Release (permissive) scheme
Blocking scheme
Direction comparison
For operation in the modes referred to as ‘DC loop operating mode’ and ‘reverse
interlocking’, pilot wires are required for signal transmission.
3-178 Setting the protective signaling operating modes
3-262 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking the operating

mode setting
The P435 features protective signaling and ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling. If the P435 is operating with protective signaling and ground fault protective
signaling, then the user has the option to specify whether ground fault protective
signaling will share the channel used by protective signaling (distance schemes) for
signal transmission. If this is the case, the operating modes for protective signaling and
ground fault protection signaling must be set identically. Otherwise a signal will be
issued.
3-179 Checking the operating mode setting in the P435
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-263

3 Operation
(continued)
Limiting to weak-infeed
logic or echo function
If only the weak-infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other protective
signaling functions, then this can be implemented by setting the operating mode to
‘Without’.
Direct underreaching
transfer trip
When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. Upon receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote
station’s circuit breaker is tripped. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive
signal will be ignored.
PSIG: Release PSIG: Release

t. send PSx t. send PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
PSIG: Ready PSIG: Send

[ 037 027 ] (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
PSIG: Operating (transm.relay)
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
1: Dir.trans.
trip.under
DIST: Trip signal
zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Receive
PSIG: Transient (signal)
blocking [ 037 029 ]
305 154

set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
43Z6349A_EN
3-180 P433: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'direct underreaching transfer trip' operating mode
3-264 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)

[ * ] [ * ]

[ 037 027 ] (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
1: Dir.trans.
trip.under
DIST: Trip zone 1
303 584
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze
303 595
PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Receive
PSIG: Transient (signal)
blocking [ 037 029 ]
305 154

set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
45Z6349A_EN
3-181 P435: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'direct underreaching transfer trip' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-265

3 Operation
(continued)
PUTT (permissive
underreaching transfer trip)
When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. On receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote
station’s circuit breaker is subject to permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)
once the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. The
D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G P S x and D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P P S x settings are
taken into account by the P435. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal
will be ignored.

[ * ] [ * ]

(signal)
[ 037 027 ] [ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
2: PUTT
DIST: Trip signal
zone 1
[ 035 072 ] PSIG: Trip 2
305 156
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient
blocking PSIG: Receive
305 154
(signal)
PSIG: Timer [ 037 029 ]
stage elapsed
305 164
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]

set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
43Z6350A_EN
3-182 P433: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'PUTT' operating mode
3-266 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)

[ * ] [ * ]

[ 037 027 ] (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
2: PUTT
DIST: Trip zone 1

303 584
PSIG: Trip 2
305 156
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient
305 154
(signal)
PSIG: Timer [ 037 029 ]
stage elapsed
305 164
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]

set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
45Z6350A_EN
3-183 P435: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'PUTT' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-267

3 Operation
(continued)
Zone extension
When a distance protection trip has occurred in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote
station’s protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal, the measuring range
of zone 1 in the remote station is increased by the zone extension factor kze HSR.
The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting
at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x in the remote station.
'Direction-dependent'
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if distance
protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. The
taken into account by the P435. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive
'Distance-dependent'
If the fault is located within the extended zone, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal
will be ignored.
3-184 Reaches with zone extension

(dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR)
3-268 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
If D I S T : O p . m o d e z o n e 4 P S x was set to'1p:Z1/t1(3p); 3p:Z1/t4' or '1p:Z1/t1;

3p:Z1/t4', the receive signal is stored until the general starting condition of distance
protection drops out. In order to be stored, the receive signal must persist for at least
40 ms. This function is important for backup protection.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-269

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Release
t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: Ready 0 t PSIG: Send

[ 037 027 ] (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
mode PSx [ 037 024 ]
[ * ]
3: Zone
extension
DIST: Trip signal PSIG: Z1
zone 1 extended
[ 035 072 ] [ 035 075 ]
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
40ms 0
S1 1
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg. R1
305 152
PSIG: Transient
blocking
305 154
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST: Op. mode

zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
2: 1p:Z1/
t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4
6: 1p:Z1/t1,
3p:Z1/t4 PSIG: Receive
(signal)
MAIN: General [ 037 029 ]
starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: Oper. Mode

trip PSx
[ * ]
2
1
1: Direct.-dependent PSIG: Trip

enable
2: Dist.-dependent 305 157
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Timer
stage elapsed
305 164
DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release PSIG: Oper. Mode DIST: Op. mode
mode PSx t. send PSx trip PSx zone 4 PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 107 012 000
set 2 024 000 024 001 015 108 012 050
set 3 024 060 024 061 015 113 013 000
set 4 025 020 025 021 015 114 013 050
43Z6345A_EN
3-185 P433: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Zone extension' operating mode
3-270 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
[ 006 036 ]
DIST: General starting

[ 036 240 ]
45Z6345A_EN
3-186 P435: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Zone extension' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-271

3 Operation
(continued)
Release (permissive)
scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR. The distance protection trip in extended
zone 1 is blocked in both protection devices.
3-187 Zone reaches with the release (permissive) scheme

3-272 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P43x sends a

signal to the remote station.
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction, the P43x
sends a signal to the remote station.
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1, the P43x
sends a signal to the remote station.
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if distance
protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. The
taken into account by the P435. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled, if there is a receive signal.
If the fault is located within extended zone 1, then the protection device of the remote
station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling tripping
time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be
ignored.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-273

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Oper. Mode

PSIG: Operating send PSx
[ * ]
mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
1
2
1: Direct.-dependent PSIG: Release

t. send PSx
2: Dist.-dependent [ * ]
PSIG: Send
(signal)
DIST: Fault [ 036 035 ]
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ] PSIG: Send
(transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
DIST: Dist.
decision Z1,ze PSIG: Z1
303 563
extended
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Transient
305 154
(signal)
starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: Oper. Mode

trip PSx
[ * ]
2
1
1: Direct.-dependent PSIG: Trip

enable
2: Dist.-dependent 305 157
DIST: Trip signal

Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
PSIG: Timer PSIG: Trip signal

stage elapsed [ 038 007 ]
305 164
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release PSIG: Oper. Mode PSIG: Oper. Mode
mode PSx t. send PSx send PSx trip PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 036 015 107
set 2 024 000 024 001 015 037 015 108
set 3 024 060 024 061 015 040 015 113
set 4 025 020 025 021 015 041 015 114
43Z6351A_EN
3-188 P433: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Release scheme' (permissive)
operating mode
3-274 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
[ 006 036 ]
45Z6351A_EN
3-189 P435: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Release scheme' (permissive)
operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-275

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking scheme
Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at
PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended.
In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended
by the zone extension factor kze HSR. The distance protection trip in extended
zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.
3-190 Zone reaches with the blocking scheme

3-276 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P43x sends a

signal to the remote station.
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction or – for a
directional change – for the transient blocking time (setting at
P S I G : t B l o c k P S x ), a signal is sent to the remote station.
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the measured
direction matches the direction set for zone 6, then the P43x sends a signal to the
remote station. A signal is also sent to the remote station during transient blocking.
After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs if no receive
signal is present and distance protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'.
The D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G P S x and D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P P S x settings
are taken into account by the P435. If transient blocking is operating, then the
receive signal will be ignored.
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled if there is no receive
signal. If the fault is located within extended zone 1, then the protection device of the
remote station also decides in favor of a trip in zone 1 after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal
will be ignored.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-277

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating PSIG: Oper. Mode

mode PSx send PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
5: Blocking
scheme
1
2
1: Direct.-dependent PSIG: Release

t. send PSx
2: Dist.-dependent [ * ]
PSIG: Send
DIST: Fault (signal)
backward / BS [ 036 035 ]
[ 036 019 ] PSIG: Send
(transm.relay)
PSIG: Transient [ 037 024 ]
blocking
305 154
PSIG: Impedance PSIG: Z1

in zone 6 extended
[ 037 200 ] [ 035 075 ]
PSIG: Receive
PSIG: Receive (signal)
[ 006 036 ] [ 037 029 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: Oper. Mode

trip PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: Trip 1
305 155
1
2
1: Direct.-dependent
2: Dist.-dependent
PSIG: Timer
stage elapsed
305 164
DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG: Trip
enable
305 157
PSIG: Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release PSIG: Oper. Mode PSIG: Oper. Mode
mode PSx t. send PSx send PSx trip PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 036 015 107
set 2 024 000 024 001 015 037 015 108
set 3 024 060 024 061 015 040 015 113
set 4 025 020 025 021 015 041 015 114
43Z6352A_EN
3-191 P433: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Blocking scheme' operating mode
3-278 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
[ 006 036 ]
45Z6352A_EN
3-192 P435: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the 'Blocking scheme' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-279

3 Operation
(continued)
DC loop
To set up a communications link, it is necessary to connect either the break contact or
the make contact of the transmitting relay according to the selected transmitting relay
mode ('Transm.relay make co' or 'Transm.relay break c'), to the
P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of the remote station by installing pilot wires.
Prot.rel. w.break c.
Prot.rel. w.break c.
Prot.rel. w.make c.
Prot.rel. w.make c.
PSIG: Send PSIG: Send
(transm.relay) (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ] [ 037 024 ]
PSIG: Receive (A) PSIG: Receive (A)

EXT EXT
[ 036 048 ] [ 036 048 ]
Protection device 1 Protection device 2
45Z6353A_EN
3-193 Protective signaling over pilot wires
3-280 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
In the idle state a receive signal is present at both protection devices (DC loop closed)
and the measuring range of zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR.
The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction, a signal is sent
to the remote station (DC loop open). The overcurrent fault detection logic of the
distance protection function immediately opens the DC loop without waiting for the
transfer trip timer stage to elapse or for a direction decision to be issued. The DC loop is
immediately closed again – without taking into account the reset time of the send signal
– if distance protection detects the fault to be in forward direction.
A distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is issued only after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed, provided that no receive signal is present (open loop).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-281

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release

[ * ] [ * ]
6: DC loop
operat. mode
PSIG: Send
(signal)
DIST: IA>> [ 036 035 ]
triggered
303 511
PSIG: Send
DIST: IB>> (transm.relay)
triggered [ 037 024 ]
303 512
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
DIST: Fault
backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ] PSIG: Z1
extended
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG: DC loop op.
mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Transm.relay
break c
2: Transm.relay
make co
PSIG: Trip
PSIG: Receive enable
[ 006 036 ] 305 157
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg. PSIG: Trip signal
305 152
[ 038 007 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze PSIG: Receive
[ 035 074 ] (signal)
starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release PSIG: DC loop op.

mode PSx t. send PSx mode PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 012
set 2 024 000 024 001 024 051
set 3 024 060 024 061 025 011
set 4 025 020 025 021 025 071
43Z6354A_EN
3-194 P433: PSIG send, zone extension and trip enable signals by protective signaling in the 'DC loop' operating mode
3-282 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release

t. send PSx
mode PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
6: DC loop
operat. mode
PSIG: Send
(signal)
DIST: IA>> [ 036 035 ]
triggered
303 511
PSIG: Send
DIST: IB>> (transm.relay)
303 512
DIST: IC>>
triggered
303 513
DIST: Fault
backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
DIST: Fault
forward / LS
[ 036 018 ] PSIG: Z1
extended
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG: DC loop op.
mode PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Transm.relay
break c
2: Transm.relay
make co
PSIG: Trip
PSIG: Receive enable
[ 006 036 ] 305 157
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg. PSIG: Trip signal
305 152 [ 038 007 ]
DIST: Trip
zone 1,ze PSIG: Receive
303 595
(signal)
starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release PSIG: DC loop op.

mode PSx t. send PSx mode PSx
set 1 015 000 015 002 015 012
set 2 024 000 024 001 024 051
set 3 024 060 024 061 025 011
set 4 025 020 025 021 025 071
45Z6354A_EN
3-195 P435: PSIG send, zone extension and trip enable signals by protective signaling in the 'DC loop' operating mode
The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. If, during a fault-free operation, i.e. with
no distance protection general starting condition present, no signal is received from the
DC loop for a period longer than the set transmitted signal reset time plus 600 ms, then
the P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y signal is issued (see figure 3-175) and protective
signaling is blocked.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-283

3 Operation
(continued)
Reverse interlocking
In radial networks with single-side infeed, it is possible under certain conditions for
busbar protection to be configured by sampling the starting of feeder protection devices.
By means of appropriate interconnection, a send signal is then formed when a feeder
protection device starts. When the P43x receives this signal, distance protection tripping
in extended zone 1 is blocked. The blocking signal has a reset time delay set at
PSIG: tBlock.
PSIG: Receive (A)

EXT
[ 036 048 ]
Starting Starting Starting
Output 1 Output 2 Output 3
45Z6355A_EN
3-196 Reverse interlocking
The pilot wires are monitored. If a receive signal is present for more than 10 s without
any general starting of distance protection, then blocking of the distance protection trip in
extended zone 1 is cancelled. No new block can occur until the receive signal has
dropped out.
3-284 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ]
7: Reverse
interlocking
PSIG: Trip enable

PSIG: tBlock 305 157
PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: t1
revers.interlock
PSIG: Receive 0 t [ 036 020 ]
EXT
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Telecom
faulty int.
10s 0 305 151
S1 1
R1
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ]
Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: tBlock

mode PSx PSx
set 1 015 000 015 024
set 2 024 000 024 010
set 3 024 060 024 070
set 4 025 020 025 030
49Z6446 B_EN
3-197 Trip enable and trip signal in the 'Reverse interlocking' operating mode
3-198 This figure number is reserved for future versions
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-285

3 Operation
(continued)
Direction comparison
A signal is sent to the remote station if distance protection detects a fault in the forward
direction.
Once the tripping time has elapsed, protective signaling issues a trip decision if a receive
signal is present and distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction. In the
event of a direction change, the receive signal is ignored for the PSIG : tBl o c k set
time (‘transient blocking’) so as to avoid unwanted tripping in the protection of double
circuit lines.
PSIG: Release
t. send PSx PSIG: Release
[ * ] t. send PSx
[ * ]

[ 037 027 ] (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Operating
mode PSx
[ * ] PSIG: Send
8: Direction (transm.relay)
comparison [ 037 024 ]
DIST: Fault
forward / LS PSIG: Trip 2
[ 036 018 ] 305 156
PSIG: Receive PSIG: Trip signal

[ 006 036 ] [ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Timer
stage elapsed
305 164
PSIG: Transient
blocking
305 154 PSIG: Receive
(signal)
[ 037 029 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ] Parameter PSIG: Operating PSIG: Release
set 1 015 000 015 002
set 2 024 000 024 001
set 3 024 060 024 061
set 4 025 020 025 021
45Z6357A_EN
3-199 PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the 'Direction comparison' operating mode
3-286 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Weak-infeed logic
The P43x features a "weak-infeed logic" function. Weak-infeed logic can either be
triggered by a binary signal input configured to P S I G : W e a k i n f . t r i g g . E X T or
by the binary signal input configured to P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T .
The weak-infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine whether they
fall below the P S I G : V < w e a k i n f e e d P S x set threshold. If the voltage in one
phase falls below the set threshold, then a timer stage is started. Once it has elapsed –
provided that the appropriate setting has been selected – a protective signaling trip is
issued. The D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G P S x setting is taken into account by the P435.
Enable for the

weak-infeed logic
The following is relevant to enable the weak-infeed logic:
The function is blocked
- by an idle feeder if the newly implemented monitoring function detects this
state from a 3-pole undervoltage condition.
- by a signal present at an appropriately configured binary signal input
PSIG: Block. Weak inf. EXT.
The general starting signal is stored in an RS flip-flop that is only reset after the
received signal has ended. This excludes an over reaction during a reset of its
own starting when the received signal from the other end is still present.
PSIG: Ready PSIG: Weak inf.

[ 037 027 ] & ready
310 014
V < 0,35 Vnom/ 3
5s 0
&
VA-G
VB-G Detection of dead line by

undervoltage criterion
VC-G (only with line side VT connection)
GSCSG: Bl. PSIG 1)

weak infeed
304 003
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN: General S 1 1
starting
[ 036 000 ]
& R 1
PSIG: Receive 0 50ms

weak inf. Blocking condition: Starting, extended
310 047 until the received signal ends
PSIG: Block.
weak inf. EXT
[ 036 255 ]
1) only P435 45Z6359B_EN
3-200 Enabling of weak-infeed logic
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-287

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Trip signal

V< PSx
PSIG: tV< [ * ]
PSIG: V< weak PSx
PSIG: Weak inf. infeed PSx [ * ]
ready 0
310 014 [ * ]
1
VA-G
0: No
VB-G 1: Yes
VC-G
PSIG: V<
triggered
305 162
PSIG: Trip V<

INP: Fct. 305 158
assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Ux1
Ux2 PSIG: Weak infeed

start.
Ux3 [ 043 064 ]
Uxx
Address 043 062

PSIG: Weak inf.
trigg. EXT
[ 043 062 ]
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
Parameter PSIG: V< weak PSIG: tV< PSIG: Trip signal

infeed PSx PSx V< PSx
set 1 015 020 015 019 015 021
set 2 024 006 024 005 024 007
set 3 024 066 024 065 024 067
set 4 025 026 025 025 025 027
43Z6358A_EN
3-201 P433: Weak-infeed logic
3-288 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Weak inf.

ready PSIG: Trip signal
310 014
PSIG: tV< V< PSx
PSIG: V< weak PSx [ * ]
GSCSG: Bl. PSIG infeed PSx [ * ]
weak infeed [ * ]
304 003
0
VA-G 1
VB-G 0: No
1: Yes
VC-G
PSIG: V<
triggered
305 162
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
PSIG: Trip
V<, A
305 159
Ux1 PSIG: Trip
V<, B
Ux2 305 160
PSIG: Trip
Ux3 V<, C
305 161
Uxx
Address 043 062

PSIG: Weak inf.
trigg. EXT
[ 043 062 ]
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
DIST: Trip zone 1 PSIG: Trip V<

PG PSx 305 158
[ * ]
1: 1-pole
PSIG: Weak infeed

start.
[ 043 064 ]
Parameter PSIG: V< weak PSIG: tV< PSIG: Trip signal DIST: Trip zone 1
infeed PSx PSx V< PSx PG PSx
set 1 015 020 015 019 015 021 011 050
set 2 024 006 024 005 024 007 011 051
set 3 024 066 024 065 024 067 011 052
set 4 025 026 025 025 025 027 011 053
45Z6358A_EN
3-202 P435: Weak-infeed logic
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-289

3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function
If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether the
receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or whether the
receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak-infeed logic are to be used. The
conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a period in excess of the set
time-delay, and distance protection starting must be absent for the echo pulse to be
activated. This time-delay is ineffective with an open circuit breaker (i.e. when the signal
MAIN : C B o p e n 3 p is present). The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote
station for the set pulse duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is
blocked for the set pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being
transmitted. The echo function may be disabled.
The following exception applies to the P435:If the P435 is operating with ground fault
protective signaling and if directional measurement of ground fault protection has been
enabled, the echo signal will be blocked if protective signaling (distance schemes) and
ground fault protective signaling are sharing a common transmission channel.
PSIG: Echo on
receive PSx
[ * ]
1
2
0: Without
1: On receive
2: On receive & V<
PSIG: Op. Delay PSIG: Pulse dur.
echo PSx echo PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
PSIG: V<
triggered t 0 PSIG: Send
305 162
PSIG: Receive (A) (signal)
EXT [ 036 035 ]
[ 036 048 ]
PSIG: Receive (B) 0 t+1s PSIG: Send
EXT (transm.relay)
[ 006 037 ] [ 037 024 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
MAIN: CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter PSIG: Echo on PSIG: Op. Delay PSIG: Pulse dur.

receive PSx echo PSx echo PSx
set 1 015 003 015 022 015 023
set 2 024 002 024 008 024 009
set 3 024 062 024 068 024 069
set 4 025 022 025 028 025 029
43Z6346A_EN
3-203 P433: Echo function
3-290 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common
channel
GFSC: Direct.
determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
PSIG: Echo on
receive PSx
[ * ]
1
2
0: Without PSIG: Op. Delay PSIG: Pulse dur.
1: On receive echo PSx echo PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
2: On receive & V<
t 0 PSIG: Send
PSIG: V< 1 (signal)
305 162
PSIG: Receive (A)
EXT 0 t+1s PSIG: Send
[ 036 048 ] (transm.relay)
PSIG: Receive (B) [ 037 024 ]
EXT
[ 006 037 ]
PSIG: Frequ.
monit. trigg.
305 152
MAIN: CB open 3p
[ 031 040 ]
DIST: General
startingg
[ 036 240 ]
Parameter PSIG: Echo on PSIG: Op. Delay PSIG: Pulse dur.

receive PSx echo PSx echo PSx
set 1 015 003 015 022 015 023
set 2 024 002 024 008 024 009
set 3 024 062 024 068 024 069
set 4 025 022 025 028 025 029
45Z6346A_EN
3-204 P435: Echo function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-291

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication

channel
The communications link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued
through a binary signal input or by a setting parameter. It is extended by the reset time-
delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the transmission link
is in order.
3-205 Testing the communication channel
3-292 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Auto-Reclosing Control in the P433 (Function Group ARC)
After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about automatic
reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection device.
ARC operating modes

The integral ARC function in the P433 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures.
When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin
with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by an HSR,
then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delayed reclosure (TDR).
Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set
accordingly.
3-206 Setting the ARC operating mode in the P433
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-293

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the

ARC function
signal inputs.
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets)

via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the
Auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary
signal inputs have equal status. If only the A R C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the A R C : D i s a b l e E X T parameter has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-294 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-207 Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control in the P433
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-295

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:
Protection is activated (on).

ARC is not blocked.
No ARC cycle is running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening and
closing mechanism ready).
The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)
No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.
3-208 ARC readiness in the P433
3-296 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocking
ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
Distance protection detects a fault in the cable section of the transmission section.
A manual close is carried out.
A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but no ARC is to be
carried out.
A manual open command is issued.
A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault protective signaling.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault tripping.
The binary signal input configured to A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is triggered.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is started, and
when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
3-209 ARC blocking in the P433
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-297

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC tripping times

If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC function
are initiated by the general starting condition. These tripping times replace distance
protection timer stage t1,ze or the BUOC timer stages.
3-210 ARC tripping times in the P433
3-298 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting the ARC cycle

When the ARC function is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following
functions:
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of a parallel
protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been configured
accordingly.
A distance protection trip (possible without general starting, such as through the
protective signaling direct transfer trip underreaching mode).
A backup overcurrent-time protection trip (BUOC trip), provided that the ARC is to be
activated by the BUOC function.
The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the parameters of this
device have been set accordingly (A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x ).
A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-299

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) in the P433
When the ARC cycle starts, operative time 1 is started. The starting conditions for the
ARC cycle must drop out while the operative time is elapsing. This means that the
circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead time is started. If the operative time is
set at ≤ 25 ms, then ARC will not be ready in the event of starting; in the event of a trip,
the reclaim time is started.
The three-pole dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting

conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead
time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine
whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative
time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If the ASC is
disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a close command is
issued immediately
If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but
during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e m a x P S x ) is
started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC
checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached
during the ASC operative time and while the dead time is elapsing, then there is a close
enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC function is not
ready, then the reclaim time is started after the dead time has elapsed, and three-pole
tripping occurs (final trip).
3-300 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-211 P433: Signal sequence for high-speed reclosure (HSR)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-301

3 Operation
(continued)
Test HSR
A test HSR can be carried out using setting parameters or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-212 P433: Test HSR
3-302 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in the P433
A TDR may occur after an HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if
the operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is possible only if the setting
at A R C : N o . o f p e r m i t . T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero.
The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an external
protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim time is elapsing.
Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions for the TDR drop out while
operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead time is started. After the dead time
has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC).
The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is
reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close
command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip occurs after
the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is started.
If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started again.
This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the number of permitted TDRs.
If the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-303

3 Operation
(continued)
3-213 P433: Signal sequence with time-delayed reclosure (TDR)
3-304 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) in the P433
Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P433 carries out
appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and that the
line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC before reclosing by HSR
or TDR.
If the setting at M AIN : N e u tr a l - p o i n t tr e a t. P S x is 'Low-impedance grounding',

then both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
either 'Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding' or 'Short-duration grounding', then only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
ARC: Enable RRC

PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: no
ARC: V> RRC
1: yes C PSx
[ * ]
ARC: V> for RRC
triggered
303 014
VA-G* 3
VA-G
VB-G VB-G* 3
VC-G
VC-G* 3
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
* Parameter- ARC: Enable RRC

PSx
ARC: V> RRC
PSx
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
set 1 015 085 015 087 010 048
set 2 024 044 024 046 001 076
set 3 025 004 025 006 001 077
set 4 025 064 025 066 001 078
49Z64AHA_EN
3-214 P433: Voltage monitoring for RRC
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-305

3 Operation
(continued)
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the RRC
timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P433 checks to
determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were greater than or
equal to the set threshold value (A R C : V > R R C P S x ) during the last 100 ms. If this
was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC).
The ASC function will then check if reclosing is permitted. If the ASC decision is
positive, a close enable and then a close command are issued. If reclosing is not
permitted, there is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the close
request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not greater or
equal to the set threshold (A R C : V > R R C P S x ), then the ARC cycle is continued by
the HSR or TDR.
3-306 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Reclosure Close reject
43Z6398A_EN
3-215 P433: Signal sequence for rapid reclosure (RRC)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-307

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.4 Parallel Blocking in the P433
If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P433, then the 'trip' from
this protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence – provided
that the binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The effect exercised by
the "Trip" of the external protection device operating in parallel depends on the setting at
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x (see Figure 3-218 for setting).
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Without function'
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional
sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Parallel blocking without initiation'
The "Trip" of the external parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR,
HSR or RRC functional sequence.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x 'Parallel blocking with initiation'
The "Trip" of the external protection device starts a TDR, HSR or RRC. The
sequence is the same as with initiation by the P433.
3-308 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.5 Zone Extension in the P433
Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is only
initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.
HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.
Zone extension by kze HSR

Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . H S R P S x 'Yes'

The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while operative time 1
is elapsing.
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x
'Following HSR'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing if the
close command is issued by an HSR.
'Always'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing..
How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for 'No' or 'Without', respectively, then there is no zone
extension.
Zone extension by kze TDR

The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor
kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as another TDR
is permitted and the setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . T D R P S x is 'Yes'. Zone
extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the setting is 'No',
there is no zone extension.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-309

3 Operation
(continued)
3-216 P433: Zone extension by ARC
3-310 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.6 General ARC Control Functions in the P433
Monitoring the receive

signals of protective
signaling
The user can specify whether there will be intervention in the ARC sequence when a
signal is received by protective signaling. If this is desired, then the ARC cycle is
continued in different ways depending on the number of receive signals that are received
by the P433 while operative time 1 or the single- or three-pole dead times are elapsing.
At the end of the dead time, the P433 checks to determine whether protective signaling
has received one signal while the above-mentioned times are elapsing. If this is the
case, then the HSR is terminated normally. If protective signaling receives no signal or
more than one signal, the HSR is terminated as if the fault had been cleared during
operative time 2. This means that even with single-pole starting signals or trips reclosing
is preceded by a synchronism check by ASC.
ARC: Mon. PSIG

recv. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes ARC: Switch to
tPmax
303 024
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
ARC: Oper. time 1
running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC: Dead time 3p
running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC: Max.
dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
* Parameter ARC: Mon. PSIG

recv. PSx
set 1 015 082
set 2 024 050
set 3 025 010
set 4 025 070
43Z63AHA_EN
3-217 Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling
While the reclose command time is elapsing, the close command will be terminated by
either a trip or - as another option – the 'Circuit breaker close' signal (setting at
M A I N : R C i n h i b . B y C B c l ), see Fig. 3-218).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-311

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Switch to tPmax

303 024
43Z63ABA_EN
3-218 P433: ARC sequence control
3-312 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.7 ARC Counters in the P433
The following ARC signals are counted:
Number of high-speed reclosures.

Number of time-delayed reclosures.
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
ARC: HSR A-B-C ARC: No. of

303 005
+ HSR A-B-C
[ 004 004 ]
R
ARC: TDR ARC: Number
303 006
+ TDR
[ 004 008 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: exectute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
49Z64ACA_EN
3-219 P433: ARC Counters
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-313

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Auto-Reclosing Control in the P435 (Function Group ARC)
After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about automatic
reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection device.
ARC operating modes

The integral ARC function in the P435 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures. When
the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin with a
high-speed reclosure (HSR). For a single-pole or three-pole trip, different dead times
may be selected. If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by an HSR, then another
attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delayed reclosure (TDR). Multiple
reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set
accordingly.
3-220 Setting the ARC operating mode in the P435
3-314 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the

ARC function
signal inputs.

via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the
auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or
signal inputs have equal status. If only the A R C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the A R C : D i s a b l e E X T parameter has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-315

3 Operation
(continued)
3-221 Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control in the P435
3-316 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:
Protection is activated (on).

ARC is not blocked.
No ARC cycle is running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening and
closing mechanism ready).
The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)
No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.
3-222 ARC readiness in the P435
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-317

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocked
ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
Distance protection detects a fault in the cable section of the transmission section.
A manual close is carried out.
A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but no ARC is to be
carried out.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
A ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling trip occurs, but no auto-reclosing is
to occur.
A manual open command is issued.
A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault protective signaling.
A trip signal is issued by ground fault tripping.
The binary signal input configured to A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is triggered.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is started, and
when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
3-318 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-223 ARC blocking in the P435
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-319

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC tripping times

If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC function
are initiated by the general starting condition. These tripping times replace distance
protection timer stage t1,ze of or backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) timer
stages if the HSR operating mode has been set to 1-/3-pole or 3-pole. If the 1-pole
operating mode has been set, a single-pole trip is issued once the HSR tripping time has
elapsed, or a multi-pole trip is issued after distance protection stage t1 has elapsed or
after the BUOC timer stages have elapsed.
3-224 ARC tripping times in the P435
3-320 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting the ARC cycle

When the ARC function is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following
functions:
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of a parallel
protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been configured
accordingly.
A distance protection trip (possible without general starting, such as through the
protective signaling direct transfer trip underreaching mode).
A backup overcurrent-time protection trip (BUOC trip), provided that the ARC is to be
activated by the BUOC function.
The trip signal of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, provided that the
ARC is to be activated by ground fault protection signaling.
The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the parameters of this
device have been set accordingly (A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x ).
A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-321

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) in the P435
When the ARC cycle starts, operative times 1 and 2 are started. The starting conditions
for the ARC cycle must drop out while the operative times are elapsing. This means that
the circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead time is started. If both operative
times are set at ≤ 25 ms, then ARC will not be ready in the event of starting; in the event
of a trip, the reclaim time is started. After starting drops out without a subsequent trip,
ARC is immediately ready again. Operative time 1 has priority over operative time 2.
Selection of the HSR operating mode determines which dead time is started.
The following settings are possible:
HSR operating modes

1-pole
1-/3-pole
3-pole
3-225 Setting the HSR operating mode in the P435
3-322 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1-pole
The HSR is executed only if a single-pole trip decision is reached or a single-pole test
HSR is started. A single-pole trip can only occur in impedance zone 1, brought about by
backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) or a parallel protection device. In the event
of a three-pole trip, no HSR is executed, and instead a final trip occurs.
The single-pole dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting

conditions drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a
close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close
command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC.
If the starting conditions for the ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed
but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e m a x
PSx) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The
ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC is not
activated, then the reclaim time is started and a three-pole trip occurs (final trip).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-323

3 Operation
(continued)
3-226 P435: Signal flow for the '1-pole' operating mode
3-324 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1-/3-pole
An HSR is executed both with single-pole and three-pole trips or a corresponding test
HSR. A single-pole trip can only occur in impedance zone 1, brought about by backup
overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) or a parallel protection device.
In the case of a single-pole trip, the single-pole dead time

(A R C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle
drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a close request
is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close command is
issued immediately, without a check by the ASC.
In the case of a three-pole trip, the three-pole dead time

(A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions drop out while
operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to
the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive
decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the
close command is issued.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a close
command is issued immediately
started. This occurs with both single-pole and three-pole trips. When the dead time is
started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether
reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time
and while the dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close
command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC function is not
ready, then the reclaim time is started after the dead time has elapsed, and three-pole
tripping occurs (final trip).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-325

3 Operation
(continued)
3-227 P435: Signal flow with the operating mode ‘1-/3-pole’, tripping during operative time 1
3-326 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-228 P435: Signal flow with the operating mode ‘1-/3-pole’, tripping during operative time 2, and close rejection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-327

3 Operation
(continued)
3-pole
ARC is carried out with both single-pole and three-pole trips. In the event of a single-
pole trip, three-pole transfer tripping occurs.
The three-pole dead time (A R C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting

conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead
time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC). The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive
decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a close
command is issued immediately.
started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC
checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then the reclaim time is
started and the 'final trip' signal is issued.
3-328 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-229 P435: Signal flow for the operating mode '3-pole'
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-329

3 Operation
(continued)
All HSR operating modes

The following applies to all HSR operating modes:
Should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault within the operative times, the reclaim
time will be started and a three-pole trip will occur (final trip). If the operative times
elapse without a trip decision, then the ARC is immediately ready again as soon as the
general starting condition has dropped out.
Test HSR
A single- or three-pole test HSR can be carried out using setting parameters or through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If a single-pole test HSR is triggered in the
3-pole operating mode, then a three-pole trip occurs.
3-330 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-230 P435: Test HSR
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-331

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) in the P435
A TDR may occur after an HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if
the operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is possible only if the setting
for A R C : N o . o f p e r m i t . T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero. The
TDR is always a three-pole process. This means that three-pole transfer tripping will
occur in the event of a single-pole trip.
The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an external
protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim time is elapsing.
Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions for the TDR drop out while
operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead time is started. After the dead time
has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC).
The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is
reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close
command is issued.
If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip occurs after
the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is started.
If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started again.
This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the number of permitted TDRs. If
the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
3-332 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-231 P435: Signal sequence with time-delayed reclosure (TDR)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-333

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) in the P435
Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P435 carries out
appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and that the
line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC before reclosing by HSR
or TDR.
If the setting at M AIN : N e u tr a l - p o i n t tr e a t. P S x is 'Low-impedance grounding',

then both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
either 'Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding' or 'Short-duration grounding', then only the
phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
ARC: Enable RRC

PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: no
ARC: V> RRC
1: yes C PSx
[ * ]
ARC: V> for RRC
triggered
303 014
VA-G* 3
VA-G
VB-G VB-G* 3
VC-G
VC-G* 3
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
* Parameter- ARC: Enable RRC

PSx
ARC: V> RRC
PSx
MAIN: Neutr.pt.
treat. PSx
set 1 015 085 015 087 010 048
set 2 024 044 024 046 001 076
set 3 025 004 025 006 001 077
set 4 025 064 025 066 001 078
49Z64AHA_EN
3-232 P435: Voltage monitoring for RRC
3-334 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the RRC
timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P435checks to
determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were greater than or
equal to the set threshold value (A R C : V > R R C P S x ) during the last 100 ms. If this
was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function
(ASC). The ASC response is a function of whether a single- or three-pole trip command
has been issued.
In the case of a single-pole trip, a close command is immediately issued.
If a three-pole trip has been activated, the ASC checks to determine whether reclosing
can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close enable and then a close command
are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the close
request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even in the case
of a three-pole trip.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not greater or
equal to the set threshold (A R C : V > R R C P S x ), then the ARC cycle is continued by
the HSR or TDR.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-335

3 Operation
(continued)
3-233 P435: Signal sequence for rapid reclosure (RRC)
3-336 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.4 Secondary Fault Treatment in the P435
If a repeat trip occurs in another phase during the dead time, then this is referred to as a
secondary fault and results in three-pole tripping. This is carried out as a three-pole trip.
The response of the ARC to a secondary fault is a function of whether the secondary
fault occurs during a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR) or a
rapid reclosure (RRC).
Secondary fault treatment

during HSR
If a secondary fault occurs during an HSR, then the response is a function of the HSR
operating mode that has been set.
A R C : HSR oper. mode '1-pole'

If a trip starts during the single-pole dead time in a different phase than at the
beginning of the ARC cycle, then tripping is three-pole (final trip) and the reclaim time
is started. Reclosing does not occur.
If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the same phase
as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. The ARC cycle is
terminated only if the starting signal or the trip are still present immediately before the
A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e '1-/ 3 - pole'
If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the same phase
as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. The ARC cycle is
terminated only if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately before the close
command is issued.
If a secondary fault occurs during the single-pole dead time, then operative time 1 is
started. The single-pole dead time continues. If the secondary fault's starting
condition and trip drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing, the P435 checks to
determine whether the single-pole dead time that has already elapsed plus the set
three-pole dead time is shorter than the set single-pole dead time. If this is the case,
a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is terminated as in
the case of a three-pole trip. If the elapsed single-pole dead time plus the set three-
pole dead time is greater than the set single-pole dead time, then final tripping occurs
and the reclaim time is started.
A secondary fault during the course of the three-pole dead time is ignored.
Termination of the ARC cycle only occurs if the starting signal or trip has not yet
dropped out immediately before the close command is issued.
If either a starting or a trip occurs again during the maximum dead time in the same
phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. If a
secondary fault occurs in a different phase, there is a three-pole trip transfer. The
dead time and checking by the ASC function continue. If the ASC decision is that
reclosing is permissible, a close command is issued.
A R C : HSR oper. mode '3-pole'
In this HSR operating mode, a secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is
terminated only if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately before the close
command is issued.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-337

3 Operation
(continued)

during TDR
A secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is terminated only if a starting signal or trip
is still present immediately before the close command is issued.

during RRC
Rapid reclosing is blocked in the event of a secondary fault.
3.30.5 Parallel Blocking in the P435
If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P435, then the trip from this
protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence – provided that the
binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The effect exercised by the trip
of the parallel protection device is a function of whether it intervenes in a high-speed
reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR), or a rapid reclosure (RRC). In addition,
the AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p PSx setting is a determining factor (see Figure 3-236).
Parallel blocking with HSR

The trip of an external protection device may intervene in the HSR functional sequence
depending on the set HSR operating mode and the AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p PSx setting.
A R C : HSR oper. mode PSx '1-pole'

sequence.
While the operative times are elapsing, the P435 checks to determine whether the
external protection device has reached a trip decision in the same phase as the
P435. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle proceeds normally. If the two
protection devices have reached trip decisions in different phases, the reclaim
time is started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip). Reclosing does not
occur.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing, it
is ignored.
As a result of the trip of the external protection device, the ARC cycle is started
and proceeds normally in the event that the P435 does not reach a trip decision or
has reached a trip decision in the same phase. However, if a trip decision has
been reached by the P435 in a different phase from that of the external protection
device, then the reclaim time is started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip).
Reclosing does not occur.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing,
the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
3-338 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
A R C : HSR oper. mode PSx '1-/3-pole'

sequence.
While the operative times are elapsing, the P435 checks to determine whether the
external protection device has reached a trip decision in the same phase as the
P435. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle proceeds as with a single-pole HSR.
If the two protection devices have reached trip decisions in different phases, three-
pole tripping occurs (3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as with a
three-pole HSR.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing, it
is ignored.
and proceeds normally in the event that the P435 does not reach a trip decision or
has reached a trip decision in the same phase. However, if the P435 has reached
a trip decision in a different phase from that of the external protection device, then
three-pole tripping occurs (3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as with a
three-pole HSR.
If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing,
the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
A R C : HSR oper. mode PSx '3-pole'

sequence.
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the HSR functional
sequence.
and proceeds normally.
Parallel blocking for

TDR or RRC
The trip of the external protection device may intervene in the TDR or RRC functional
sequence depending on the setting of the AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p PSx parameter.
sequence.
The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR or RRC
functional sequence.
The trip of the external protection device starts a TDR or RRC. The sequence is the
same as with initiation by the P435.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-339

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.6 Zone Extension in the P435
Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is only
initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.
HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.
Zone extension by kze HSR

Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . H S R P S x 'Yes'

The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while operative times 1
and 2 are elapsing.
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x
'Following HSR'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing if the
close command is issued by a non-synchronism-checked HSR.
'Always'
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing..
How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no zone
extension.
Zone extension by kze TDR

The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor
kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as another TDR
is permitted and the setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . T D R P S x is 'Yes'. Zone
extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the setting is 'No',
there is no zone extension.
3-340 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-234 P435: Zone extension by ARC
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-341

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.7 General ARC Control Functions in the P435
Monitoring the receive

signals of protective
signaling
The user can specify whether there will be intervention in the ARC sequence when a
signal is received by protective signaling. If this is desired, then the ARC cycle is
continued in different ways depending on the number of receive signals that are received
by the P435 while operative time 1 or the single- or three-pole dead times are elapsing.
At the end of the dead time, the P435 checks to determine whether protective signaling
has received one signal while the above-mentioned times are elapsing. If this is the
case, then the HSR is terminated normally. If protective signaling receives no signal or
more than one signal, the HSR is terminated as if the fault had been cleared during
operative time 2. This means that even with single-pole starting signals or trips reclosing
is preceded by a synchronism check by ASC.
ARC: Mon. PSIG

recv. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes ARC: Switch to
tPmax
303 024
PSIG: Receive
[ 006 036 ]
ARC: Oper. time 1
running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC: Dead time 1p
running
[ 037 066 ]
ARC: Dead time 3p
running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC: Max.
dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
* Parameter ARC: Mon. PSIG

recv. PSx
set 1 015 082
set 2 024 050
set 3 025 010
set 4 025 070
45Z63AHA_EN
3-235 Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling
While the reclose command time is elapsing, the reclose command will be terminated by
either a trip or - as another option – the 'Circuit breaker close' signal (setting at
M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l ), see Fig. 3-236).
3-342 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Switch to tPmax

303 024
43Z63ABA_EN
3-236 P435: ARC sequence control
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-343

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30.8 ARC Counters in the P435
The following ARC signals are counted:
Number of single-pole high-speed reclosures, pole-selectively.

Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
Number of time-delayed reclosures.
ARC: HSR A + ARC: No. of HSR A

303 008 [ 004 001 ]
R
ARC: HSR B + ARC: No. of HSR B
303 009 [ 004 002 ]
R
ARC: HSR C + ARC: No. of HSR C
303 010 [ 004 003 ]
R
ARC: No. of HSR
ARC: HSR A-B-C + A-B-C
303 005 [ 004 004 ]
R
ARC: TDR + ARC: Number TDR
303 006 [ 004 008 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
45Z63ACA_EN
3-237 P435: ARC Counters
3-344 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before
a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that
are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is de-
energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages – generally the voltages on
the line and busbar sides – are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and
voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the
system sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side).
The measurement loop must be set in the P43x according to the reference voltage
connection (setting A S C : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct
measurement loop voltage is selected for the comparison. In the connection example
shown in the sub-section entitled 'Conditioning of the Measured Values' (in section 'Main
Functions of the P43x'), the busbar voltage VA-B is the reference voltage.
ASC: Measurement
loop PSx
[ * ]
VA-G
VB-G
VC-G
ASC: Select.
meas.loop PG
305 008
ASC: Volt.
1: Loop A-G sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
2: Loop B-G
3: Loop C-G
4: Loop A-B
5: Loop B-C
6: Loop C-A
ASC: Voltage
Vref Vref
[ 004 087 ]
Parameter ASC: Measurement

loop PSx
set 1 031 060
set 2 077 044
set 3 078 044
set 4 079 044
45Z6382A_EN
3-238 Selecting the measurement loop
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-345

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

ASC function
signal inputs.
The function is enabled generally (independently of the parameter subsets) at

A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via A S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can
be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately configured
binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status.
If only the A S C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the
ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative
edge. If only the A S C : D i s a b l e E X T function has been assigned to a binary signal
input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an uncontrolled activation enable will always be issued.
3-346 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-239 Enabling/disabling the automatic synchronism check function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-347

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC readiness and

blocking
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.
Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.c.b. was tripped, or by an
appropriately configured binary signal input, or by back-up overcurrent protection
(BUOC) protection provided that the latter is not set to activate the ARC function.
The user can specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not
(reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delayed
reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.
The single-pole high speed reclosure is always without a check
3-348 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-240 ASC readiness and blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-349

3 Operation
(continued)
Close request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC from the integrated local control panel or via
an appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ). Close
requests via a setting parameter or a binary signal input are only accepted if no ARC
cycle is running.
3-241 Close request
3-350 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable signal is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsed, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-242 Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-351

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC operating modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting.
The following operating mode settings are possible:
Voltage-checked
Sync.-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked
Continuous synchronism
check
Synchronism checks, e.g. monitoring of voltage and/or synchronism requirements, are
now carried out continuously during the duration of the set ASC operative time.
The following signals are updated according to their current states:
ASC: Close enable
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch
ASC: Close rejection
The maximum operative time setting was extended to 6000 s (100 minutes).
Extended settings for the
close enable conditions
The close enable conditions can now be set separately for auto-reclose control and
manual close command. This makes it possible to select different operating modes as
well as different tolerance ranges.
Close enable conditions for
Auto-reclose control Manual close command
ASC: AR op. mode PSx ASC: MC op. mode PSx
ASC: AR with tCB PSx ASC: MC with tCB PSx
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk. PSx ASC: MC op.mode v-chk. PSx
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx
ASC: AR delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request is
issued by the integrated ARC (for a RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request from an
external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function
ASC: AR close request EXT.
3-352 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Considering the
CB close time
In slightly asynchronous power systems setting ASC : AR w i th tC B PSx = 'Yes' or
A S C : M C w i t h t C B P S x = 'Yes' makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker
close time with the issuing of a close command.
The condition for "slightly asynchronous power systems" is given if the difference in
frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < ∆f < ∆fmax. If this condition and the voltage
condition (∆V < ∆Vmax) are met then the next point in time is continuously calculated at
which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding voltage of the three-phase system are
in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase angles approaches 0°). The close command,
allowing for the set CB close time M A I N : t C B , c l o s e , is then issued sooner.
yes yes
Close with tCB 'f < 10 mHz
no no
synchronous mode, close if: asynchronous mode, synchronous mode, close if:
'V < 'Vmax close if: 'V < 'Vmax
'f < 'fmax 'V < 'Vmax 'M < 'Mmax
'M < 'Mmax 'f < 'fmax for tmin,synchr
for tmin,synchr Raise close command so that within operative time
within operative time closing takes place at 'M = 0
(taking CB close time and
internal delays into account)
within operative time
47Z1085B_EN
3-243 Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-353

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-checked
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked
close enable without affecting the former. This allows closing if at least one side is
voltage-free/de-energized. To detect whether voltage is present or not on either side,
the three phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to
determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values:
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx

ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three phase-to-
ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition
for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating mode
for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met for the duration of the set minimum
time (A S C : t m i n v o l t . c h e c k ) then the close enable signal is issued.
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each
parameter subset:
Vref but not V

V but not Vref
Not V and not Vref
Not V or not Vref
Vref & Z1 but not V
N V&Vref or V&n Vref
The 'Vref & Z1 but not V' operating mode includes a further requirement, which specifies
that the close request is issued during an ARC cycle, and the cause of the fault for the
previous protective trip lies inside the reach of impedance zone 1.
As of version -612, the meaning of “Z1” for the 'Vref & Z1 but not V' operating mode was
enhanced, so that the close request is also enabled if a PSIG based Z1e trip occurs
(because in this case, too, a fault on the line is detected).
3-354 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC: Active
305 003
ASC: AR op. mode

PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-
checked ASC: AR V>
C volt.check PSx
3: Volt.&sync.- [ * ]
checked
VA-G VA-G*√3 &

VB-G VB-G*√3
VC-G VC-G*√3
ASC: AR V<
C volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G*√3 &
VB-G*√3
VC-G*√3
ASC: AR tmin
v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Select. 1 ASC: AR Op.mode
meas.loop PG v-chk.PSx
305 008
[ * ]
2 t 0
&
Vref 1
VA-G*√3 1
&
2
2
1 ... 2 &
3
&
4
&
6
&
&
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref &
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
PSIG: Enable & 6: N V&Vref or V& n Vref
305 157
DIST: Trip signal

Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] &
DIST: Dist.
decis.Z1 stored ASC: Close
303 565 1 enable,volt.ch
ARC: Cycle 100ms [ 037 085 ]
running
[ 037 000 ] ASC: Close enable
1 [ 037 083 ]
ARC: HSR A 100ms
303 008
ARC: HSR B
303 009
Parameter ASC: AR op. mode ASC: AR V> ASC: AR V< ASC: AR op.mode ASC: AR tmin
ARC: HSR C PSx volt.check PSx volt.check PSx v-chk.PSx v-check PSx
303 010
set 1 018 025 026 017 018 017 018 029 018 018
ASC: Close set 2 018 026 077 043 077 040 018 030 077 041
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ] set 3 018 027 078 043 078 040 018 031 078 041
set 4 018 028 079 043 079 040 018 032 079 041
47Z1380D_EN
3-244 Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-355

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC: Active
305 003
ASC: MC op. mode

PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-
checked ASC: MC V>
C volt.check PSx
3: Volt.&sync.- [ * ]
checked
VA-G VA-G*√3 &

VB-G VB-G*√3
VC-G VC-G*√3
ASC: MC V<
C volt.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G*√3 &
VB-G*√3
VC-G*√3
ASC: MC tmin
v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Select. 1 ASC: MC Op.mode
meas.loop PG v-chk.PSx
305 008
[ * ]
2 t 0
&
Vref 1
VA-G*√3 1
&
2
2
1 ... 2 &
3
&
4
&
6
&
&
1: Vref but not V
2: V but not Vref &
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
5: Vref & Z1 but not V
PSIG: Enable &
305 157 6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] &
DIST: Dist.
decis.Z1 stored ASC: Close
303 565 1 enable,volt.ch
ARC: Cycle 100ms [ 037 085 ]
running
[ 037 000 ] ASC: Close enable
1 [ 037 083 ]
ARC: HSR A 100ms
303 008
ARC: HSR B
303 009
Parameter ASC: MC op. mode ASC: MC V> ASC: MC V< ASC: MC op.mode ASC: MC tmin
ARC: HSR C PSx volt.check PSx volt.check PSx v-chk.PSx v-check PSx
303 010
set 1 000 056 000 064 000 068 000 060 000 072
ASC: Close set 2 000 057 000 065 000 069 000 061 000 073
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ] set 3 000 058 000 066 000 070 000 062 000 074
set 4 000 059 000 067 000 071 000 063 000 075
47Z1381E_EN
3-245 Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control
3-356 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronism-checked
Before a close enable signal is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism.
Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value:
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
When with a three-phase voltage the setting for M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t .

is 'Low-imped. grounding' both the phase-to-ground and the phase-to-phase voltages
are checked. If the setting is 'Isol./res.w.start. (or w/o st.)PG' only the phase-to-phase
voltages are checked.
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must
not exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx
The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx
The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value:
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
In these comparisons the set offset angle (A S C : P h i o f f s e t ) is taken into account.
If these conditions are met for the A S C : t m i n s y n c . c h e c k set time, then a close
enable signal is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in
voltage, angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored
as measured synchronism data at the time the close enable signal is issued. In the
event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-357

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. ASC: AR op. mode ASC: Phi offset ASC: AR V>
305 003 treat. PSx PSx PSx sync.check PSx
ASC: AR op. mode set 1 010 048 018 025 018 034 018 011
PSx set 2 001 076 018 026 077 042 077 035
[ * ] set 3 001 077 018 027 078 042 078 035
set 4 001 078 018 028 079 042 079 035
1
* Parameter ASC: AR delta ASC: AR delta ASC: AR delta ASC: AR tmin
2 Vmax PSx f max PSx phi max PSx sync.chk PSx
3 set 1 018 012 018 014 018 013 018 015
set 2 077 036 077 038 077 037 077 039
1: Voltage- set 3 078 036 078 038 078 037 078 039
checked set 4 079 036 079 038 079 037 079 039
2: Sync.-checked
MAIN: Neutr.pt. 3: Volt./sync.-
treat. PSx checked
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
ASC: AR V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G VA-G
VB-G VB-G
VC-G VC-G
ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008
ASC: AR tmin
Vref Vref sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: Volt. magn.

ASC: AR delta diff.
Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. sel. Vmax ASC: Frequ.

meas.loop difference
[ 004 088 ] [ 004 090 ]
ASC: AR delta ASC: Angle

f max PSx difference
[ * ] [ 004 089 ]
ASC: AR delta
ASC: Phi offset phi max PSx
PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
corr
47Z1112A_EN
3-246 Synchronism-checked close enable for auto-reclose control
3-358 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active * Parameter MAIN: Neutr.pt. ASC: MC op. mode ASC: Phi offset ASC: MC V>
305 003 treat. PSx PS PSx sync.check PSx
ASC: MC op. mode set 1 010 048 000 056 018 034 000 052
PSx set 2 001 076 000 057 077 042 000 053
[ * ] set 3 001 077 000 058 078 042 000 054
set 4 001 078 000 059 079 042 000 055
1
* Parameter ASC: MC delta ASC: MC delta ASC: MC delta ASC: MC tmin
2 Vmax PSx f max PSx phi max PSx sync.chk PSx
3 set 1 000 080 000 084 000 089 000 098
set 2 000 081 000 086 000 091 000 099
1: Voltage- set 3 000 082 000 087 000 092 000 100
checked set 4 000 083 000 088 000 093 000 101
2: Sync.-checked
MAIN: Neutr.pt. 3: Volt./sync.-
treat. PSx checked
[ * ]
1: Low-imped.
grounding
ASC: MC V>
sync.check PSx
[ * ]
VA-G VA-G
VB-G VB-G
VC-G VC-G
ASC: Select
meas.loop PG
305 008
ASC: MC tmin
Vref Vref sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
ASC: Close
enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: Volt. magn.

ASC: MC delta diff.
Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ]
ASC: Volt. sel. Vmax ASC: Frequ.

meas.loop difference
[ 004 088 ] [ 004 090 ]
ASC: MC delta ASC: Angle

f max PSx difference
[ * ] [ 004 089 ]
ASC: MC delta
ASC: Phi offset phi max PSx
PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
corr
47Z1113A_EN
3-247 Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close control
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-359

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage/synchronism-
checked
If this setting has been selected, then the close enable signal is issued if the conditions
for voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-248 ASC sequence control
Testing the ASC function

For test purposes a close request can be issued via setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Figure 3-241). The sequence is similar
to the close request from the integrated local control panel but there is no close
command and it is not counted.
3-360 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Integrating the ASC

function into the control
and monitoring of
switchgear units
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible.
This requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that the ASC
system integration is set to 'Autom. synchr. control'. If the control function issues a close
request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires the A S C : C l o s e
e n a b l e (see 'Issue of switching commands' in section 'Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units').
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC: CB
assignment PSx
[ * ]
No assignment
DEV01
DEV02
DEV03 ASC: AC effect.
for DEV01
305 040
Sel. DEV01
ASC: Close
enable DEV01 AC
305 041
ASC: Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC: System
integrat. PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Autom.synchron.check
2: Autom.synchr.control
Parameter ASC: CB ASC: System

assignment PSx integrat. PSx
set 1 037 131 037 135
set 2 037 132 037 136
set 3 037 133 037 137
set 4 037 134 037 138
45Z63BGA_EN
3-249 Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-361

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values obtained

by ASC
The following measured values are transmitted during a set cycle time:
Voltage from the reference voltage channel

Voltage from the selected measuring loop
Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
Difference in phase angles
Difference in frequencies
ASC: Transm.
cycle,meas.v.
[ 101 212 ]
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ] C
ASC: Voltage Vref

[ 004 087 ]
ASC: Volt. sel.

meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC: Volt. magn.

diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC: Angle
difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC: Frequ.
difference
[ 004 090 ]
49Z64BEA_EN
3-250 Measured values obtained by ASC
3-362 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
Number of reclosures after a close request via setting parameters or an appropriately

configured binary signal input
Number of close requests
Number of close rejections
The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed)
or as a group.
ASC: Manual ASC: No. RC aft.

close request >S 1 1 & + man.clos
305 000 [ 004 009 ]
>R 1 R
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: Gen. close ASC: No. close
request + requests
306 012 [ 009 033 ]
R
ASC: Close ASC: No. close
rejection + rejections
[ 037 086 ] [ 009 034 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0: don’t execute
1: execute
47Z1377A_EN
3-251 ASC counters
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-363

3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Ground fault (short-circuit) protection (Function Group GFSC)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is only available with the P435.
In the event of single-phase high-resistance faults, the measured fault data are often
insufficient for fault detection and selective clearing by the distance protection function.
To cover for this situation, ‘ground fault (short-circuit) protection’ is integrated into the
protection device as a highly sensitive backup protection function. Consequently,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection is operating in parallel with and independently of
distance protection.
ground fault (short-circuit)
protection
signal inputs.

via GFSC: G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset at G F S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection (GFSC) can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and
configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the G F S C : E n a b l e E X T
function is assigned to a binary signal input, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection
(GFSC) is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative
edge. If only the GFSC: D i s a b l e EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input,
then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-364 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GFSC: General
enable USER
[ 018 060 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
0 GFSC: Enabled
[ 038 094 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Ux1
Ux2
Ux3
Uxx
Address 039 095

Address 039 096
GFSC: Ext.
enabled
[ 039 097 ]
GFSC: Enable
EXT
[ 039 095 ]
GFSC: Enable
USER
[ 003 138 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC: Disable
EXT
[ 039 096 ]
GFSC: Disable
USER
[ 003 137 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute GFSC: Ready
[ 039 093 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
MAIN: M.c.b. trip
V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
GFSC: Blocking
EXT
[ 043 068 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. GFSC: Not ready
trip VNG EXT [ 039 094 ]
[ 002 183 ]
300ms 0 SFMON: M.c.b.

trip VNG
[ 098 132 ]
* Parameter GFSC: Enable
PSx
set 1 018 072
set 2 018 073
set 3 018 074
set 4 018 075
45Z6315A_EN
3-252 Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-365

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values from the

protection
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection takes measurements of the same phase-to-ground
voltages measured by distance protection. From these voltages the P435 calculates the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG. The residual current IN is drawn from a separate
transformer in the P435 that is looped into the phase current transformer neutral or
connected to a Holmgreen group. The connection example shown in section
'Conditioning of the Measured Values' shows the transformer looped into the current
transformer neutral.
Starting
The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured.
They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds (G F SC : IN > and
G F SC : VN G > ). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a settable timer stage
(G F S C : S t a r t . o p e r . d e l a y ) is started. Once the trigger has dropped out,
the starting persists until the settable release delay ( G F SC : Sta r t. r e l e a s . d e l a y)
has elapsed. Directional measurement is enabled if the current reaches 70 % of the set
threshold (G F SC : IN > ) and the voltage exceeds the trigger threshold
(G F SC : VN G > ).
3-366 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-253 Starting
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-367

3 Operation
(continued)
Directional tripping
The P435 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutral-
displacement voltage for the direction determination. The measured angle is displayed.
The position of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions is
determined by setting G F SC : An g l e ϕ G . A forward or backward (reverse)-directional
decision results if the following angle conditions are met:
Forward direction: (90° + ϕG ) ≤ ϕ < (270° + ϕG )

Backward (reverse) direction: (90° + ϕG ) ≥ ϕ > (270° + ϕG )
where:
ϕ: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point

displacement voltage
ϕG: Setting for G F SC : An g l e ϕ G
The directional decisions (G F SC : F a u l t fo r w a r d /L S and G F SC : F a u l t

b a c k w a r d /BS) are followed by timer stages G F SC : t1 ( fo r w a r d ) and G F SC : t2
( b a c k w a r d ) . Once the timer stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
V C-G
Forward
direction
+
90o
phiG
phi(IG)
V G-N = -V N-G V A-G
IG
Backward (reverse)
direction
V B-G
47Z1090A_EN
3-254 Directional characteristic Angle phiG corresponds to the setting G F S C : A n g l e p h i G
3-368 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-dependent or
current-dependent tripping
By setting operating mode tS, the user can choose between voltage-dependent or
current-dependent tripping. After the voltage-dependent or current-dependent time has
elapsed, a trip signal is issued either independently of the directional decision or when
there is a directional decision for the forward direction – depending on the setting at
GFSC: Criteria tS active.
Voltage-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the voltage-
dependent tripping time. Tripping time tS is calculated as follows.
2s
tS =
V N −G
10 ⋅ − 0.2
Vnom
0.6364 ⋅ 1.1⋅
3
s Time-Voltage Characteristic (for Vnom = 100 V)

45
40
35
30
Tripping time tS
25
20
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 V
Voltage ⏐VN-G⏐
47Z0129A
3-255 Voltage-time characteristic
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-369

3 Operation
(continued)
3-256 Forming the voltage-dependent trip signal
Current-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the current-
dependent tripping time. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see
table below). If the current exceeds 1.05 times the set reference current, calculation of
the tripping time begins. A trip signal is issued as a function of the set characteristic.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-257 to 3-260.
3-370 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping Formula for the Constants

. Characteristic Tripping
Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c
0 Definite Time t=k

Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜I ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜ a ⎟
t = k ⋅⎜ + c⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞ b
⎟
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜ a ⎟
t = k ⋅⎜ + c ⎟
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟
⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1 ⎟
⎜ I ⎟ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
⎝ ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln ⎟
⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-371

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
0.01 0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K1A D5Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.1
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K3A D5Z50K4A
3-257 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
3-372 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse

Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0,1 k=0,1 0.1

k=0.1
0,01 0.01 k=0.01

k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K5B D5Z50K6B
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7
3-258 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-373

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01 0.01 k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K8B D5Z50K9B
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
3-259 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
3-374 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.01
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50KBA D5Z50KCA
3-260 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-375

3 Operation
(continued)
3-261 Forming the current-dependent trip signal
3-376 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection starts settable timer stage t3. Once t3
and tS have elapsed, a trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
3-262 Forming the trip signal
Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains present until the starting drops off – even if the direction
decision changes or is reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-377

3 Operation
(continued)
Counters
The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The
counter can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
GFSC: Trip signal GFSC: No. of trip

[ 039 092 ] + signals
[ 009 054 ]
MAIN: General R
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
47Z13AHA_EN
3-263 Counting the trip signals
Monitoring the measured

values
If only one of the two triggers has responded (IN> or VNG>), and if at least one of the
phase-to-ground voltages exceeds 0.7 Vnom/√3, a signal will be issued after 10 s.
3-264 Monitoring the measured values
3-378 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling (Function Group GSCSG)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is featured only by the P435.
In order to make selective instantaneous tripping possible ground fault (short-circuit)

protection includes the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function. Ground
fault (short-circuit) protection signaling operates in parallel with and independently of the
protective signaling function of distance protection. Only when a common
communication channel is used is it necessary to block the protective signaling echo.
Furthermore, measures for blocking the weak-indeed logic of distance protection
protective signaling are implemented in the Signal comp. release operating mode.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is coordinated with distance protection
protective signaling through appropriate time delays.
An external signal transmission device is required for operation of ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-379

3 Operation
(continued)
protection signaling
signal inputs.

via G S C S G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via G S C S G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and
configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the G SC SG : E n a b l e E X T
function is assigned to a binary signal input, then protective signaling is enabled by a
positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the
GSCSG: D i s a b l e EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at
this input will have no effect.
3-380 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-265 Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-381

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of ground fault

(short-circuit) protection
signaling
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready if the following conditions are
satisfied:
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled.

Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is ready.
There is no external blocking.
No fault has been detected in the communication channel.
Distance protection has not reached a trip decision.
The single-pole dead time of the ARC function is not running.
External blocking is carried out either via a binary signal input configured for
G SC SG : Bl o c k i n g EXT or via a binary signal input configured for
PSIG : Bl o c k i n g EXT , depending on the operating mode setting for the
communication channel.
The fault signal from the external signal transmission device can be either connected to
a binary signal input, configured for G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty EXT or to a binary
signal input, configured for PSIG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty EXT depending on the
operating mode setting for the communication channel.
Communication link
faulty signal
As of version P435 -604, the G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty status signal was made
available in conjunction with the implementation of the protective interface.
This signal is set by the G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty EXT logic binary input function
as well as by C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s f a u l t if the
C O M M 3 : Si g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t parameter has been set accordingly.
3-382 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-266 Readiness of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
Tripping time
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready, then the tripping timer is
started by ground fault (short-circuit) protection starting.
3-267 Tripping time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-383

3 Operation
(continued)
Failure of frequency transmission can be signaled to the P435 via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Which inputs are activated is determined by the channel
operating mode setting at G SC SG : C h a n n e l m o d e . If ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling uses a different communication channel than protective signaling,
then the following occurs, as long as frequency monitoring has been enabled: when the
binary signal input configured for G SC SG : F r e q u . m o n . t r i g d . E X T is triggered, the
P435 allows an operate delay of approximately 20 ms to elapse and then generates a
receive signal for 150 ms.
3-268 Frequency monitoring
3-384 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking
In the event of a directional change of ground fault (short-circuit) protection from
backward (reverse) to forward, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will
generate a blocking signal for the time period set at G S C S G : t B l o c k .
3-269 Transient blocking
Operating modes of
protection signaling and
the communication channel
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be operated in two different modes:
Signal comparison release or Signal comparison blocking. For the communication
channel, the user can specify whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will
use a different communication channel than distance protection protective signaling or
whether the same channel will be used. If the same communication channel is being
used, then the operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling must be identical. Otherwise there will be a fault signal (see
section 'Protective Signaling').
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-385

3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison release

scheme
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the forward direction, a signal is
sent to the remote station once the tripping time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling has elapsed. In the event of a directional change from backward (reverse) to
forward, the send signal is blocked for the duration of transient blocking.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:
There is a receive signal.

The ground fault (short-circuit) protection function of the remote station has detected
a fault in the forward direction.
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function in the
remote station has elapsed.
There is no transient blocking in the remote station.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling and distance protection protective

signaling use a common communication channel, then blocking of the weak indeed logic
of distance protection protective signaling will be implemented if the following conditions
are satisfied:
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has
elapsed.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the backward (reverse)
direction.
3-386 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Operating
mode
[ 023 079 ]
&
1
2
1: Signal comp.
release
2: Signal comp.
block.
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent
channel GSCSG: Release
2: Common channel time send
[ 023 076 ]
0 t GSCSG: Send
& & signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC: Fault &
GSCSG: Send
forward / LS internal signal
[ 039 090 ] 304 002
GSCSG: Tripping
time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG: Transient
blocking GSCSG: Trip
304 001 & signal
[ 043 060 ]
& >1
-
GSCSG: Receive
EXT &
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG: Receive
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
&
GSCSG: Bl.
PSIG weak infeed
304 003
GFSC: Fault
backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
6 150 47Z0138A_EN
3-270 GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the 'Signal comp. release' (permissive) operating mode and blocking of the weak indeed logic of
distance protection protective signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-387

3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison
blocking scheme
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction,
a signal is sent to the remote station. In the event of a directional change from backward
(reverse) to forward, the send signal is extended for the set duration of transient
blocking. Depending on the setting at G SC SG : Bl o c k . s i g . n o n d i r . , a send signal
is already generated if directional measurement of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
has been enabled and ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not made a forward
decision.
The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:
There is no receive signal.

The ground fault (short-circuit) protection function of the remote station has detected
a fault in the forward direction.
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function in the
remote station has elapsed.
There is no transient blocking in the remote station.
3-388 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Operating
mode
[ 023 079 ]
1
&
2
1: Signal comp.
release
2: Signal comp.
block.
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent
channel GSCSG: Release
2: Common channel time send
[ 023 076 ]
GFSC: Fault 0 t GSCSG: Send

>1 & &
backward / BS - signal
[ 039 091 ] [ 043 059 ]
GSCSG: Transient GSCSG: Send
blocking & internal signal
304 001 304 002
GSCSG: Block.
sig. nondir.
[ 023 089 ]
0
1 &
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC: Direct.
determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC: Fault
forward / LS &
GSCSG: Trip
[ 039 090 ] signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG: Tripping
time elaps. & >1
[ 043 063 ] -
GSCSG: Receive
EXT &
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG: Receive
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
7 160 47Z0139A_EN
3-271 GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the operating mode 'Signal comp. block.''
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-389

3 Operation
(continued)
Weak-infeed logic
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling has a 'weak-infeed logic' function that
makes tripping possible if ground fault (short-circuit) protection does not start. The user
has the option to choose whether in this case the trip signal will be issued by ground
fault (short-circuit) protection signaling when there is a directional decision by ground
fault (short-circuit) protection in the forward direction or when the G F SC : VN G >
trigger value is exceeded.
3-272 Weak-infeed logic
3-390 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip mode
Depending on the G SC SG : T r i p m o d e setting, ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling can trigger a single-pole or three-pole trip that can activate the ARC function.
If the trip mode setting is 1/3-pole trip w. HSR, then when there is single-pole starting of
the distance protection function there will be a trip in the phase in which the starting
condition is present. When there is multi-pole starting of the distance protection function,
ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will reach a three-pole trip decision. If one
of the other two operating modes has been set, then ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling always generates a three-pole trip. If the operating mode is 3p-pole
trip w/o. HSR, then the ARC will be blocked by a trip generated by ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling.
3-273 Operating mode trip
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-391

3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function
When a signal is received, an echo pulse can be formed – depending on the setting –
if ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not detected a fault in the backward direction.
The receive signal must be present for a period longer than the set operate delay in
order for the echo pulse to be activated. If the circuit breaker is in the open position,
then the operate delay is not active. The echo pulse is transmitted to the remote station
for the set pulse duration. When the echo pulse is activated, a set blocking time is also
started, during the course of which a new echo pulse is prevented. This prevents a
permanent signal from being transmitted.
GSCSG: Echo
on receive
[ 023 080 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG: Channel
mode
[ 023 078 ]
1
2
1: Independent
channel GSCSG: Operate GSCSG: Pulse
delay echo duration echo
2: Common channel [ 023 081 ] [ 023 082 ]
GSCSG: Send
signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC: IN> GSCSG: Send
triggered S1 1 internal signal
304 002
[ 039 088 ]
R1
GSCSG: Receive
EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG: Receive
305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.
triggered
304 000
GFSC: Fault
backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
MAIN: CB closed
3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
GSCSG: tBlock
echo
[ 023 083 ]
45Z6310A_EN
3-274 Echo function
3-392 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication

channel
through a binary signal input or from the local control panel. It is extended by the reset
time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the transmission
link is in order.
3-275 Testing the communication channel
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-393

3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)
A four-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be enabled

concurrently with distance protection. Three separate measuring systems are available
for this purpose:
Maximum phase current

Negative-sequence current
Residual current
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the first stage of DTOC protection is
blocked.
Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-276 Disabling or enabling DTOC protection
3-394 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the maximum

phase current
The three phase currents are monitored to determine whether they exceed the set
thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The elapsing
of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
MAIN: Inrush &
stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN: Protection
active & DTOC: tI>
306 001 c PSx
DTOC: I> [ * ]
DTOC: Enabled c PSx
[ * ]
[ 040 120 ]
t 0 DTOC: tI> elapsed
IA >
-1
IB [ 040 010 ]
IC DTOC: Starting I>

[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>> EXT DTOC: tI>>
[ 041 061 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>EXT DTOC: tI>>>
[ 041 062 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 040 012 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>>>> EXT DTOC: tI>>>>
[ 041 100 ] c PSx
DTOC: I>>>> [ * ]
c PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DTOC: tI>>>>
>1
- elapsed
[ 035 032 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>>>
[ 035 023 ]
* Parameter DTOC: I> DTOC: I>> DTOC: I>>> DTOC: I>>>>

PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 072 007 072 008 072 009 072 010
set 2 073 007 073 008 073 009 073 010
set 3 074 007 074 008 074 009 074 010
set 4 075 007 075 008 075 009 075 010
* Parameter DTOC: tI> DTOC: tI>> DTOC: tI>>> DTOC: tI>>>>

PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 072 019 072 020 072 021 072 022
set 2 073 019 073 020 073 021 073 022
set 3 074 019 074 020 074 021 074 022
set 4 075 019 075 020 075 021 075 022
47Z11ALA_EN
D5Z52ALA_EN
3-277 Monitoring the phase currents
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-395

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the negative-

sequence system
From the three phase currents, the P43x calculates the negative-sequence current
based on one of the following equations, depending on the setting at M AIN : R o ta r y
field:
For clockwise rotary field direction (ABC): For anti-clockwise rotary field direction (ACB):
Phase sequence A-B-C) Phase sequence A-C-B)
Ineg =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) Ineg =
1
⋅ (I + a ⋅ IB + a² ⋅ IC )
3 A
a = e j120°
2
a = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set

thresholds. After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate
delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-396 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-278 Monitoring the negative-sequence current
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-397

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the
residual current
Depending on the setting, the P43x monitors the residual current, derived from the three
phase currents or measured at the current transformer T4.
3-279 Selecting the measured value
The residual current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds.
After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate delays may
be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-398 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-280 Monitoring the residual current
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-399

3 Operation
(continued)
Direction-dependent trip of
the residual current stages
The P43x determines the angle between the residual current and the neutral-
displacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction determination is
enabled when a current stage is started and the neutral-displacement voltage exceeds
the set threshold DTOC: V N G > P S x . The measured angle is displayed. The position
of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions is determined
by setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G . A forward or backward (reverse)-directional
decision results if the following angle conditions are met:
Forward direction: (90° + ϕG ) ≥ ϕ > (270° + ϕG )

Backward (reverse) direction: (90° + ϕG ) ≤ ϕ < (270° + ϕG )
where:
ϕ: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point

displacement voltage
ϕG: Setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G
V C-G
Forward
direction
+
90o
phiG
phi(IG)
V G-N = -V N-G V A-G
IG
Backward (reverse)
direction
V B-G
47Z1090A_EN
3-281 Directional characteristic of definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC). Angle phiG corresponds to setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G
(004 092).
3-400 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-282 Direction measurement of definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual current stage
is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-401

3 Operation
(continued)
3-283 Trip signals of the DTOC residual current stages
3-402 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Hold-time logic for

intermittent ground faults
A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in the P43x.
As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time is reset.
At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN> starting commences.
As the IN> starting ends, timer stage D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is started
and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened by the set value of
the timer stage.
The accumulation result is compared to the settable limit value at
DTOC: tIN>, interm. PSx.
When the limit value is reached and the general starting signal is present, then a trip
signal is issued, D T O C : T r i p s i g . T I N > , i n t m . , which can be configured to the
trip commands 1 and 2.
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
(Address 021 001)
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
(Address 021 002)
If the limit value is reached while timer stage D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x
is running, then a trip will occur when the next general starting phase commences.
Each time the IN> trigger stage is reset, the set hold-time
(D T O C : H o l d - t . t I N > , i n t m P S x ) is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed
or after the hold-time logic has issued a trip
(D T O C : T r i p s i g . t I N > , i n t m .), accumulation is stopped and the accumulation
buffer is cleared.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-403

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Puls.prol.
IN>,intPSx
[ * ]
DTOC: tIN,interm.
PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: Hold-t.
tIN>,intmPSx
[ * ]
DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
DTOC: Starting [ 039 073 ]
IN>
[ 035 028 ] Hold-time logic
DTOC: t2 N
305 454
DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
MAIN: General DTOC: tIN>,interm.
starting elapsed
[ 036 000 ] [ 040 099 ]
Parameter DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.

IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
set 1 017 055 017 056 017 057
set 2 073 042 073 038 073 039
set 3 074 042 074 038 074 039
set 4 075 042 075 038 075 039
49Z6449 A_EN
3-284 Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics
3-404 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC: t2 N
305 454
DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.

IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
Setting = 80ms Setting = 15ms Setting = 300ms
49Z6450 A_EN
3-285 Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-405

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Starting
IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC: Pulse
prolong. Runn.
DTOC: H.-time
tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC: t2 N
DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>, intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Startings not illustrated have

occured here
49Z6451 A_EN
3-286 Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value
3-406 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)
The single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function operates with three

separate measuring systems:

Negative-sequence current
Residual current
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the IDMT function is blocked.
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Moreover,
IDMT: General
Enable USER
IDMT: Enable
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT: Enable
SGx
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter IDMT: Enable

SGx
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
45Z5048A_EN
3-287 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-407

3 Operation
(continued)
Time-dependent
characteristics
All three measuring systems operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The IDMT protection function can be operated in a directional or a non-
directional mode. The user may use either the directional decision from the distance
measuring system or the directional decision formed from negative-sequence current
and voltage. The measured value is the maximum phase current, the negative-
sequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The P43x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this equation. The result depends on the rotary field direction setting for
phase rotation.

Clockwise rotating field): Anti-clockwise rotating field):
1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a 2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
) 1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j 240°
Depending on the setting, the residual current to be monitored is either derived by the
P43x from the three phase currents or measured at current transformer T 4.
The protection function is triggered if 1.5 x the reference current is exceeded and the set
directional condition is satisfied. A trip signal is issued as a function of the characteristic
curve, although this trip signal can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in
figures 3-289 to 3-292.
3-408 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-288 Forming the measured values
Measured value for the

residual current measuring
system
The user can select by setting ID M T : Eva l u a ti o n IN PSx whether the value for the
residual current is derived from the three phase current values or if it is measured by the
fourth CT.
Reference quantity for the

system
There is a new reference quantity available for the measured residual current:
ID M T : Ir e f,N ( m e a s .) PSx, its setting range has been extended to small values.
With the former setting range the reference quantity available for the calculated residual
current value is I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c .) P S x .
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-409

3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

. Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
k = 0.01 ⋅ to ⋅10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k

Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ ref
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ −1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0,14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜⎛ I ⎞
ref
⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ −1 ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85

6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c ⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln
⎝ I ref
3-410 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
0.01 0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K1A D5Z50K2A
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.1
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K3A D5Z50K4A
3-289 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-411

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse

Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0,1 k=0,1 0.1

k=0.1
0,01 0.01 k=0.01

k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K5B D5Z50K6B
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
3-290 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
3-412 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01 0.01 k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K8B D5Z50K9B
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
3-291 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-413

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.01
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50KBA D5Z50KCA
3-292 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
3-414 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Minimum operate value for

the current in the residual
current measuring system
As of version P43x -611, a minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for the
current in the residual current measuring system. The I D M T : F a c t o r K I , N P S x
set factor is multiplied by the reference quantity Iref,N in order to form the minimum
operate value for the residual current measuring system. The timer stage is triggered
only when the residual current exceeds this threshold.
Minimum trip time for the

system
As of version P43x -611, a minimum trip time (I D M T : M i n . t r i p t i m e N P S x ) may
be defined for the current in the residual current measuring system. This timer stage is
started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed,
the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.
KI,N * Iref,N
t/s 10
t/s
IDMT: Min. trip time N
1
1 10 I/Iref 100
IN/Iref,N
47Z1003B_EN
3-293 Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-415

3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT: Iref,y PSx

[ * ]
blocked
(calc.) IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx = calculated

IDMT: Iref,N
(calc.) PSx
47Z1000A_EN
3-294 Trip signal for I D M T : E v a l u a t i o n I N P S x when set to 'Calculated'

Parameter I D M T : I r e f , N ( m e a s . ) P S x (001 169 / 001 170 / 001 171 / 001 172) is used instead of I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c . ) P S x if
the setting is 'Measured' instead of 'Calculated'.
The 'Measured' parameter allows lower setting values.
3-416 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the trip signal

With ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic, the trip
signal resets as soon as the internal memory value has been reduced to 97% of the
tripping value. (With version -601 the trip signal was present until the internal memory
value was reduced to 0% of the tripping value.)
Current IFault ILoad IFault ILoad

Iref
(rms value)
Internally 100 %
97 %
cumulated
relative trip
time 0%
tTrip= f(IFault/Iref) tReset = f(ILoad/Iref)
Trip signal
t
47Z1002A_EN
3-295 Reset behavior of the IDMT trip signal when the ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic is selected
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-417

3 Operation
(continued)
Directional measurement
The IDMT protection function determines the fault direction from the negative-sequence
voltage and current. The negative-sequence voltage and current are calculated by the
P43x based on the following equations, depending on the phase sequence setting:
Phase sequence A-B-C:

(alternative terminology:
Clockwise rotating field):
V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B − G + a ⋅ V C −G )
I neg =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
(alternative terminology:
Anti-clockwise rotating field):
V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B − G + a ⋅ V C −G )
Ineg =
1
(
⋅ I + a ⋅ IB + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
)
a = e j120°
2
a = e j240°
The voltage used for directional measurement is corrected for the voltage drop at the
fault impedance. The set impedance of the phase-to-ground loops of zone 1 of the
polygon characteristic is used for correction. For directional measurement to be
enabled, the corrected negative-sequence voltage needs to exceed a minimum
threshold of 0.05 Vnom/√3, and the negative-sequence current needs to exceed a
threshold of 0.03 Inom + 0.02 Imax. The device’s decision is 'Forward direction' if the angle
lies in the range of −105° ≤ ϕ ≤ 0° .
Improved directional
measurement
for series compensated
line applications
For the IDMT function there is an improved directional measurement for compensated
line applications available.
The following settable parameter is used to correct the measuring voltage for IDMT:
IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx
3-418 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
VBG
Backward direction
-Vneg,corr (VAG)
-1050
Ineg
Forward direction
VCG
47Z1001A_EN
3-296 Directional characteristic

(includes example values for fault in A-N with voltage VAN completely short-circuited)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-419

3 Operation
(continued)
3-297 Directional measurement
Directional setting
Each IDMT measuring system may be operated in directional or non-directional mode.
In directional mode, the directional decision that is used is either the one reached by
distance protection or the one formed by the IDMT function from the negative-sequence
current and voltage – depending on the setting. If the measuring voltage is faulty, the
measuring systems operate in non-directional mode or they are blocked - depending on
the setting.
3-420 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-298 Directional setting and directional decision
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-421

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values

(Function Group GFDSS)
Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage

and the residual current using the steady-state power evaluation mode. Also possible as
an alternative is a steady-state current evaluation only. In this case only the filtered
residual current is used as a criterion for a ground fault. Ground fault direction
determination is then not possible.
Enable/disable the ground

fault direction
determination using
steady-state values
The ground fault direction determination using steady-state values can be disabled or
enabled using setting parameters. Switching the mode from steady-state power
evaluation to steady-state current evaluation is made by setting parameters or an
Ground fault direction

determination using
steady-state values is
ready
A ready signal is issued for the evaluation mode selected if the protection and the
ground fault direction determination using steady-state values are enabled.
3-422 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: no
1: yes
GFDSS: General
enable USER
[ 016 060 ]
GFDSS: Enabled
& [ 042 096 ]
0
1
0: no
1: yes
&
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
GFDSS: Operating
mode
[ 016 090 ]
1
2
3
1: Steady-state power
2: Steady-state current
3: Steady-state admitt.
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
& ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.) GFDSS: GF (pow.)
eval. EXT not ready
[ 038 020 ] [ 038 027 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
& ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
evaluat.
[ 039 071 ]
GFDSS: Admit-
& tance ready
[ 038 167 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Enable GFDSS: Admit-

PSx tance not ready
[ 038 168 ]
set 1 001 050
set 2 001 051
set 3 001 052
set 4 001 053
12Z6243 A_EN
3-299 Enabling/disabling ground fault direction determination using steady-state values
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-423

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning and selecting

the measured values
For the conditioning of measured values the P43x is fitted with integrated transformers.
As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement voltage calculated
by the P43x from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage
measured at the T 90 transformer for steady-state power evaluation. The current
transformer has been especially designed for this application so that it will perform with a
very small phase-angle error.
EWATT: Eval-
uation VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 GFDSS: VN-G
304 150
VC-G
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter EWATT: Eval-

uation VNG PSx
set 1 016 083
set 2 001 011
set 3 001 012
set 4 001 013
12Z6241 A_EN
3-300 Selecting the measured voltage value
3-424 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation
Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values requires the neutral-point
displacement voltage and the residual current values to be able to determine a ground
fault direction. The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values
by using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation if the time stage
G F D S S : t V N G > has been set to a time delay equal to or greater than 60 ms. This
will result in the suppression of typical ripple-control frequencies in addition to all integer-
frequency harmonics. If the time stage was set to a time delay less than 60 ms only one
period will be used for filtering.
The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at G F D S S : t V N G > and which
was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Depending on the selected operating mode (e.g.
'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the direction. Connection of the
measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at G F D S S : M e a s .
d i r e c t i o n P S x . With the standard connection, a decision for ‘LS’ is reached in the
case of a ground fault on the line side and ‘BS’ in the case of a ground fault on the
busbar side.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-425

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: GF (pow.) GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

ready C PSx PSx
[ 038 026 ] [ * ] [ * ]
DIST: General
starting
[ 036 240 ] t 0
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151
GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P.meas.) PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: VNG GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1
2 2
1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard

2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite
1: cos phi circuit
2: sin phi circuit
C C
GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
GFDSS: P
304 155
GFDSS: Q
304 156
Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P.meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 004
49Z64BKA_EN
3-301 Direction determination with the 'Steady-state power' operating mode
3-426 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
cos phi circuit

The directional decision is not enabled until the active component of the residual current
exceeds the set threshold and the phase displacement between residual current and
neutral-point displacement voltage is smaller than the set sector angle. The sector angle
makes it possible to extend the "dead zone" to take into account the expected phase-
angle errors of the measured values. These settings make it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-302.
Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.
3-302 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, 'cos phi circuit' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-427

3 Operation
(continued)
sin phi circuit

The direction decision is enabled if the reactive component of the residual current has
exceeded the set threshold operate value. This setting makes it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-303.
3-303 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, 'sin phi circuit' operating mode
3-428 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx GFDSS: IN,act>/
[ * ] C reac> LS PSx
1, 3, 4 [ * ]
1: cos phi circuit
2, 3, 4
2: sin phi circuit
GFDSS: P
304 155
IN,act 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG GFDSS: IN,act>/
filtered C reac> BS PSx
304 152 [ * ]
GFDSS: Q
304 156
IN,reac 2, 4
GFDSS: Curr.
4 IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ]
3
GFDSS: Current
1 ... 2 IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ]
GFDSS: Direction
LS
304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
GFDSS: Starting
forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS: Trip
signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]
GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Sector
C angle LS PSx GFDSS: Direct.
[ * ] forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
< sector angle LS

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx GFDSS: Release
[ * ] [ * ] delay BS PSx
C GFDSS: Sector
angle BS PSx
[ * ] GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
< sector angle BS
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS: Starting
backward/BS
[ 009 041 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: IN,act>/ GFDSS: IN,act>/
pow./adm PSx angle LS PSx angle BS PSx reac> LS PSx reac> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 065 016 068 016 064 016 067
set 2 000 236 000 242 000 248 000 239 000 251
set 3 000 237 000 243 000 249 000 240 000 252
set 4 000 238 000 244 000 250 000 241 000 253
Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
49Z64BNA_EN
3-304 Output of the direction decisions with the 'Steady-state power' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-429

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation
The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from the residual current value by
using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation. If the residual current
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay has elapsed.
GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release
(curr.) ready C (I.meas.) PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
[ 038 028 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Ground
DIST: General fault (curr.)
[ 036 240 ]
t 0 0 t
IN
GFDSS: Op.
delay IN
elapsed
304 157
GFDSS: IN>
triggered
304 158
GFDSS: IN
filtered
304 159
GFDSS: Curr. IN
filt. p.u.
[ 004 047 ]
Parameter GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

(I.meas.) PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
set 1 016 092 016 093 016 094 016 095
set 2 001 047 001 017 001 020 001 023
set 3 001 048 001 018 001 021 001 024
set 4 001 049 001 019 001 022 001 025
49Z64BQA_EN
3-305 Evaluating the residual current
3-430 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting ground faults

The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters can be
reset either individually or as a group.
GFDSS: Op. delay +

IN elapsed GFDSS: No. GF
304 157 (curr. meas)
R [ 009 003 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z61BRB_EN
3-306 Counting ground faults
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-431

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36.3 Steady-State Admittance
To determine a ground fault direction the steady-state admittance evaluation requires the
neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current values. The frequency
provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by using a Fourier analysis.
The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at G F D S S : t V N G > and which
was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Depending on the selected operating mode (e.g.
'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power (G F D S S : O p . m . G F
p o w . / a d m P S x 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the direction. Connection of the
measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at G F D S S : M e a s .
d i r e c t i o n P S x . With the standard connection, a decision for ‘LS’ is reached in the
case of a ground fault on the line side and ‘BS’ in the case of a ground fault on the
busbar side. Phase-angle errors of the system transformers can be compensated with
the setting at G F D S S : C o r r e c t i o n a n g l e P S x .
3-432 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

starting C PSx PSx
306 539
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ] t 80 ms
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151
GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P meas.) PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: VN-G GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1
2 2
1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard
2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite
GFDSS: Correction
C angle PSx
[ * ]
C C
GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
GFDSS: P
304 155
GFDSS: Q
304 156
Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Correction GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx angle PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 110 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 026 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 027 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 028 001 004
12Z6245 B_EN
3-307 Direction determination with the 'Steady-state admittance' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-433

3 Operation
(continued)
cos phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (conductance G(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-308.
The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-308 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance, 'cos phi circuit' operating mode
3-434 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
sin phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (susceptance B(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-309.
The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-309 Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using Steady-state admittance, 'sin phi circuit' operating mode
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-435

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ]
C GFDSS: G(N)> /
GFDSS: Direction LS B(N)> LS PSx
304 153 [ * ]
GFDSS: Direction BS GFDSS: Starting

304 154 forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS:Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx
[ * ]
1, 3, 4, 5 GFDSS: G(N)> /
1: cos phi circuit C B(N)> BS PSx
[ * ]
2, 3, 4, 5
2: sin phi circuit
GFDSS: Starting
GFDSS: P backward/BS
304 155 [ 009 041 ]
G(E) 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Q
304 156
B(E) 2, 4
Y(E) 5
GFDSS: Admitt.
Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ]
5 GFDSS: Conduct.
G(N) p.u.
4 [ 004 192 ]
GFDSS: Suscept.
3 B(N) p.u.
[ 004 193 ]
1 ... 2
GFDSS: Trip
signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
Parameter GFDSS:Op.m.GF GFDSS: G(N)> / GFDSS: G(N)> /

pow./adm PSx B(N)> LS PSx B(N)> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 111 016 112
set 2 000 236 001 029 001 032
set 3 000 237 001 030 001 033
set 4 000 238 001 031 001 034
Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
49Z6455 A_EN
3-310 Output of the direction decisions with the 'Steady-state admittance' operating mode
3-436 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional ground
fault determination
The admittance value from the ground return is used for evaluation. If the admittance
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay has elapsed.
The trip signal from the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by the auto-
reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
GFDSS: Oper.delay
Y(N)elaps
304 175
GFDSS: Admittance GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper.de GFDSS: Rel. de

ready C PSx lay Y(N)> PSx lay Y(N)> PSx
[ 038 167 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: General
starting int.
306 539
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Trip
IN Y(N)>
[ 009 075 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ] GFDSS: Trip
signal Y(N)>
[ 009 072 ]
GFDSS: Starting
Y(N)>
[ 009 074 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper.de GFDSS: Rel. de

PSx lay Y(N)> PSx lay Y(N)> PSx
set 1 016 113 016 114 016 115
set 2 001 035 001 038 001 041
set 3 001 036 001 039 001 042
set 4 001 037 001 040 001 043
45Z6360A_EN
3-311 Evaluating the admittance
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-437

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and

Admittance Evaluation
The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters may
be reset either individually or together with other counters. (See also section 'Resetting
Actions'.)
GFDSS: Oper.delay GFDSS: No. GF

Y(N)> elapsed + admitt. Y(N)
304 175
[ 009 060 ]
R
GFDSS: Grd. fault GFDSS: No. GF
pow./adm. + power/admitt.
[ 009 037 ] [ 009 002 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
forward/LS + forward/LS
[ 009 035 ] [ 009 000 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
backward/BS + backward/BS
[ 009 036 ] [ 009 001 ]
R
GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: General 0: don’t execute
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z6191 B_EN
3-312 Counting the ground faults
3-438 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.37 Ground Fault Tripping (Function Group GFTRP)
The ground fault tripping function is used to immediately switch off a line after it is
connected if it is unbiased and contains a ground fault. If the line is biased, then no trip
occurs.
In order to determine whether the line is biased, the P43x monitors the phase-to-phase
voltage VA-B on the line side for values exceeding the fixed threshold of 0.7 Vnom.
The neutral-point displacement voltage, VN-G, on the busbar and the line sides is used
as the criterion for a ground fault. The neutral-displacement voltage on the line side is
monitored by the P43x. The threshold can be set (see 'Distance Protection' and 'Ground
Fault Detection'). On the busbar side, monitoring must be handled by an external
device. The signal from this external device is passed on to the P43x through an
appropriately configured binary signal input (G F T R P : V N G > t r i g g e r e d E X T ).
A trip occurs if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously within 100 ms after
voltage recovery:
Ground faults are detected on the line and busbar sides.

One of the following additional conditions is satisfied:
The ARC dead time is running.
The circuit breaker close signal, which is picked up through an appropriately
configured binary signal input, is present.
The timer stage started by a 'manual close' to the circuit breaker is running (see
'Switch on to Fault Protection').
A close command is issued by the ARC function.
Ground fault tripping will be blocked if there is a fault in the voltage measuring circuits.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-439

3 Operation
(continued)
3-313 P433: Ground fault tripping
3-440 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-314 P435: Ground fault tripping
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-441

3 Operation
(continued)
3.38 Ground Fault Protection Signaling (Function Group GFSIG)
Ground fault protection signaling (GFSIG) operates only in conjunction with ground fault
direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS). The GFSIG function is used
for selective clearance of ground faults. The directional decisions issued by the GFDSS
function are transmitted to the device at the remote station.
They can be transmitted by way of a signal transmission device or over pilot wires. If
pilot wires are used for ground fault protection signaling, they are continuously checked
by an internal monitoring function. The communication link involving pilot wires is
formed by linking either the make contact or the break contact of the transmitting relay,
depending on the transmitting relay mode selected (' Transm.relay make co' or '
Transm.relay break c'), to the G F S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of the remote station.
The pilot wire loop is closed during normal operation of the power system. If both
devices detect a ground fault in the forward direction (LS), the pilot wire loop remains
closed. A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
The pilot wire DC loop will be opened if the GFDSS function detects a ground fault in
backward (reverse) direction (BS). If the device at the remote station detects a ground
fault in forward direction (LS), the protection device does not trip as the pilot wire DC
loop is already open. The send signal is reset after a settable time delay has elapsed.
Monitoring the pilot wires

The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. A G F S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y signal
will be issued during fault-free operation (i.e., when no ground fault is detected) if no
signal is received from the remote station for a period longer than the set send signal
reset time-delay plus the set reset time-delay for the ground fault signal in the BS
direction plus 2 s.
If a single-pole ground fault occurs while the pilot wire DC loop is disrupted then a trip
will occur, regardless of the received signal.
Testing the
communications link
through a binary signal input or by means of a setting parameter. The remote station
receives this signal if the transmission link is in order.
3-442 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
GFSIG: General
enable USER
[ 016 078 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSIG: Enable
PSx
[ * ] GFSIG: Enabled
[ 040 091 ]
0 GFSIG: DC loop
op. mode PSx
1 [ * ]
GFSIG: Send
0: No (transm.relay)
1: Yes 1 [ 037 089 ]
MAIN: Protection
active 2
306 001
GFSIG: Test 1: Transm.relay
telecom. USER break c
[ 016 079 ] 2: Transm.relay
make co
0
GFSIG: Rel. time
1 send PSx
[ * ]
0: don't execute
1: execute GFSIG: Send
(signal)
GFSIG: Test [ 037 088 ]
telecom. EXT
[ 037 045 ]
GFSIG: Test
telecom.
[ 034 025 ]
GFSIG: Operate
delay PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: Direct. GFSIG: Trip

backward/BS signal
[ 009 036 ] [ 037 087 ]
GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
GFSIG: Receive
EXT
[ 037 044 ]
GFDSS: Release
delay BS PSx
[ * ]
GFSIG: Telecom.
GFDSS: Grd. fault faulty
pow./adm. [ 038 017 ]
[ 009 037 ]
SFMON: Telecom.
faulty/GFSIG
[ 098 012 ]
Parameter GFSIG: Enable GFSIG: Operate GFSIG: DC loop GFSIG: Rel. time GFDSS: Release
PSx delay PSx op. mode PSx send PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 001 134 016 076 016 077 016 074 016 073
set 2 001 136 001 142 001 145 001 139 001 008
set 3 001 137 001 143 001 146 001 140 001 009
set 4 001 138 001 144 001 147 001 141 001 010
45Z63BWA_EN
3-315 Ground fault protective signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-443

3 Operation
(continued)
3.39 Transient Ground Fault Detection (Function Group TGFD)
Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage

and the residual current using the transient ground fault measurement method.
Enabling/disabling the
transient ground fault
detection function
The transient ground fault detection function (TGFD) can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via
PSIG: Enable PSx.
Readiness of the transient

ground fault detection
function
A ready signal is issued if the following conditions are met:
Protection is enabled.
The transient ground fault detection function is enabled.
The nominal frequency is set to 50 Hz.
There is no external blocking.
Transient ground fault detection has issued no directional decisions.
Self-monitoring has detected no faults with transient ground fault detection.
3-444 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
TGFD: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
TGFD: General
enable USER
[ 016 040 ]
0 TGFD: Enabled
[ 037 100 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Nominal
frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
50: 50 Hz SFMON: Fcts.not
perm.f.60Hz
60: 60 Hz [ 093 098 ]
TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]
TGFD: Blocking
EXT
[ 004 034 ]
TGFD: Direct.
determined
[ 004 030 ]
SFMON: TGFD mon.
triggered
[ 093 094 ]
TGFD: Not ready
[ 037 081 ]
SFMON: Module N TGFD: Hardware

DPR faulty fault
[ 093 090 ] 304 207
SFMON: Module N
RAM faulty
[ 093 091 ]
SFMON: Time-out
module N
[ 093 092 ]
SFMON: Invalid SW
vers. N
[ 093 093 ]
SFMON: Module N
DAC faulty Parameter TGFD: Enable
[ 093 095 ] PSx
SFMON: Module N set 1 001 054
+15V faulty
[ 093 096 ] set 2 001 055
SFMON: Module N set 3 001 056
-15V faulty set 4 001 057
[ 093 097 ]
49Z6480 A_EN
3-316 Enabling, disabling and readiness of the transient ground fault detection function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-445

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning and selecting

the measured values
To condition measured values VNG and IN the P43x is fitted with integrated
transformers. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement
voltage formed by the P43x from the three phase-to-ground voltage values.
The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
T G F D : M e a s u r e m . d i r e c . P S x . A pole reversal of the residual current
measuring circuit through the global setting at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N
will in no way influence direction determination by the transient ground fault detection
function.
TGFD: Evaluation
VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 2 TGFD: VNG
VC-G 304 200
1: Sum (VA-B-C-G)
2: Measured
Parameter TGFD: Evaluation
VNG PSx
set 1 016 048
set 2 001 058
set 3 001 059
set 4 001 060
45Z6361A_EN
3-317 Selecting the neutral-point displacement voltage
3-446 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Determination of ground
fault direction
A ground fault's direction can only be determined if the TGFD function is ready.
Higher frequency components are filtered out of the measured values for residual current
and neutral-point displacement voltage. Settable triggers monitor the magnitudes of the
residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage harmonics as well as the neutral-
point displacement voltage fundamental. To determine the ground fault direction the
P43x will evaluate trigger decisions by the harmonics monitoring function, separately for
the positive and negative half-waves.
The sign of the neutral-point displacement voltage's harmonic component is determined

immediately after the current harmonic has exceeded the positive or negative threshold
value. Trigger decisions for current and voltage are compared to determine the ground
fault direction where, as a rule, evaluation depends on the connection of the measuring
circuits. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
T G F D : M e a s u r e m . d i r e c . P S x . With the standard connection, a decision for
‘LS’ is reached in the case of a ground fault on the line side and ‘BS’ in the case of a
ground fault on the busbar side. The direction decision is enabled once the set operate
delay has elapsed. The set operate delay follows the harmonic component monitoring
stage of the neutral-displacement voltage.
Furthermore the operation of a current trigger will start a timer stage that, after it has
elapsed, will enable the TGFD function to detect further transient ground faults.
The time period after which a new transient ground fault may be detected is given by the
setting of the operate delay +40 ms.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-447

3 Operation
(continued)
TGFD: Hardware
fault
304 207
TGFD: Ready TGFD: IN,p>

[ 037 080 ] PSx
[ * ]
IN TGFD: IN,p
triggered
304 201
Positive peak value
negative peak value
TGFD: VNG>
PSx TGFD: Operate
[ * ] delay PSx
[ * ]
TGFD: Ground
t 0 fault
TGFD: VNG [ 004 033 ]
304 200
t+40 ms 0
20 ms 0
TGFD: VNG> (f0)

triggered
304 202
TGFD: VNG>
triggered
304 203
Positive peak value
negative peak value
TGFD: Measurem.
direc. PSx
[ * ]
1 TGFD:
Direction LS
Parameter TGFD: IN,p> TGFD: VNG> TGFD: Operate TGFD: Measurem. 304 204
PSx PSx delay PSx direc. PSx 1
TGFD:
set 1 016 042 016 041 016 044 016 045 Direction BS
set 2 001 064 001 061 001 067 001 073 2 304 205
set 3 001 065 001 062 001 068 001 074 2

set 4 001 066 001 063 001 069 001 075
1: Standard
2: Opposite
45Z63EUA_EN
3-318 Direction determination
3-448 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Directional decisions are output for the duration of the set buffer time. If the buffer time
is set to 0 s directional decisions are issued for as long as the fundamental component of
the neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds the trigger threshold set at
TGFD: VNG>.
TGFD: Hardware
fault
304 207
TGFD: Buffer time

PSx
[ * ]
TGFD: Forward /
TGFD: LS
Direction LS [ 004 031 ]
304 204
TGFD: Backward /
BS
TGFD: [ 004 032 ]
Direction BS
304 205
TGFD: Direct.
TGFD: Reset t = 0 s determined
signal 100ms 0 [ 004 030 ]
304 206
TGFD: VNG> (f0)

triggered
304 202
Parameter TGFD: Buffer time

PSx
set 1 016 043
set 2 001 070
set 3 001 071
set 4 001 072
45Z63EVA_EN
3-319 Output of the directional decisions
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-449

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the directional

decision
While the buffer time is elapsing the directional decisions can be reset using setting
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. Should the buffer
time be set to ∝ ("infinity") the directional decision must be reset so that a new transient
ground fault can be detected.
TGFD: Reset
signals USER
[ 003 009 ]
0
1 ≥1 100 ms TGFD: Signals
reset
0: don't execute [ 004 141 ]
1: execute
TGFD: Reset
signals EXT
[ 004 140 ]
MAIN: General TGFD: Reset

reset USER ≥1 signal
[ 003 002 ] 304 206
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
12Z61EWA_EN
3-320 Resetting directional decisions

values
If, during operation in the absence of ground faults (that is, when the fundamental
component of the neutral-displacement voltage does not exceed the set trigger
threshold), the current or the higher frequency component of the neutral-displacement
voltage exceeds the set operate value, then the TGFD function is blocked after 5 s.
5 s 0 SFMON: TGFD mon.

TGFD: IN,p 30 ms
triggered & triggered
304 201 [ 093 094 ]
TGFD: VNG>
triggered
304 203
TGFD: VNG> (f0)

triggered
304 202
&
TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]
MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
45Z63EXA_EN
3-321 Monitoring the measured values
3-450 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting the transient

ground faults
The number of transient ground faults and directional decisions are counted.
TGFD: Ground
fault + TGFD: No. GF
[ 004 033 ] [ 004 015 ]
R
TGFD: Direct. + TGFD: No. GF

forward/LS forward/LS
[ 004 031 ] [ 004 013 ]
R
GFDSS: Backward / + TGFD: No. GF

BS backward/BS
[ 004 032 ] [ 004 014 ]
R
TGFD: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 022 ]
0
1 ≥1
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
TGFD: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 246 ]
12Z61EYA_EN
3-322 Counting the transient ground faults
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-451

3 Operation
(continued)
3.40 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented.
thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-323 Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
3-452 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum phase current is used to track a first-order thermal replica as specified in
IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping parameters:
The set thermal time constant (τ) of the protected object

THERM: Tim.const. 1(>Ibl)PSx
The set tripping level T H E R M : Θ trip P S x .
The accumulated thermal load Θ P.
The updated measured coolant temperature (Θc) for the protected object.
The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θc,max .
The maximum permissible object temperature Θmax
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − ΘP
t = τ ⋅ ln ⎝ Iref ⎠
2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θ a − Θ a,max ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Θ trip ⋅ ⎜⎜1 − ⎟
⎟
⎝ Iref ⎠ ⎝ Θ max − Θ a,max ⎠
Figure 3-324 shows the tripping characteristic for Θ P = 0 % and the setting for the
maximum permissible coolant temperature and the maximum permissible protected
object temperature to identical values.
By setting the operating mode, the user selects an ‘absolute’ or ‘relative’ replica. If the
setting is for Absolute replica, the P43x will operate with a fixed trip threshold (Θtrip) of
100 %.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-453

3 Operation
(continued)
θtrip / %
10000
200
1000
110
τ /min
50
100 200
110
10 1000
50
t/min 200
110
1
50
30
0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I/Iref
D5Z50BEA_EN
3-324 Tripping characteristic for Thermal Overload Protection (tripping characteristics apply to Θ P = 0 % and the setting for the maximum
permissible coolant temperature and the maximum permissible protected object temperature to identical values)
To permit coolant temperature acquisition the analog module Y must be fitted. If this
module is not available in the P43x then the setting for T H E R M : C o o l a n t t e m p .
P S x is included in the calculation of the tripping time.
The setting for T H E R M : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the Thermal

Overload Protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.
3-454 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-325 Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition
Warning
A warning signal can be set in accordance with the T H E R M : Θ w a r n i n g P S x set
operate value. Additionally, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set. When
the time left until tripping falls below this setting, a warning signal will be issued.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x set time constant. The thermal replica may be
reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal
overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-455

3 Operation
(continued)
3-326 Thermal Overload Protection
3-456 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-327 Resetting the thermal replica
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-457

3 Operation
(continued)
3.41 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)
The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase
voltages and of the neutral-point displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence
voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the
three phase-to-ground voltages.
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
3-328 Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-458 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the phase

voltages
The P43x checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Depending on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-to-
ground voltages (‘star’ operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (‘delta’ operating
mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is

recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always
be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-329 Selection of Measured values
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-459

3 Operation
(continued)
3-330 Overvoltage monitoring
3-460 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-331 Undervoltage monitoring
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-461

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the positive-

and negative-sequence
voltages
The P43x determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the
fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the equations
given below. This is based on the setting at M AIN : R o ta r y fi e l d .
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: Clockwise rotating field):

Positive-sequence voltage:
1
( 2
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C−G
3
)
Negative-sequence voltage: V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B − G + a ⋅ V C −G )
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: Anti-clockwise rotating field):
Positive-sequence voltage:
1
( 2
V pos = ⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ VC−G
3
)
Negative-sequence voltage: V neg =
1
3
( 2
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B −G + a ⋅ V C −G )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
3-462 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-332 Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set
thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed. The timer
stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands, then it is

recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always
be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and it would therefore not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-463

3 Operation
(continued)
3-333 Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage
3-464 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-334 Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-465

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral-

Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point
displacement voltage formed by the P43x from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the
neutral-point displacement voltage obtained externally via the fourth voltage measuring
input (the neutral-point displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage
transformers, for example – see section 'Conditioning of Measured Values'). The
neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
V<>: Evaluation
VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 V<>: VNG
VC-G 305 252
1: Calculated
2: Measured
V<>: VNG
not ready
MCMON: Meas. 310 048
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MCMON: M.circ.
VNG flty.
[ 007 214 ]
Parameter V<>: Evaluation
VNG PSx
set 1 076 002
set 2 077 002
set 3 078 002
set 4 079 002
45Z6370A_EN
3-335 Selecting the measured value
3-466 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
V<>: Blocking
tVNG> EXT
[ 041 072 ]
V<>: tVNG>
V<>: Hyst. V<> PSx
deduc. PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
V<>: VNG>
MAIN: Protection PSx
active [ * ]
306 001
V<>: VNG
not ready
310 048 V<>: tVNG>
elapsed
[ 041 045 ]
V<>: Blocking V<>: Starting

tVNG>> EXT VNG>
[ 041 073 ] [ 041 044 ]
V<>: VNG>> V<>: tVNG>>
PSx PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>: tVNG>>
V<>: VNG elapsed
305 252
[ 041 046 ]
V<>: Starting
VNG>>
[ 042 008 ]
Parameter V<>: VNG> V<>: tVNG> V<>: VNG>> V<>: tVNG>> V<>: Hyst. V<>
PSx PSx PSx PSx deduc. PSx
set 1 076 011 076 013 076 012 076 014 076 049
set 2 077 011 077 013 077 012 077 014 077 049
set 3 078 011 078 013 078 012 078 014 078 049
set 4 079 011 079 013 079 012 079 014 079 049 45Z6371A_EN
3-336 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-467

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the reference

voltage
The reference voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
3-468 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
V<>: Blocking
tVref> EXT
[ 007 036 ]
V<>: Hyst. V<> V<>: tVref>
deduc. PSx PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>: Vref>
C PSx C
[ * ]
V<>: tVref>
Vref elapsed
[ 007 047 ]
V<>: Starting
V<>: Blocking Vref>
tVref>> EXT [ 007 051 ]
[ 007 037 ]
V<>: tVref>>
PSx
[ * ]
V<>: Vref>>
C PSx C
[ * ]
V<>: tVref>>
elaps.
[ 007 048 ]
V<>: Blocking V<>: Starting
tVref< EXT Vref>>
[ 007 039 ] [ 007 052 ]
V<>: tVref<
PSx
[ * ]
V<>: Vref< V<>: tVref<

C PSx C elapsed
[ * ] [ 007 053 ]
V<>: Fault Vref<

[ 007 061 ]
V<>: Blocking
tVref<< EXT Setting(s) blocked
[ 007 046 ] V<>: Starting
Vref<
[ 007 055 ]
V<>: tVref<<
PSx V<>: tVref<<
[ * ] elaps.
[ 007 054 ]
MAIN: Protection V<>: Vref<<
active C PSx C
306 001 [ * ]
MCMON: M.circ.
Vref flty.
[ 007 213 ]
V<>: Fault Vref<<
[ 007 062 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>: Starting
Vref<<
[ 007 056 ]
V<>: tTransient
PSx
[ * ] V<>: tVref<
elaps. trans.
[ 007 057 ]
V<>: tVref<<
elaps.trans.
[ 007 060 ]
V<>: tVref</<<
elap.trans
[ 007 063 ]
Parameter V<>: Vref> V<>: tVref> V<>: Vref>> V<>: tVref>>
PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 007 064 007 066 007 065 007 067
set 2 007 071 007 069 007 068 007 070
set 3 007 075 007 073 007 072 007 074
set 4 007 079 007 077 007 076 007 078
Parameter- V<>: Vref< V<>: tVref< V<>: Vref<< V<>: tVref<< V<>: tTransient V<>: Hyst. V<>
PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx deduc. PSx
set 1 007 086 007 088 007 087 007 096 076 029 076 049
set 2 007 097 007 099 007 098 007 100 077 029 077 049
set 3 007 101 007 103 007 102 007 104 078 029 078 049
set 4 007 105 007 107 007 106 007 108 079 029 079 049 45Z6372A_EN
3-337 Monitoring the reference voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-469

3 Operation
(continued)
3.42 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P43x monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or falls below
set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the
zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection
function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be
explained below using the first stage as an example.
over-/underfrequency
protection
The frequency protection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
3-338 Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
3-470 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measuring

voltage
By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the
over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either
a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.
3-339 Selecting the measuring voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-471

3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude.
Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or

interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.
3-340 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
3-472 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/

underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (∆f/∆t)
Depending on the setting, the P43x monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P43x checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P43x checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-473

3 Operation
(continued)
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (∆f/∆t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be

set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value ∆f within the set
time ∆t, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-341 Operation of frequency monitoring combined with ∆f/∆t monitoring
3-474 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-342 First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-475

3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for
the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two
following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency
or underfrequency situation. A manual reset and a reset with a binary signal are also
possible:
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER

f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
3-476 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.43 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>)
The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive power from
the fundamental currents and voltages. The sign of the active or the reactive power,
respectively, is evaluated for direction determination
P<> protection
The power directional protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
3-343 Enabling or disabling power directional protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-477

3 Operation
(continued)
Power determination
The device determines the active and reactive power from the fundamental waves of the
three phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit
monitoring function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power
determination will be blocked.
Power monitoring
The device checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
Dynamic range-dependent
setting parameters
The logic diagrams following below display signal processing with the dynamic range for
the phase current measurement set to
M A I N : D y n a m i c r a n g e I = 'maximum range'. When the sensitive range is
selected, alternative parameters with a setting range that will permit lower operate values
will become effective, e.g.
P < > : P > s e n s . r a n g e P S 1 instead of
P<>: P> high range PS1.
Transient signals
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when values
have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be used.
Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was
disconnected, and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-478 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-344 Power determination
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 479

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds
the set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one
parameter each is available to set the threshold value. The resetting ratio of the
threshold stages can be set.
When the active power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting signal
is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate
delay P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay P> PSx
tP> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 082 ]
P<>: Signal
P<>: P> P> delayed
high range PSx [ 035 087 ]
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Starting
P<>: P P>
402 631 [ 035 086 ]
P<>: Operate
delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay P>>PSx
tP>> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 083 ]
P<>: Signal
P<>: P>> P>> delayed
high range PSx [ 035 090 ]
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Starting
P>>
[ 035 089 ]
Parameter P<>: P> P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release

high range PSx ratio P> PSx delay P> PSx delay P> PSx
set 1 017 203 017 124 017 128 017 132
set 2 017 204 017 125 017 129 017 133
set 3 017 205 017 126 017 130 017 134
set 4 017 213 017 127 017 131 017 135
Parameter P<>: P>> P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release
high range PSx ratio P>>PSx delay P>>PSx delay P>>PSx
set 1 017 214 017 144 017 148 017 152
set 2 017 215 017 145 017 149 017 153
set 3 017 216 017 146 017 150 017 154
set 4 017 217 017 147 017 151 017 155 40Z5271A_EN
3-345 Active power monitoring when values exceed set thresholds
3-480 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

exceeded
If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is
negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip
signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-
directional decision.
3-346 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values exceed set thresholds
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 481

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring

exceeded
The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate delay

Q> PSx
P<>: Release delay

P<>: Blocking Q> PSx
tQ> EXT
035 084
P<>: Q> high range P<>: Signal

PSx Q> delayed
035 093
P<>: Diseng. ratio

Q> PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>
035 092
P<>: Operate delay

Q>> PSx
P<>: Release delay

Q>> PSx
P<>: Blocking
tQ>> EXT
035 085
P<>: Q>> high range P<>: Signal

PSx Q>> delayed
035 096
P<>: Diseng. ratio

Q>> PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>>
035 095
P<>: Q> high range Diseng. ratio Operate delay Release delay
PSx
set 017 218
set 017 219
set 017 220
set 017 221
P<>: Q>> high range Diseng. ratio Operate delay Release delay
PSx
set 017 222
set 017 223
set 017 224
set 40Z5270A_EN
017 225
3-347 Reactive power monitoring when values exceed set thresholds
3-482 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

exceeded
If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it
is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision results. A setting determines
whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-)
directional or a non-directional decision.
3-348 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values exceed set thresholds
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 483

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
3-484 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking tP<

EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>: P< high

range PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release
ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: P P<>: Signal P<

402 631
delayed
[ 035 055 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
& P<>: Fault P<

[ 035 057 ]
P<>: Blocking tP<<
EXT &
[ 035 051 ]
P<>: P<< high

[ * ] P<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Release
P<< PSx delay P<<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Signal P<<

delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Fault P<<

& [ 035 063 ]
&
P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
P<>: tP< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>: tP</tP<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
Parameter P<>: P< high P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release
range PSx ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx delay P< PSx
set 1 017 013 017 034 017 060 017 226
set 2 017 014 017 035 017 061 017 227
set 3 017 016 017 036 017 062 017 228
set 4 017 020 017 037 017 063 017 229
P<>: P<< high P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
Parameter range PSx P<< PSx delay P<<PSx delay P<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 068 017 238 017 242 017 246 018 246
set 2 017 021 017 239 017 243 017 247 018 247
set 3 017 025 017 240 017 244 017 248 018 248
set 4 017 026 017 241 017 245 017 249 018 249
40Z5272B_EN
3-349 Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 485

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is
negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision results. A setting determines
whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-)
directional or a non-directional decision.
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent > 0.010 Snom
power S
P<>: Direction
P< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional P<>: Trip

& signal P<
P<>: Signal & [ 035 058 ]
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
&
&
P<>: tP< elapsed & P<>: Trip

trans. & signal P< trans
[ 035 056 ] [ 035 059 ]
P<>: P+ &
402 633
P<>: P-
402 634
&
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Direction
P<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
P<>: Trip
3: Non-directional signal P<<
& & [ 035 064 ]
P<>: Signal P<<
delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&
&
& P<>: Trip sig.

P<>: tP<< elapsed & P<< trans.
trans. [ 035 065 ]
[ 035 062 ]
&
Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction

P< PSx P<< PSx &
set 1 017 230 017 250
set 2 017 231 017 251
set 3 017 232 017 252
set 4 017 233 017 253 40Z5273C_EN
3-350 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
3-486 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
[ * ] 2
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ] 3
P<>: Fault P<

[ 035 057 ]
1 P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
*
2 P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
*
3 P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
*
Parameter- P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay P< PSx delay P< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 060 017 226 018 246
set 2 017 061 017 227 018 247
set 3 017 062 017 228 018 248
set 4 017 063 017 229 018 249
19Z5278A_EN
3-351 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring
Reactive power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 487

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking tQ<

EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>: Q< high range

PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release
ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Q P<>: Signal Q<

402 632
delayed
[ 035 067 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Fault
& Q<
P<>: Blocking [ 035 069 ]
tQ<< EXT &
[ 035 053 ]
P<>: Q<< high

[ * ] Q<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Release
Q<< PSx delay Q<<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Signal Q<<

delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Fault
& Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
&
P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
P<>: tQ< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
P<>: tQ</tQ<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]
Parameter P<>:
P<>:Q<Q< high P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release
PSx
range PSx ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
set 1 017
018 069
035 018 044 018 052 018 056
set 2 017
018 038
036 018 045 018 053 018 057
set 3 017
018 039
037 018 046 018 054 018 058
set 4 018 045
017 038 018 047 018 055 018 059
Parameter P<>:
P<>:Q<<
Q<< high P<>: Diseng.ratio P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
PSx
range PSx Q<< PSx delay Q<<PSx delay Q<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 079
018 085 018 095 018 213 018 236 018 246
set 2 017 086
018 046 018 096 018 214 018 237 018 247
set 3 018
017 087
049 018 097 018 215 018 238 018 248
set 4 018
017 088
051 018 098 018 216 018 239 018 249
40Z5276B_EN
3-352 Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
3-488 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it
is negative, a backward- (reverse-) directional decision results. A setting determines
whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a
non-directional decision.
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
Apparent > 0.010 Snom
power S
P<>: Direction
Q< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3: Non-directional P<>: Trip

& signal Q<
P<>: Signal & [ 035 155 ]
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
&
&
P<>: tQ< elapsed & P<>: Trip sig.

trans. & Q< trans.
[ 035 068 ] [ 035 156 ]
P<>: Q+ &
402 635
P<>: Q-
402 636
&
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Direction
Q<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
P<>: Trip
3: Non-directional & signal Q<<
P<>: Signal Q<< & [ 035 176 ]
delayed
[ 035 011 ]
&
&
P<>: tQ<< & P<>: Trip sig.

elapsed trans. & Q<< trans.
[ 035 016 ] [ 035 177 ]
&
Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction

Q< PSx Q<< PSx &
set 1 018 081 018 242
set 2 018 082 018 243
set 3 018 083 018 244
set 4 018 084 018 245 40Z5277C_EN
3-353 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 489

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
[ * ] 2
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ] 3
P<>: Fault Q<

[ 035 069 ]
1 P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
*
2 P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
*
3 P<>: tTransient
pulse PSx
*
Parameter- P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246
set 2 018 053 018 057 018 247
set 3 018 054 018 058 018 248
set 4 018 055 018 059 018 249
19Z5279A_EN
3-354 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
3-490 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Directional power signaling

The active or reactive power direction is signaled when one of the starting signals has
been issued.
Apparent power S > 0.010 Snom
P<>: Direction P
& forw.
[ 035 181 ]
P<>: Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
P<>: Starting P>>

[ 035 089 ]
P<>: Starting P<

[ 035 054 ]
P<>: Starting P<<

[ 035 060 ]
P<>: P+ P<>: Direction P

402 633 & backw.
[ 035 191 ]
P<>: P-
402 634
19Z5274B_EN
3-355 Directional starting signals issued by the active power monitoring
P<>: Q+
402 635
P<>: Direction Q
forw.
P<>: Q-
402 636
& [ 035 193 ]
P<>: Starting Q>

[ 035 092 ]
P<>: Starting Q>>

[ 035 095 ]
P<>: Starting Q<

[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Starting Q<< P<>: Direction Q

[ 035 010 ] & backw.
[ 035 194 ]
Apparent power S > 0.010 Snom
19Z 5275B_EN
3-356 Directional starting signals issued by the reactive power monitoring
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 491

3 Operation
(continued)
3.44 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
The P43x features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been
issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has actually been opened.
Enabling/disabling circuit
breaker failure protection
The function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this parameter has
been activated the CBF function may be enabled or disabled using setting parameters or
signal inputs have equal status. If C B F : E n a b l e E X T is the only function assigned
to a binary signal input, then circuit breaker protection will be enabled by a positive edge
of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If C B F : D i s a b l e E X T is the
only function assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no
effect.
CBF: General
enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
CBF: Enabled
1 & [ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 041 & ≥1

Address 038 042
&
CBF: Ext./user
& & ≥1 S 11 enabled
[ 038 040 ]
& ≥1 R1
CBF: Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF: Enable USER

[ 003 016 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF: Disable EXT &

[ 038 042 ]
CBF: Disable USER

[ 003 015 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138 B_EN
3-357 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
3-492 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of circuit
breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will be unavailable under the following conditions:
The CBF function is not activated.

Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to 'blocked'.
CBF: Enabled CBF: Not ready

[ 040 055 ] [ 040 025 ]
&
CBF: Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF: t1 1p
[ 022 164 ] 1)
Blocked &
CBF: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
Blocked
CBF: t2
[ 022 166 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay
/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay
/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay
/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
Blocked 1) only P435
45Z6364A_EN
3-358 Signal C B F : Not ready
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-493

3 Operation
(continued)
Detecting a CB tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.
Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current flow may
additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.
Current flow monitoring

This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole-
selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the
set threshold value: C B F : I < .
As long as the current flow remains higher than the set threshold value of C B F : I < ,
then the appropriate phase-selective messages, C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w A ,
C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w C , and the C B F : C u r r e n t
f l o w P h x multiple signal will be issued continuously.
CBF: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF: Current flow A

IA [ 038 230 ]
IB CBF: Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
IC
CBF: Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF: Current flow
Phx
[ 038 233 ]
47Z1139 D_EN
3-359 Current flow monitoring
3-494 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Evaluation of CB status
signals
Trip signals included in the G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , which use CB status signals
in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected by setting
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The
P43x can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:
The open signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B 1 o p e n 3 p E X T

The closed signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked if the configuration of the respective
binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. As a result, the P43x will issue
the C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e signal. The evaluation of current criteria is not
affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P43x.
As an alternative the status signals from the external device may be used by the P43x.
The required assignments are made by setting M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B o p e n or
M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B c l o s e d . Status signals from external devices are processed
similarly to the M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T
CB status signals.
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address 031 028 &

Address 036 051 CBF: CB pos.
& implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT & ≥1
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
19Z6131 C_EN
3-360 Plausibility check of CB status signals
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-495

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup criteria
Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a startup criterion. The following criteria are evaluated as a
startup criterion:
Internal startup criterion:

Generating the G e n . T r i p s i g n a l 1 is considered a start criterion. In addition,
a manual trip signal will be used as a start criterion. This is selected by setting
CBF: Start with man. trip.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal,
included in the G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , has been selected from the protection
function in parameter C B F : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of the CB
auxiliary contacts.
External startup criterion:
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may
be used as a start criterion.
To be on the safe side, an additional two-pole trigger may be implemented by
applying the C B F : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T signal.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered.
Note:
The startup criterion drops off if the configured general trip signal or the external
starting criterion drops off. This occurs independently of the current flow and CB
state signal criteria.
Timer stages and output

logic
Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
For the P435: The C BF : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 , X (X = A, B or C) signals will be issued if

the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage
C BF : t1 1 p , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for
a second CB trip coil.
The C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still
present when the time delay set at timer stage C B F : t1 3p, has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 signal will be issued if the startup criterion is still
present when the time delay set at timer stage C B F : t2, has elapsed. The output
command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection
system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of
gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers
then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a
reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapsing of timer
stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to a binary signal input appropriately configured
at C B F : C B f a u l t y E X T .
3-496 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: I< &

[ 022 160 ]
&
IA & S 1 1
R 1
MAIN: CB closed
>= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF: Start with

man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
& & CBF: Startup A
[ 038 212 ]
0
1
0: No &
MAIN: Trip cmd. 1: Yes
blocked &
[ 021 013 ]
&
MAIN: Trip
signal 1, A
[ 036 006 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ] &
EING: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03 &
U xnn
Address 038 209 &

CBF: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start A
EXT
[ 038 206 ]
CBF: Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF: Start A
310 007
>2 CBF: Start >1p

310 010
CBF: Start B
310 008
CBF: Start C
310 009
45Z6363A_EN
3-361 P435: 1-pole starting of circuit breaker failure protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-497

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: I> >1 &
[ 022 160 ] &
IA >1 & S 1 1
IB R 1
IC
MAIN: CB closed
>= 1p
[ 031 038 ]
CBF: Start with

man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
>1 & >1 CBF: Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
0
1 >1 &
0: No
MAIN: Trip cmd. 1: Yes
blocked
[ 021 013 ] &
MAIN: Gen. trip & >1
signal 1, 3p
[ 037 253 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP: Fct.assignm.
U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03 & >1
U xnn
Address 038 209 &

CBF: Start
enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 205 ]
CBF: Start >1p
310 010
47Z1132B_EN
3-362 3-pole starting of circuit breaker failure protection
3-498 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Not ready CBF: t1 3p

[ 040 025 ] c
[ 022 165 ]
CBF: Startup 3p CBF: Trip

t 0 signal t1
[ 038 211 ] [ 038 215 ]
CBF: t2 CBF: CB failure

c [ 036 017 ]
[ 022 166 ]
CBF: Trip
t 0 signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
CBF: CB faulty
EXT
[ 038 234 ]
19Z6433A_EN
3-363 P433: Timer stages of circuit breaker failure protection
CBF: Trip 1p
c
[ 022 163 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBF: Not ready CBF: t1 1p

[ 040 025 ] c
[ 022 164 ]
CBF: Startup A t 0
[ 038 212 ] >1
CBF: Startup B
[ 038 213 ]
CBF: Trip
CBF: Startup C & signal t1, A
[ 038 214 ] [ 038 216 ]
CBF: Trip
& signal t1, B
[ 038 217 ]
& CBF: Trip
signal t1, C
[ 038 218 ]
CBF: Trip
>1 >1 signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF: t1 3p
c
[ 022 165 ]
CBF: Startup 3p t 0 CBF: CB failure

[ 038 211 ] >1
[ 036 017 ]
CBF: t2
c
[ 022 166 ]
t 0 CBF: Trip
>1 signal t2
t 0 [ 038 219 ]
>1
CBF: CB faulty &
EXT
[ 038 234 ]
47Z1133B_EN
3-364 P435: Timer stages of circuit breaker failure protection
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-499

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection function have no timer stages
available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure
protection function, will operate in latching mode. The corresponding trip command, set
to latching mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an
CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN: Trip cmd. CBF: Trip
blocked t 0 command t1
[ 021 013 ] & [ 038 220 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF: Min.dur.
0: No trip cmd.t2
1: Yes [ 022 168 ]
CBF: Trip
command t2
& t 0 [ 038 224 ]
CBF: Trip
signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Rset.
latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
0
MAIN: Latch.
trip c. reset
1 1 [ 040 139 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ] 43Z6362A_EN
3-365 P433: CBF trip commands
3-500 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd. t1
[ 022 167 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd. t1 t 0
[ 022 169 ]
t 0
0 t 0
1 t 0
0: No CBF: Trip
1: Yes >1 command t1, A
MAIN: Trip cmd. [ 038 221 ]
blocked
[ 021 013 ] &
CBF: Trip >1

signal t1, A
[ 038 216 ] & S 1 1
1 CBF: Trip
R >1 command t1, B
[ 038 222 ]
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1, B >1
[ 038 217 ]
& S 1 1
1 CBF: Trip
R >1 command t1, C
[ 038 223 ]
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1, C >1
[ 038 218 ]
& S 1 1
1 CBF: Trip
R >1 command t1
[ 038 220 ]
&
CBF: Trip
signal t1 >1
[ 038 215 ]
& S 1 1
R 1
CBF: Latching CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd. t2 trip cmd. t2
[ 022 170 ] [ 022 168 ]
0 t 0
1 CBF: Trip
>1 command t2
0: No [ 038 224 ]
&
1: Yes
CBF: Trip
signal t2 >1
[ 038 219 ]
& S 1 1
R 1
MAIN: Rset.latch.
trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
0
MAIN: Latch.
1 >1 1 trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
47Z1134B_EN
3-366 P435: CBF trip commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-501

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting trigger
The C B F : S t a r t i n g signal will be issued when the C B F : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T
signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general
starting condition is present. C B F : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage
C B F : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN: General t 0 CBF: Trip signal

starting & [ 040 026 ]
[ 036 000 ]
CBF: Starting trig. CBF: Starting
EXT [ 038 021 ]
[ 038 016 ]
45Z6368A_EN
3-367 Starting trigger
Fault behind CB protection

A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between an already open
circuit breaker and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if the
circuit breaker does not indicate that it is closed after the time delay set at
C B F : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.
When such a fault is detected behind the CB the C B F : F a u l t b e h . C B signal is

issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM
protective interface. This may also prevent unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker
failure function.
CBF: Delay
CBF: I< /fault beh. CB
[ 022 160 ] [ 022 171 ]
CBF: Fault
IA & & t 0 behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
IB
IC
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
1) only P435 45Z6365A_EN
3-368 Fault behind CB protection
3-502 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
CB synchronization
supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts
are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of
CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the
C B F : D e l a y / C B s y n c h . s u p e r v time delay can be used. When this time period
has elapsed the C B F : T r i p S i g C B s y n c h . s u p e r signal is issued. Poles that are
recognized as being open will still be signaled.
CBF: Delay
/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF: CB pos.
implausible t 0 CBF: TripSig
[ 038 210 ] & CBsync.super
[ 038 226 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
A EXT
[ 031 029 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN: CB closed 1)
C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
&
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF: CBsync.
<3 superv A open
& [ 038 227 ]
CBF: CBsync.
& superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF: CBsync.
CBF: I< & superv C open
[ 022 160 ] [ 038 229 ]
IA &
IB
IC
1) only P435
45Z6366A_EN
3-369 CB synchronization supervision
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-503

3 Operation
(continued)
3.45 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
Enabling/disabling the Limit

Value Monitoring function
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters.
Monitoring phase currents

and phase voltages
The P43x offers the possibility of monitoring the following measured values in order to
determine whether they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:

Minimum phase current
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below one of these thresholds, then a
signal is issued after the associated time delay has elapsed.
3-504 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-370 Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase currents
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-505

3 Operation
(continued)
LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT: VPP> LIMIT: tVPP>

[ 040 074 ]
[ 014 027 ] [ 014 039 ]
MAIN: Protec-
tion active
306 001
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP>
elapsed
[ 040 228 ]
VA-G COMP LIMIT: VPP>> LIMIT: tVPP>>
VB-G [ 014 028 ] [ 014 040 ]
VC-G
t 0
VPP,max LIMIT: tVPP>>
elapsed
VPP,min [ 040 229 ]
LIMIT: VPP< LIMIT: tVPP<

[ 014 029 ] [ 014 041 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP<
elapsed
[ 040 230 ]
LIMIT: VPP<< LIMIT: tVPP<<

[ 014 030 ] [ 014 042 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP<<
elapsed
[ 040 231 ]
LIMIT: VPG> LIMIT: tVPG>

[ 014 023 ] [ 014 035 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG>
elapsed
[ 040 224 ]
COMP LIMIT: VPG>> LIMIT: tVPG>>

[ 014 024 ] [ 014 036 ]
t 0
VPG,max LIMIT: tVPG>>
elapsed
VPG,min [ 040 225 ]
LIMIT: VPG< LIMIT: tVPG<

[ 014 025 ] [ 014 037 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG<
elapsed
[ 040 226 ]
LIMIT: VPG<< LIMIT: tVPG<<

[ 014 026 ] [ 014 038 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG<<
elapsed
[ 040 227 ]
47Z0154 B_EN
3-371 Limit value monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltages and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltages
3-506 P43x/EN M/Ac7-S // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral-

The neutral-point displacement voltage, derived from the three phase-to-ground
voltages, is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If
any of the thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time
delay has elapsed.
3-372 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-507

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured
values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the associated
time delay has elapsed.
3-373 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3-508 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
LIMIT: General
enable USER
014 010
LIMIT:
Enabled
040 074
0: no
MAIN: Device 1: yes
on-line LIMIT: Vref> LIMIT: tVref>
003 030
042 144 042 148
1: yes (= on)
LIMIT: tVref>
elapsed
042 152
LIMIT: Vref>> LIMIT: tVref>>

042 145 042 149
LIMIT: tVref>>
Vref elapsed
042 153
LIMIT: Vref< LIMIT: tVref<

042 146 042 150
LIMIT: tVref<
elapsed
042 154
LIMIT: Vref<< LIMIT: tVref<<

042 147 042 151
LIMIT: tVref<<
abgelaufen
042 155
19Z5215A_EN
3-374 Monitoring the reference voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-509

3 Operation
(continued)

temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P43x using a resistance thermometer is
monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of
the measured values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after the
associated time delay has elapsed.
3-375 Monitoring the measured temperature value
3-510 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.46 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P43x may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . a s s i g n m . o u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P43x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial
interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
Binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating function,
whereas input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched. The logic can
only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for L O G I C : S e t n E X T
if the corresponding reset input, L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T , has been configured to a
binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is
interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs
are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of ‘ 1 ’), then the last
plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular,
it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by
setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-511

3 Operation
(continued)
3-376 Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
3-512 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-377 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-513

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation as an
input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations
are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation. It should be noted
that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the
highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the 'Minimum time' operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-378 to 3-382 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating
modes.
Note: If the device is switched to 'off-line' the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to a logic value of ' 0 '.
3-378 Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3-514 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-379 Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-380 Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-515

3 Operation
(continued)
3-381 Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-382 Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
3-516 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-383 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-517

3 Operation
(continued)
3.47 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

(Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03)
The P43x is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The bay type defines the
topology of a bay with its switchgear units.
Defining a bay type

With the selection of a bay type, the following definitions are made:
Manually operated switchgear units with position signals to be processed.

Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P43x.
The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open’ / ‘Close' command control of the
switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.
When a bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the
output relays for control commands are configured automatically if
M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to
carry out this configuration. The list of bay types in the Appendix shows which binary
inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of
switchgear units in the event of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P43x and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit
into the functional sequence of the P43x (processing of status signals only or controlling
and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example.
Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in
the function diagrams by function group "C O M M 1 :" with a blank address [--- ---], it will
indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been
assigned an address.
3-518 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.47.1 Processing Position Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units
The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals
conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see: ‘Main Functions of the P43x’)
are used for further processing. If no logic value of '1' is present at any of the two binary
signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the set
time period for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are
back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is
issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated position is signaled.
The ‘Faulty position’ signal is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not
reached either their ’Open’ or ‘Closed’ position after the set time period for running time
monitoring and the time delay set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have
elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a time delay of 5 s is
started. Once this time delay has elapsed and if there is no status signal for the position,
the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole position signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-519

3 Operation
(continued)
DEV01: Interm.
pos. suppr.
[ 210 012 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DEV01: Inp.asg.
sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected Signal
DEV01: Switch.
device open
DEV01: Gr. [ 210 036 ]
assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ] DEV01: Switch.
device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01: Dev.
interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
Selected group
DEV01: Aus DEV01: Op.time

Signal EXT Debouncing switch. dev.
[ 210 030 ] [ 210 004 ]
&
DEV01: Ein
Signal EXT chatter suppression
[ 210 031 ]
0
DEV01: Stat.ind. 1
interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ] 2
3
0
5s 0 DEV01: Control
1 0 ... 3 state
[ 210 018 ]
0: No 0: Interm. pos.
1: Yes 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty pos.
45Z63AJA_EN
3-384 Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit
3-520 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.47.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
Local or remote control of

external devices
Usually, remote control of external devices is carried out via the communication interface
and local control via appropriately configured function keys on the local control panel.
Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via appropriately configured binary inputs
(configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or
D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l
defines whether the inputs will function as remote or local control points.
Depending on the respective position of control the P43x will issue the following logic
state signals:
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf

or
MAIN: Command from HMI
or
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data
memory:
DEVxx: Open cmd. Received

DEVxx: Close cmd. Received
Selection of the switchgear

unit to be controlled and
generation of a switching
request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to
this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control panel using
the selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching
request. (It should be noted that the local control panel on the P43x does not feature
specific keys for switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made,
then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this
example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y . (See Chapter 6, section ‘Configurable
Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as control keys'.)
For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for the
switchgear units to be controlled. For control via the communication interface, the
control commands ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the switchgear unit to be
controlled.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-521

3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Loc.acc.
block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC: Return t.
illum. trg
305 550
MAIN: Interlock
equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
DEV01
DEV01: Open
request
307 000
DEV01: Close
request
307 001
MAIN: Electrical
control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
LOC:Rem.acc.block.
active
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.
ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.
ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
COMM1: Open DEV01: Open cmd.

Command DEV01 received
[ --- --- ] [ 218 000 ]
DEV01: Close cmd.
COMM1: Close received
Command DEV01 [ 218 001 ]
[ --- --- ]
DEV01: Latching MAIN: Cmd. fr.

time comm.interf
[ 210 005 ] [ 221 101 ]
DEV01: End open

command
307 002
DEV01: End close

command
307 003
MAIN: End command

306 028
DEV01: Latching
time elaps.
307 012
DEV01: Latching
time runn.
307 011
12Z62AAA_EN
3-385 Generating a switching request with remote control via the communication interface
3-522 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling switching
commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P43x checks the interlocking conditions
defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is
permissible. Bay interlock equations for operation with or without station interlock can be
defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching
command determines the interlocking equations that define, for example, the conditions
for the 'Open' command for operation without station interlock.
3-386 Assignment of equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands and enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-523

3 Operation
(continued)
Bay interlock for operation

with station interlock
Interrogation of station interlock conditions is possible only if a communication link with
the substation control level has been established. If the P43x detects a communication
error or if there is no communication interface, it will automatically switch to bay interlock
without station interlock.
If bay and station interlocking is to be checked, the bay interlock will be checked first.
If bay interlocking issues a switching enable signal, a switching request will be sent to
the substation control level. At substation control level, there will then be a check –
taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted
or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching
operation is carried out provided that the enable signal from the bay interlock is still
present. Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be carried out without
checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay interlock
equations defined for operation without station interlock will be used.
3-387 Enabling of switching commands by the station interlock
3-524 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Linking protection
commands to switching
commands
For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals.
The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection
functions. The bay definitions specify which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection device are executed directly without
a prior check of the interlocking equations.
3-388 Linking to the protection commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-525

3 Operation
(continued)
Issue of switching
commands
Depending on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . M o d e c m d . ) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to
time control.
When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter
A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'Autom. synchr. control' a 'Close' request
will automatically issue a 'Close' command for the circuit breaker after a ‘close enable'
was issued by the ASC.
However if A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'Autom. synchron. checkl' ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously
updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations have been set
accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may make decisions as to
which external device is to be given a switching command.
External termination control

If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control
process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then
be necessary to set the P43x at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary
signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination
contacts.
3-526 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DEV01:
Protection
trip cmd.
307 013
DEV01:
Protect.
close cmd.
307 014
MAIN: Cmd.
dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
MAIN: Cmd. dur.
short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01: Oper.
mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
1 1
t
2
3 1
t
1: Long command
2: Short
command
3: Time control
1
t
1
t DEV01: Open
command
[ 210 028 ]
MAIN: Device DEV01: Close

on-line command
[ 003 030 ] [ 210 029 ]
0: no (= off)
MAIN: Enable
control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN: Bay
interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01: Enable
SI Open
307 004
DEV01: Enable
BI Open
307 019
DEV01: Open
request
307 000
DEV01: Enable
SI Close
307 005
DEV01: Enable
BI Close
307 020
DEV01: Close
request
307 001
ASC: AC active
for DEV01
305 040
ASC: Close
enable DEV01 AC
305 041
12Z62AGA_EN
3-389 Issuing of switching commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-527

3 Operation
(continued)
Time control of switching

commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is
started. The P43x expects a status signal - ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ to be issued by the
switchgear unit within the duration of the set time period for running time monitoring.
The status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P43x, which can be set to debouncing and
chatter suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in
section 'Main Functions of the P43x'). For the duration of the set time period for running
time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position
- either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated position is signaled.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected

(M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No’) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position status signal is received or the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed (see Figure 3-385).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected

(M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'Yes’) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is
issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is active.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole position signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of '1'.
3-528 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
DEV01: Interm.
pos. suppr.
[ 210 012 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DEV01: Inp.asg.
sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal
DEV01: Switch.
device open
DEV01: Gr. [ 210 036 ]
assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ] DEV01: Switch.
device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01: Dev.
interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
Selected group
DEV01: Open
signal EXT Debouncing DEV01: End
[ 210 030 ] open command
307 002
& DEV01: End
close command
DEV01: Closed 307 003
chatter suppression DEV01: Op.time
signal EXT switch. dev.
[ 210 031 ] [ 210 004 ]
DEV01: Switch.
device runn.
307 010
DEV01: Open
command
[ 210 028 ] 0
DEV01: Close DEV01: Stat.ind. 1
command interm.pos.
[ 210 029 ] [ 210 027 ] 2
DEV01: Start 3
runn.time mon.
307 008 0
5s 0 DEV01: Control
0 ... 3 state
1 [ 210 018 ]
0: No 0: Interm. pos.
1: Yes 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty pos.
45Z63AKA_DE
3-390 Monitoring of switching commands
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-529

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring without external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close
DEV01: Close
command
210 029 1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4
1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005
4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
19Z5201A_EN
3-391 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control
3-530 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring with external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
DEV01:Inp.asg.
end Close
210 016
1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005
19Z5202A_EN
3-392 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-531

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the number of

permitted CB operations
The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time
period) may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x o p e r . c a p . Associated with
this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . to which the
maximum number of permitted CB operations is assigned as soon as the positive edge
of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign.
The number of permitted CB operations, set with the counter at

M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation.
Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals
(D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d ).
The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value

of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way affect the protection or control functionality,
in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB failure has occurred
(i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to ' 1 '.
3-532 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.48 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)
The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are enabled only
after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock conditions are defined in the
form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units in the
bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ from the bay
interlock equations for operation without station interlock (see Appendix, ‘List of Bay
Types’). These automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of
bay type – can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements.
The following signals acquired by the P43x are linked by logic operations for the bay
interlock:
Function blocks 1 and 2

Programmable logic outputs
Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to define

interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-order equation as an input
thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-533

3 Operation
(continued)
ILOCK: Fct.
assignm. outp. 1
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN: Fct.
block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN: Fct.
block. 2 active
[ 221 023 ]
LOGIC: Output 1
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC: Output 1
(t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC: Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
LOGIC: Output 32
(t)
[ 042 095 ]
DEV01: Switch.
device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01: Dev.
interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
DEV03: Switch.
device closed
[ 210 136 ]
DEV03: Switch.
device open
[ 210 137 ]
DEV03: Dev.
interm./flt.pos
[ 210 138 ]
SIG_1: Logic
signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
ILOCK: Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
45Z6367A_EN
3-393 Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1
3-534 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3.49 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)
Commands may be transmitted to the P43x via the communications interface.

When the P43x receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is enabled,
an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal issued.
The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command.
The following settings are possible:
Long command
Short command
Persistent command
If the operating mode long or short command has been selected the output relay will be
triggered for the time period set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.
The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole commands.
3-394 Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-535

3 Operation
(continued)
3.50 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)
Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system can be transmitted by the P43x to the
control station via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression
(see ‘Main Functions of the P43x’). This conditioned signal is then available as
SIG_1: Logic signal Sxxx.
Signaling characteristics can be defined through the communication interface by setting

the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
Without function
Start/end signal
Transient signal
If the setting is 'Without function' then no message is transmitted when the signal state at
the binary signal input changes. If the setting is 'Start/end signal' then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes.
The requirement for sending the 'start' signal is that the logic ' 1 ' signal be available for
the set minimum time. If the setting is 'Transient signal' then a message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes form logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 '.
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole
signals.
3-536 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3 Operation
(continued)
3-395 Functional sequence for single-pole signals, as illustrated for logic signal S001
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 3-537

3 Operation
(continued)
3-538 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

4 Design
4 Design
The P43x is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P43x – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 range – is equipped with the
standard local control panel (HMI). The local control panel is covered with a tough film
so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the
essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 23 LED
indicators is also incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the local control panel.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4.1 Designs
The P43x is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case all with different
designs.
P433 case designs:

- 40TE for pin terminal connection (connection diagram P433 -410)
- 84TE for ring terminal connection (connection diagram P433 -411)
P435 case designs:

- 84TE for ring terminal connection (connection diagram P435 -415)
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing
the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs
in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in
the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
4-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

4 Design
(continued)
4-1 Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for a 40TE device)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 4-3

4 Design
(continued)
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
147,5
177,5
184,5
213,4 257,1
242,6
260,2
4-2 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 40TE case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod.
147,5
177,5
184,5
434,8 257,1
464,0
481,6
4-3 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted 84TE case
4-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.2 Flush Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
213,4 227,9
253,6
203,0
155,4
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
181,3
4-4 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted 40TE case with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and
frame) (dimensions in mm)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
101,6
213,4 227,9
253,6
242,6
260,2
6,4
101,6
186,5
224,5
242,6
4-5 Flush-mounted 40TE case with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame (shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 4-5

4 Design
(continued)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
284,9
259,0
25,9
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
410,0
4-6 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
101,6
434,8 227,9
253,6
464,0
481,6
6,4
101,6
186,5
445,9
464,0
4-7 Flush-mounted 84TE case with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame (shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI
View of case 40TE for connection of detachable HMI:
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
View of case 84TE for connection of detachable HMI:
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
Detachable HMI with panel opening:
Aus- Kommando
War nung
107,3
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
177,5
206,0 20,7
46,3
197,5
192,5
148,0
168,0
3,0
181,3
4-8 Device and panel opening views for connection of detachable HMI
Note: Connection of protective grounding conductor: see Chapter 5.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 4-7

4 Design
(continued)
4.3 Modules
The P43x is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P43x.
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard
equipment, : depending on order).
P433 P433 P435 P435

Type Index Description Width 40TE 84TE 40TE 84TE
A 0336 426 J ff { { { {
Communication module 1 (for wire connection) 4T
A 9650 107 A ff Communication module 1 4T { { { {
(For glass fiber, ST connector)
A 0336 428 G ff Communication module 1 (For plastic fiber) 4T { { { {
A 9650 356 A ff { { { {
Communication module 2 (for wire connection) 4T
A 9650 354 A ff Communication module 2 4T { { { {
(For glass fiber, ST connector)
A 9650 355 A ff Communication module 2 (For plastic fiber) 4T { { { {
A 9650 353 A ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4T { { { {
A 9651 427 E ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { { { {
SC connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9651 471 E ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { { { {
ST connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9650 827 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485) 4T { { { {
A 9650 828 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for glass fiber) 4T { { { {
A 9650 829 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for plastic fiber) 4T { { { {
A 9650 830 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232) 4T { { { {
B 0336 187 D Bus module (digital, for 40TE case) z z
B 0336 188 C Bus module (digital, for 84TE case) z z
B 0336 421 B Bus module (analog) z z z z
L 9650 194 A Local control module (Europ.)
L 9650 443 A Local control module (Cyrillic)
L 9650 194 C Local control module (Europ.)
L 9650 443 B Local control module (Cyrillic)
L 9651 473 C Local control module (Europ. for device version with
DHMI)
L 9651 474 B Local control module (Cyrillic for device version with
DHMI)
L 9650 563 F Front plate (for device version 40TE with DHMI)
L 9651 920 F Front plate (for device version 84TE with DHMI)
N 0337 086 B ff Transient ground fault evaluation module 4T
P 9651 472 ff Processor module 4T z z z z
T 9650 307 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 321 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring connection) 8T
1 Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2 Erforderlich bei Protokoll nach IEC 60870-5-103/IEC 870-5-101/MODBUS, DNP 3.0
4-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

4 Design
(continued)
P433 P433 P435 P435

T 9650 308 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 322 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (ring connection) 8T
V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T

switching threshold 18 V
V 9651 328 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4T




V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC,
V 9651 329 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC,

100 to 230 V AC,

100 to 230 V AC,

100 to 230 V AC,
X 0336 973 B ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4T { { { {
X 9650 341 B ff Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with triacs) 4T { { { {
X 0336 971 D ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), 4T { { { {
Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
X 9651 334 A ff Binary I/O module (8 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { { { {
X 9651 493 ff Binary module (4 high-power contacts) 4T { { { {
X 9651 512 ff Binary I/O module (3 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { { { {
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 4-9

4 Design
(continued)
P433 P433 P435 P435

Y 0337 406 D ff Analog I/O module, 4T { { { {
Y 9651 335 A ff Analog I/O module (switching threshold 90 V) 4T { { { {
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40TE or 84TE in width
(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of
the threaded terminal blocks in the P43x are shown in the location diagrams at the end
of Chapter 5.
4-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

5 Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the "Protective and Operational Grounding" section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram "Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal".
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P43x units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not
use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should
be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper

mechanical condition.
If the P43x needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used.
If the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-1

(continued)
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P43x can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of
the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the
P43x packaging.
P43x P43x-XXXXXXX-308-41x-612 Diagram P43x.41x xx.yy
Vnom / NG,nom = 50 ... 130 V Inom = 1 / 5 A IN,nom = 1 / 5 A IEP,nom = A fnom = 50/60 Hz
VA,nom = VN,nom = 24 ... 250 V DC CE

Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1 P43x type identification label
The P43x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual.

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P43x has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P43x.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-3

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P43x is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P43x is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case as shown in
Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 shows such an opening which is below the surface-mounted
case. This will apply accordingly to opening above the surface-mounted case.
5-2 Opening for running the wiring
The opening width

of the surface-mounted 40TE case is: 213 mm (shown in this figure)
of the surface-mounted 84TE case is: 435 mm
The other dimensions are the same for all cases.
5-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. Where the P43x is mounted on a cubicle door,
special sealing measures must be applied in order to provide the degree of protection
required for the cubicle (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See "Protective and Operational

Grounding" section.
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P43x has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or –
for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is
used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the
shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock
resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

The dimensional drawings for panel cutouts to position the P43x with all available
mounting methods are to be found in section 'Dimensional Drawings' in Chapter 4.
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P43x can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be
removed. The local control panel is removed as described below:
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180°up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see figures 5-3 and 5-4).
Then remove the local control panel.

cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see figure 5-3 and
5-4). Now insert the P43x into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4
screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this,
replace the local control panel.
Note: If the control panel thickness ≥ 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-5

(continued)
Before installation, If panel thickness >

loosen the upper 2 mm replace the M3
screws and insert and M4 screws by the
the device. longer screws
provided.
Completely remove
the lower screws
before
installation.
12Y6181 B_EN
5-3 Installation of the 40TE case into a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame).
The P43x has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see figure 5-6)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5.
5-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
If panel thickness >

2 mm replace the M3
Before installation, and M4 screws by the
loosen the upper longer screws
screws and insert provided.
the device.
3 mm
M4
M3
Completely remove
the lower screws
before
installation.
12Y6182 B_EN
5-4 Installation of the 84TE case into a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame).
The has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see figure ) is used.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-7

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-5, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Figure 5-6).
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-5 Mounting the angle brackets
5-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204 mm
Frame for the
80 mm
W idt h: 2 n ted cas e
sh -m o u
40T E flu
12Y6183 B_EN
5-6 Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40TE case.
The cover frame width of the surface-mounted 40TE case is: 486 mm
The device has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is
used for the flush-mounted cases.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-9

(continued)
The flush-mounted 84TE cases - after being fitted with angle brackets - are also suitable
for installation in enclosures or cubicles equipped with a 19" mounting rack.
5-7 Installing the P43x in a cubicle with a 19" mounting rack.
5-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40TE case with a second
sub-rack to form a 19" mounting rack (see Figure 5-8). The second sub-rack can be
another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel.
5-8 Combining flush-mounted 40TE cases to form a 19" mounting rack
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-11

(continued)
5.5 Protective Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.
PCT Terminal PCT Terminal

surface-mounted case surface-mounted case
Pos. Description Pos. Description
1 M4 nut 1 M4 nut
2 Tooth lock washer A4.3 2 Tooth lock washer A4.3
3 Clamp bracket 3 Clamp bracket
4 M4 bolt 4 M4 bolt
19Y5220 C_EN
5-9 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the
safety given by this set-up.
The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
5-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P43x must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in
the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams
that apply to the P43x are also to be found at the end of this chapter.
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P43x. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P43x. Copper conductors with a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to connect
the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P43x power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic
diagram shown in Figure 5-10 Standard schematic connection diagram for the P43x.
It is essential that the grounding configuration of the current transformers shown in the
diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into
account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-13

(continued)
5-10 Standard schematic connection diagram for the P43x
5-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Connecting the measuring

circuits for ground fault
If the P43x is to function using ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values (the GFDSS function), then the T 4 current transformer must be connected to a
core balance current transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreen configuration. If
the metal shield of the cable is routed through the core balance transformer, the ground
wire must be fed through the core again before it is connected to ground. The cable
sealing end must be attached so that it is isolated from ground. This ensures that any
currents flowing through the shield will not affect measurement.
The steady-state ground fault direction determination requires either the three
phase-to-ground voltages or, alternatively, the neutral-point displacement voltage from
the open delta winding of a voltage transformer assembly as the measured voltage.
Phase voltage values are obtained from the same VTs as the measured values for
distance protection. An additional voltage transformer (T 90) is available in the P43x to
connect an open delta winding. When setting the protection function, the selected
voltage needs to be taken into account.
Figure 5-11 shows the standard connection for ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values where the voltage measuring circuit is connected to an open delta
winding. With this connection configuration, ‘forward/LS’ is displayed if a ground fault
occurs on the line side. A reversed connection is possible for the system current or
voltage transformer if the appropriate setting is configured (see Chapter 7).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-15

(continued)
Connection to a
Connection to a core balance
Holmgreen group (window) CT
BS
P43x
LS
45Z5060B_EN
5-11 Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration and core balance transformers
5-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-12). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
P43x
P63x
5-12 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams. This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary
inputs can be made as desired.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-17

(continued)
Connecting signal inputs

for protective signaling
Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission,
depending on the operating mode selected. Twisted pair cores should be used as pilot
wires. Two or four cores are required. If only two cores are available, there must be an
all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and transmitted signals. The
coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for half the loop voltage. Figure 5-13
shows connection with two cores and Figure 5-14 connection with four cores.
The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm. rel. break con. or
Transm. rel. make con. In the first case the break contact of the transmitting relay must
be wired, and in the second case the make contact must be wired. The figures show the
connection for the setting Transm. rel. break con.
Furthermore the P43x is capable to operate with the protective signaling device type
SV 35A and the comparator relay type V 34 if it is guaranteed that there is at least one
10 mA pilot wire current flowing.
5-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
5-13 Connection of protective signaling with two cores
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-19

(continued)
5-14 Connection of protective signaling with four cores
5-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface.
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature.

It is connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance
of 50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female

connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interfaces
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a
control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the device is shut off.
Linking the RS 485 communication interface to other devices is to be carried out by

using twisted pair copper wires. Additional instructions pertaining to the connection of
communication interfaces can be found in the Operating Manual "Bus Technology".
Some versions of communication module A provide two communication channels. As of

software version -602 both channels are supported.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-21

(continued)
5.7 Location Diagrams
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A N T X X Y V X
CH1 4I 6I 6I 4I 4I 6O
CH2 4U 8O 8O 8O
alt.
alt. alt. alt. alt. alt. alt. X
6I
A A T X X X 3O
alt.
ETH CH3
CH2
4I
5U
6I 6I 24I
6O 6O
X
4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
5-15 P433 in the 40TE case with pin- terminal connection (P433-410)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A N T Y X X X V
CH1 4I 4I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 4U 8O 8O 8O
alt .
alt. alt. alt. alt . alt. X
6I
A A T X X X 3O
alt .
ETH CH3
CH2
4I
5U
24I 6I 6I X
6O 6O 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-16 P433 in the 84TE case with ring-terminal connection (P433-411)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A N T X X Y V X P A N T Y X X X X X V
CH1 4I 6I 6I 4I 4I 6O CH1 4I 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 4U 8O 8O 8O CH2 4U 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt. alt .
alt. alt. alt. X alt. alt. alt. alt. alt. alt. X
alt. alt. alt. 6I 6I
A A T X X X 3O A A T X X X 3O
alt. alt .
ETH CH3 4I 6I 6I 24I X ETH CH3 4I 24I 6I
60
6I
60
X
CH2 5U 6O 6O 4H CH2 5U 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-17 The MiCOM P435 fitted into the 40TE case (P435-413 on the left side) and 84TE case (P435-414 on the right side) for pin terminal
connection
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A N T Y X X X X X V
CH1 4I 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 4U 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt .
alt. alt. alt. alt . alt. alt. X
6I
A A T X X X 3O
alt .
ETH CH3
CH2
4I
5U
24I 6I 6I X
6O 6O 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-18 P435 in the 84TE case with ring-terminal connection (P4353-415)
5-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
5.8 Terminal Connection Diagrams
Wandler- Typ T Versorgungs- Typ V

baustein 4I / 4U/5U baustein 4I / 8O
Ring Stift Spannungs- Ring Stift

X041 X041 Messeingänge X_ 1 X_ 1 Ausgangsrelais
Bestückungsvariante 1 1
13 1 U1E 2 2 K_01
T5
14 2 U2E 3 3
T6
15 3 U3E T7 4 4
16 4 5 5
17 5 UNE 6 6 K_02
T90
18 6 7 7
8 8
Bestückungsvariante 9 9 K_03
11 7 Uref T15
12 8 X_ 2
10 1
11 2 K_04
Strom- 12 3 K_05
Messeingänge 13 4 K_06
X042 Bestückungsvariante 14 5 K_07
1 1 I1 T1 15 6
2 2 16 7 K_08
3 3 I2 T2 17 8
4 4
5 5 I3 T3 Signaleingänge
6 6 18 9 UE
7 7 IE T4 U_01
8 8 X_ 3
19 1
20 2 UE
21 3 U_02
22 4
UE
U_03
23 5
UE
24 6 U_04
Versorgung
25 7 + UH
26 8 - U100
27 9 PE
5-19 Terminal connection diagrams P43x (part 1 of 2)

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot.
See also section5.5 'Protective grounding conductor connection / Case grounding / Protective grounding conductor'!
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 5-23

(continued)
Binär- Typ X Binär- Typ X Binär- Typ X Binär- Typ X Binär- Typ X
baustein 6I / 8O baustein 6I / 6O baustein 6I / 3O baustein 6O baustein 4H
Ring Stift Ring Stift Ring Stift Ring Stift Ring Stift
X_1 X_ 1 Ausgangsrelais X_1 X_1 Ausgangsrelais X_1 X_ 1 Ausgangsrelais X_ 1 X_ 1 Ausgangsrelais X_ 1 X_ 1 Leistungskontakte
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 K_01 2 2 2 2 2 2 K_01 2 2
K_01
3 3 3 3 K_01 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
K_01
5 5 5 5 K_02 5 5 5 5 5 5 +
6 6 K_02 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 K_02 8 8
K_02
9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03 9 9 9 9 9 9
X_ 2 X_2
10 1 10 1 K_04 X_ 2 X_ 2 X_ 2
11 2 K_04 11 2 10 1 10 1 1) 10 1
12 3 K_05 12 3 11 2 11 2 11 2 K_02
13 4 K_06 13 4 12 3 12 3 12 3 +
14 5 K_07 14 5 13 4 13 4 1) 13 4
15 6 15 6 K_05 14 5 14 5 K_03 14 5
K_03
16 7 K_08 16 7 15 6 15 6 15 6
17 8 17 8 K_06 16 7 16 7 16 7
18 9 17 8 Signal- 17 8 17 8
Signaleingänge 18 9
eingänge 18 9 18 9
18 9
UE UE
U_01 X_3 Signaleingänge
U_01
X_ 3 19 1 X_ 3 X_ 3 X_ 3
UE UE
19 1 U_01 19 1 19 1 1) 19 1
U_02 K_03
20 2
UE
20 2
UE 20 2 UE
20 2 K_04 20 2 +
21 3 U_02 21 3 U_02 21 3 21 3 21 3
U_03
22 4 22 4 22 4 22 4 1) 22 4
UE UE UE
U_03 U_03 23 5 23 5 K_05 23 5
U_04
23 5 23 5 24 6 24 6 24 6
UE UE UE
24 6 U_04 24 6 U_04 25 7 25 7 25 7
U_05
25 7 25 7 26 8 26 8 K_06 26 8 K_04
UE UE UE
U_05 U_05 27 9 U_06 27 9 27 9 +
26 8 26 8
UE UE U_06
27 9 U_06 27 9
Kommunikations - Typ A Kommunikations - Typ A Kommunikations - Typ A Analog- Typ Y Binär- Typ X
baustein CH1 / CH2 baustein ETH / CH2 baustein (InterMiCOM) CH 3 baustein 4I baustein 24 I
Je nach Bestellung Je nach Bestellung Je nach Bestellung

Ring Stift Ring Stift Signaleingänge
Kanal 1 IEC 61850 KOMM3 X_ 1 X_1 Messwertausgabe X_1 X_ 1
LWL-Anschluss LWL-Anschluss ST LWL-Anschluss 1 1 1 1
UE
X7 X7 X31 2 2 K_01 2 2
U_01
1 RX gültig U_02
X//Y U17 X/Y U17 1
X//Y U22
3 3 3 3
4 4
U_03
X8 X8 X32 4 4
U 5 5
U_04
TX 6 U_05
1 X//Y U18 X/Y U18 1 X//Y U23 5 5
#
6
6 6 7 7
U_06
0 ..20 mA U_08 8 8
U_07
oder Drahtanschluss oder oder Drahtanschluss 7 7 9 9
U_08
X9 LWL-Anschluss SC X33 8 8 K_02
X//Y X13 X//Y gültig
1 1 9 9
2 D2 [R] RX
U26 2 D2 [R] X_ 2
UE
3 3 X_ 2 10 1
U19
TX
X/Y 4
U24
10 1 11 2
U_09
4 U
5 D1 [T] 5 D1 [T] 11 2 12 3
U_10
# U_11
12 3 13 4
RS 485 RS 485 0 ..20 mA U_09 14 5
U_12
15 6
U_13
und Drahtanschluss oder Drahtanschluss U_14
16 7
X12 U_15
Kanal 2 X//Y Signaleingänge u. 17 8
Drahtanschluss 1 U_16
X// Y U25 X34 Messwerteingabe 18 9
1 13 4
M5[DCD] UE U_01
X10 RJ45 14 5
X//Y 2
D2[R]
1 15 6 X_ 3
3 D1[T] UE U_02 UE
2 D2 [R] 4 16 7 19 1
KOMM2 20 U_17
3 E 17 8 2
U20 Drahtanschluss 5 U27 UE U_03
4 E2[ G] 21 3
U_18
5 D1 [T] 18 9 22 4
U_19
X10 7 +UB UE U_04 U_20
X//Y 23 5
1 U_21
RS 485 X_ 3 24 6
2 D2[ R] U_22
RS 232 19 1 25 7
3 U_23
IRIG -B U20 20 2
U 26 8
4 U_05 U_24
Zeitsynchronisierung D1[ T] 21 3 0..20 mA
# 27 9
5
X11 22 4 U
1 # 23 5 PT100
U_06
#
U21 RS 485 24 6 #
5-20 Terminal connection diagrams P43x (part 2 of 2)

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot.
1)
The binary (I/O) module X (6xO) is now optionally available with 4 static outputs, parallel to the make contacts K_02.2,
K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
See also section 5.5 "Protective grounding conductor connection / Case grounding / Protective grounding conductor"!
5-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

6 Local Control Panel (HMI)
6 Local Control Panel
Local control panel

All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The
following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
Readout and modification of settings

Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
support software (MiCOM S1).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The local control panel is fitted with a LC display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric
characters.
Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD
and there are six additional, freely configurable, function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with 17 LED indicators,
mounted vertically to the left of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys.
Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in Chapter 3,
sections 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and 'Resetting Actions'
as well as in sections 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and 'Configurable
Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys' of this chapter.
H4
H3
TRIP
ALARM
F1 H18
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1
H17
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
F2 H19
H5
H6
F3 H20
H7
H8 CG
H9
H10
G F4 H21
H11
H12
G G F5
G
H13 H22
H14
H15
H16
G F6 H23
12 Z6100B_EN
6-1 View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. At the
Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick
overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level
allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured values, etc.) and to
change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the "READ" key .
Availability of the bay panel

The bay panel is only available under these conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit has to have been upgraded with a control
functionality. This requires that the optional binary I/O module to control switchgear
units has been ordered and is fitted to a slot.
2. A further condition is that the protection units are fitted with a communication module
with selectable communication protocol or the Ethernet module as well as with the
new front panel user interface (HMI) that includes function keys.
3. A bay type has been selected with parameter M A I N : T y p e o f b a y .
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point
in the menu tree, press the "READ" key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay panel) the
user can access the menu tree level by pressing the "ENTER” key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree level
the user must simultaneously press the keys "Cursor up" and "RESET". (If previously no
panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel, if available, is
accessed.)
After the set L O C : A u t o m . r e t u r n t i m e has elapsed the protection unit will also
return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display panel last
selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the key
"Cursor left" and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right".
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-3

(continued)
Measured Value
Bay Panel Panel(s)
(state-dependent)
Record View
X0 :running Voltage VAB prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
>Q0 :running 20.7 kV Operat. data record.
G
Q8 :running Voltage VBC prim.
Local Remote 20.6 kV
Control and Display Panels
+ CG G
Device Type
Parameter s Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1
Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
Control
6-2 Display panels and menu tree
6-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Bay panels
If available the bay panel will display switching state signals from external devices
(closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote).
The text display will show up to 3 external devices, one per line, where the external
device selected is marked with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices’
designation text.
X0 :Interm. pos.
>Q0 :Interm. pos.
Q8 :Interm. pos.
Local Locked
6-3 Example of a bay panel
The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their

numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there are up
to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their current state
is displayed ("running", "open", "closed" or "interm. pos.").
The active control unit ("Remote" or "Local") is displayed in the fourth line and whether it
is "Locked" or "Unlocked".
Display panels
The P43x can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the
device according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The
data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed
either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the
user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of
measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sub-
level is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-5

(continued)
Short description of keys

‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys G
/
Panel Level:
The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the pages of the
Measured Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.
‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.
G
ENTER Key
Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input
mode is exited.
6-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
Function keys F1 to F6
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on
assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function
Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in Chapter 3. More details on handling function keys
can be found in this chapter, in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx
(general)' and in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control
keys)'.
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be
changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter
key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. The examples
used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this manual; they
merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-7

(continued)
6.2 Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Jumping from Menu Tree
Level to Panel Level 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
jump to the Panel Level from any position No (=off)
within the menu tree.
1 First press the ‘up’ key and hold it down

G
+ C Voltage U A-B prim.
20.7 kV
while pressing the CLEAR key. Voltage U B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Note:
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
Jumping from Panel Level to
Menu Tree Level 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage U
20.7
A-B prim.
kV
Voltage U B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel

G
XYYY
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
6-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.3 Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (‘Backlight time’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Par/Conf/LOC’).
Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case
the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Disabling of
the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the ‘return time illumination’ function is set
to ‘blocked’.
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)
If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only
after the password for function keys has been entered.
Exception: If a function key has been configured at M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y the

function will switch from "Remote" to "Local" control only after the password has been
entered, but switching from "Local" to "Remote" control will occur without checking the
password (see following section).
Let us assume for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only
after the password - as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 - has been
entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is
disabled until the password is entered again.
For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see section
'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-9

(continued)

Action
Voltage VAB prim.

0 Example of a display. 20.7 kV
Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
1 Function key F1 is pressed. Eight asterisks F1
(*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to

enter the password. ********
2a Press the following keys in sequence:

G
'Left'
G
*
'Down' G
G
*
'Right' G
G
'Up’ G
The display will change as shown in the

G
column on the right.

*
Now press the ENTER key. Voltage VAB prim.

If the correct password has been entered, the 20.7 kV
active display will re-appear. Voltage VBC prim.
Function key F1 is now active for the set return 20.6 kV
time. (Each function key is protected by its
own password, and the return time elapses
individually for each function key after the
correct password has been entered!
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown above in Step 1 will appear.
2b This control step can be canceled at any C Voltage VAB prim.

20.7 kV
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the Voltage VBC prim.
ENTER key is pressed. 20.6 kV
3 Press F1 again. The function configured to F1 Voltage VAB prim.

20.7 kV
this function key is carried out. Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
4 When function keys are pressed while the Fx Voltage VAB prim.
20.7 kV
return time period of the function key is Voltage VBC prim.
elapsing, then the configured function is carried 20.6 kV
out directly, e.g. without again checking for the
password.
6-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.5 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)
As described in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in

Chapter 3, function keys F1 to Fx may be configured as control keys at
F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see the previous section) and
the configuration to 'Key/Switch' is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the four
function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
• MAIN: Local/Remote Key

The local/remote control command is effective only in the bay panel except
where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the functionality set at L O C : F c t. a s s i g n . L /R k e y, the
'Local/Remote' command toggles either between 'Remote' and 'Local' control,
or between 'Local/Remote' and 'Local' control. (The parameter
L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y may be set either to R <-> L or to
R & L <-> L and will then define which of the two switching modes is active.)
If the "Local/Remote" command is configured such that it will switch from
"Remote" control to "Local" control, then this can only occur if the password
has first been entered at L O C : P a s s w o r d L / R . Switching from "Local" to
"Remote" control will occur without checking the password. (See also section
"Configuring the Measured Value Panels and Selection of the Control Point
(Function Group LOC)" in Chapter 3.)
• MAIN: Device selection key

This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if local
control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices’
designation text.
• MAIN: Device OPEN key

The OPEN command is effective in the bay panel only.
Pressing the key assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit
– taking into account the interlock equation – to assume the 'open' status.
• MAIN: Device CLOSE key

The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-11

(continued)
6.6 Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled ‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. If the
M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains
active until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for
example.

Action
0 Up to six selected measured values can be Voltage VAB prim.

20.7 kV
displayed simultaneously on the Panel. Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
Voltage VAB prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
G
1 If more than two measured values have or
Voltage VCA prim.
20.8 kV
been selected, they can be viewed one page at Current IA prim.
a time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The 415 A
device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time
for Panels (setting in menu tree:
"Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed.
6-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.7.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and function

groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
‘Parameters’, ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’, which form the first folder level. Up to two further
folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and
a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
level 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
level 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
level 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-4 Basic menu tree structure
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-13

(continued)
6.7.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In
either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Device on-line
text mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C

+
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or 0
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
6-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see
section "Password-Protected Control Actions") – are enabled without entering the
password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see section
"Changing the Password”), the following description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’, select Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter. Yes
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*)

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
appear in the fourth line of the display. 50000 s
2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
'Left'
G
50000 s
'Right' G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
G
50000 s
'Up’ G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
G
50010 s
'Down' G
Par/Conf/LOC
The display will change as shown in the Autom. return time
G
column on the right. 50010 s
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-15

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Autom. return time
indicates that the setting can now be changed 50000 s
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.

G
G
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED
G
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for
further setting changes.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
6-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
disabled, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing
the ‘up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-17

(continued)
6.7.4 Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
keys.
G
50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
cursor to the left or right.
G
50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the
G
50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7.5 Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an
‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available
in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals
and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used
here as an illustration.

Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.
1 Press the ‘down’ key.

G
The first function and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

the first selected signal will appear in the third
G
#01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip zone 1
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Without function’ appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has yet been made.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip zone 2
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input
G
#02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4
5 Select the operator or the class using the

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case,
G
OR #02 DIST
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-19

(continued)

Action
6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator
G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
in the list.
G
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be
extinguished.
Deleting a list setting

If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-21

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
G
Enabled USER
No
2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
entries one after the other in chronological
G
Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
entry.
G
Enabled USER
No
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
operating data memory to return to the entry
G
point.
6-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
G
Checksum error param
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
the entries one after the other in chronological
G
Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
entry.
G
Checksum error param
4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred G
First: 13:33:59.744
Active: The fault is still being detected Active: Yes
G
(Yes) or is no Reset: No
longer detected (No) by the self- Number: 5
monitoring function.
Reset: The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.

G
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
G
point.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-23

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault

G
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
memory. First, the fault number is shown.
G
Event
In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first

G
Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary
G
Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or G
Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will
have no effect.
G
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
End
3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous

G
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
measured value or the previous signal.
G
Record. in progress
Start

G
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point.
G
01.01.99 10:00:33
6-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be accomplished
by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group resetting for several
memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found in section "Resetting
Actions" in Chapter 3.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the following with
the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-enabling function has
already been activated.

Action
0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
2 Press the 'Up' or 'Down' keys to change the

G
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
setting to 'Execute'.
G
10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will be extinguished. 0
The value in line 3 is reset to '0'.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-25

(continued)

Action
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will be extinguished, and the fault
recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection unit’s memory. Any setting can be
selected again for a value change by pressing
the keys.
6-26 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
6.7.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent unwanted
output even though the global change-enabling function has been activated (see section
"Change-Enabling Function").
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see section "Changing the Password”), the following
description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’. Don't execute
G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
'Left'
G
Don't execute
*
'Right' G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
'Up’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
'Down' G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
The display will change as shown in the Man. trip cmd USER
G
column on the right. Don't execute

*
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man. trip cmd. USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Execute
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-27

(continued)

Action
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED
G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. Don't execute
The unit will execute the command.
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be
extinguished.
6.7.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
1 2
G
6-28 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
‘Password’ setting. ********
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
to enter the valid password. The display will
G
********
change as shown in the column on the right. *
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-29

(continued)

Action
4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
example is done by pressing the UP key
G
*
followed by the DOWN key.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.
6 Re-enter the password.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again. If the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new Password L/R is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password has to be re-
entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password L/R by pressing the
CLEAR key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at C Par/Conf/LOC

Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original Password L/R
continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see section "Change-Enabling
Function").
6-30 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

G
beginning of device startup, press the four
G
TEST
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at
the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during

G
Password
startup, the password is displayed.
G
1234
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 6-31

6-32 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
7 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P43x must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in
the folder titled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
All settings are reset to their default values after a cold restart. The P43x is blocked in
that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P43x. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P43x is modified.
Device DVICE: Device type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW version communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version 002 059
Software version of the communication software based on the device's

protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version 002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model 002 121
Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number 002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200
Order numbers (Cortec) per PCS standard.
7-1 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 000 003
Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 050
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 20. The
display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
7-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 193
Index letter specifying the version of the module inserted in the respective
slot (1 to 20).
DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: MAC address module A 104 061
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
Item number of module L in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module L 086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module L.

DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
Item number of module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version module B (a) 086 189
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Customer ID data 1 000 040
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Location 001 201
Reference input for the device’s location as selected by user.

DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1 000 048
DVICE: Device password 2 000 049

instructions.
DVICE: SW version DHMI 002 131
DVICE: SW version DHMI DM 002 132
Internal software version numbers.
Local control panel LOC: Local HMI exists 221 099
When set to 'Yes' it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
7-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Local control panel LOC: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.

LOC: Decimal delimiter 003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.

LOC: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Password L/R 221 040
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
(This address is available LOC: Displ. ext.dev.desig 221 032
only with the P433.) This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be
displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Display L/R 221 070
This setting defines whether the control site – local or remote – shall be
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071
This setting defines whether the "Locked" or "Unlocked" status shall be

LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208 Fig. 3-6
This setting determines whether the switching (using either the L/R key or
the key switch) is between local and remote control (L↔R) or between
local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).
LOC: Fct. reset key 005 251 Fig. 3-87
Selection of specified counters or event logs that are reset by pressing the
RESET key on the local control panel.
LOC: Fct. read key 080 110
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 030 238
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 030 239
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by

repeated reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel 053 007 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel 053 005 Fig. 3-5
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

LOC: Fct. Grd.Fault Panel 053 004 Fig. 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003 Fig. 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

LOC: Hold-time for Panels 031 075 Fig. 3-2
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before
switching to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
LOC: Autom. return time 003 014 Fig. 3-2
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is disabled.
LOC: Return time select. 221 030
time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
LOC: Return time illumin. 003 023
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
PC link PC: Name of manufacturer 003 183 Fig. 3-7
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
PC: Bay address 003 068 Fig. 3-7
PC: Device address 003 069 Fig. 3-7
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate 003 081 Fig. 3-7
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity bit 003 181 Fig. 3-7
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P43x.
PC: Spontan. sig. enable 003 187 Fig. 3-7
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. spontan.sig. 003 189
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 084 Fig. 3-7
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-7
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta V 003 055 Fig. 3-7
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig. 3-7
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta P 003 059 Fig. 3-7
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta f 003 057 Fig. 3-7
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs

by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 155 Fig. 3-7
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-7
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-out 003 188
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module B.
Communication interface COMM1: Function group COMM1 056 026
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER 003 170 Fig. 3-8, 3-14
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.

COMM1: Basic IEC870-5enable 003 215 Fig. 3-8
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 enable 003 216 Fig. 3-8
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable 003 217 Fig. 3-8
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable 003 220 Fig. 3-8
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 enable 003 231 Fig. 3-8
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER enable 103 040 Fig. 3-8
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat. protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-8
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178
The user may select between two variants of the 103

protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant 003 214 Fig. 3-12
The user may select between two variants of the

MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state 003 165 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud rate 003 071 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity bit 003 171 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P43x.
COMM1: Dead time monitoring 003 176 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
The P43x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling 003 202 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet comm. address 003 072 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former label for CO MM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess was:
IL SA: Ba y a ddr ess
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
7-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-13
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.

The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the
address set at C O MM 1 : Oc te t comm . add ress is the lower-order
octet of the DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Address mode 003 168 Fig. 3-9
Setting for the address mode.

COMM1: Test monitor on 003 166 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
COMM1: Name of manufacturer 003 161 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet address ASDU 003 073 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former label for CO MM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess was:
IL SA: Ba y a ddr ess
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable 003 177 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. 003 179 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 074 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 175 Fig: 3-9,

3-10, 3-11
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta V 003 050 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta P 003 054 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta f 003 052 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 150 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
COMM1: Delta t (energy) 003 151 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted
via the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Contin. general scan 003 077 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
A continuous or background general scan means that the P43x transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
7-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Comm. address length 003 201 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

enabled.
COMM1: Cause transm. length 003 192 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

enabled.
COMM1: Address length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. 003 196 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

enabled.
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
enabled.
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type 003 195 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
enabled.
COMM1: Time tag length 003 198 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the time tag length.

enabled.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ. signal 003 199 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

enabled.
COMM1: Balanced operation 003 226 Fig. 3-10
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
enabled.
COMM1: Direction bit 003 227 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
enabled.
COMM1: Time-out interval 003 228 Fig. 3-10
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-12
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-12

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
7-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. 003 212 Fig. 3-12

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. 003 213 Fig. 3-12

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-12
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom.event confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-12
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-13
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-13
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-13
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-13
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-13
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-13
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-13
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-13
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-13
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count. 003 234 Fig. 3-13
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-13
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp 003 236 Fig. 3-13
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-13
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
deadband'.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-13
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command selection 103 042 Fig. 3-14
Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal selection 103 043 Fig. 3-14
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Meas. val. selection 103 044 Fig. 3-14
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

7-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Parameter selection 103 045 Fig. 3-14
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-14
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Function group COMM2 056 057
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

COMM2: General enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-16

COMM2: Line idle state 103 165 Fig. 3-16
Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud rate 103 071 Fig. 3-16
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity bit 103 171 Fig. 3-16
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P43x.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-16
The P43x monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. time polling 103 202 Fig. 3-16
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault 103 203
With this parameter it is possible to set whether or not faults can be

positively acknowledged after transmission (and consequently deleted from
the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet comm. address 103 072 Fig. 3-16
COMM2: Name of manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-16

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Octet address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-16
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable 103 177 Fig. 3-16
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. 103 179
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 2.
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 103 074 Fig. 3-16
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the

communication interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-16

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V 103 050 Fig. 3-16
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig. 3-16
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta P 103 054 Fig. 3-16
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta f 103 052 Fig. 3-16
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 103 150 Fig. 3-16

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-16
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 3 COMM3:Function group COMM3 056 058
Cancelling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
COMM3:General enable USER 120 030

COMM3:Baud rate 120 038
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3:Source address 120 031
Address for send signals.

COMM3:Receiving address 120 032
Address for receive signals.

COMM3:Fct. assignm. send 1 121 001
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3:Fct. assignm. rec. 1 120 001
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3:Oper. mode receive 1 120 002
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3:Default value rec. 1 120 060
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3:Time-out comm.fault 120 033 Fig. 3-19
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com mu nic a ti ons fau l t
and SFM ON : Co mm un ic .fa ul t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3:Sig.asg. comm.fault 120 034
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
COMM3:Time-out link fail. 120 035 Fig. 3-19
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this

timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO MM 3 : Co mm . l ink fa i lur e
and SFM ON : Co mm .l ink fai l .COM M3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3:Limit telegr. errors 120 036
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l .e r r .) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Function group IEC 056 059 Page: 3-31
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the

IEC: General enable USER 104 000 Page: 3-31
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable configuration 104 058 Page: 3-31
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain

consistency among all the parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and
GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this
command is sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed
parameter setting of the three function groups is enabled in the
communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried
out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
IEC: Ethernet media 104 056 Page: 3-31
Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from

either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
7-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: IED name 104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system; it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
IEC: TCP keep-alive timer 104 062
This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a

communication link to a logged-on client.
IEC: IP address 104 001
IEC: IP address 1 104 002
IP address for the device (IED has server function).

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IEC : IP add ress . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Subnet mask 104 005
IEC: Subnet mask 1 104 006
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
IEC : Sub net m ask . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Gateway address 104 011
IEC: Gateway address 1 104 012
IP address of network router # 1.

Note:
IEC : Rou ter a ddr ess 1. The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP operating mode 104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP poll cycle time 104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 104 202
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 1 104 203
IP address of synchronizing clock server 1.

Note:
IEC : SNT P ser ver 1 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 104 210
IP address of synchronizing clock server 2.

Note:
IEC : SNT P ser ver 2 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
IEC: Diff. local time 104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time 104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time

is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 220
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 221
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m 104 222
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t are the values 'first', 'second', 'third',
'fourth', and 'last'. For I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d the seven weekdays
are available so that for example a setting like "on the last Sunday in March"
may be used.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + 104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 225
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 226
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 227
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ 104 228
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for
the clock changeover to daylight saving time.
7-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Deadband value 104 051
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control
Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change
occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value,
the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter
value is calculated according to this formula:
Step size measured value • setting IEC : De adb an d va lue
IEC: Update Measurements 104 229
Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report

Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP 104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured
value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting IEC: Dead band IP
IEC: Dead band IN 104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d IN
IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d VPP
IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
step size measured value • setting IEC : D e a d b a n d V P G
IEC: Dead band f 104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting IEC: Dead band f
IEC: Dead band P 104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d P
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead band phi 104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ö Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d ph i
IEC: Dead band Z 104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d min/ma x
IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d ASC
IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting IEC: Dead band te mp.
IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each
step size measured value • setting IEC : Dead ban d 20mA
IEC: Update cycle energy 104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB).

No RCB transmission with setting to blocked!
IEC: DEV control model 221 081
Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices.

Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety
is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).
7-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Function group GSSE 056 060 Page: 3-37
Status Events
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
active only if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER 104 049 Page: 3-37
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. cycle 104 052 Page: 3-37
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. cycle 104 053 Page: 3-37
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
GSSE: Increment 104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
GSSE: Operating mode 104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independently of their MAC

address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
GSSE: Output 1 bit pair 104 101 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Output 2 bit pair 104 104
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 104 102 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 104 105
7-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
GSSE: Input 1 bit pair 105 001 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Input 2 bit pair 105 006
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input.
A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Input 2 IED name 105 007
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
GSSE: Input 1 default 105 003 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Input 2 default 105 008
7-26 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 105 004 Page: 3-37
GSSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 105 009
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state

signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE:Function group GOOSE 056 068 Page: 3-34
Substation Event
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
active only if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n parameter or by switching the device off-
line/on-line.
GOOSE:General enable USER 106 001 Page: 3-34
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE:Multic. MAC address 106 003
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving

clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE:Application ID 106 004 Fig. 3-20
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE:Goose ID 106 002 Fig. 3-20
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
GOOSE:VLAN Identifier 106 006 Fig. 3-20
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE:VLAN Priority 106 007 Fig. 3-20
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE:DataSet Reference 106 008
DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE:DataSet Cfg.Revision 106 009 Fig. 3-20
Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is

sent from this device (IED).
GOOSE:Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011 Fig. 3-20
GOOSE:Output 3 fct.assig. 106 015
7-28 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
GOOSE:Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE:Input 1 Goose ID 107 001
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE:Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)

for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a
chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device
(IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data
object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then
only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE:Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
GOOSE:Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004
7-30 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE:Input 1 default 107 005 Page: 3-36
GOOSE:Input 2 default 107 015
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
GOOSE:Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006 Page: 3-36
GOOSE:Input 2 fct.assig. 107 016
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical

state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001
7-32 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned
external devices.
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)

for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including
the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite
side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path
is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are
to be entered.
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element
in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
7-34 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 default 108 005
Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to
default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a
GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE:Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute
element in the data object is to be evaluated.
IRIG_B IRIGB: Function group IRIGB 056 072
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

IRIGB: General enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-21
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
7-36 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Function keys F_KEY: Password funct.key 1 003 036 Page: 3-39

F_KEY: Password funct.key 2 030 242
These passwords enable the corresponding function key. Further

information on assigning passwords is given in Chapter 6.
F_KEY: Function assignm. F1 080 112 Fig. 3-22
F_KEY: Function assignm. F2 080 113
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a

menu jump list may be selected. Both menu jump lists are assembled at
L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
F_KEY: Operating mode F1 080 132 Fig. 3-22
F_KEY: Operating mode F2 080 133
Setting operating mode of the function key to push-button or to switch.

F_KEY: Return time fct.keys 003 037 Page: 3-39
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for
no longer than this time period. When this time period has elapsed the
password must again be entered.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P43x has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The number and connection schemes for the available binary signal inputs are shown in
the terminal connection diagrams.
The P43x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
7-38 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-23
Input filter which is activated when either the mode "active ‘high’, filtered" or
active ‘low’, filtered" has been selected. In order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this
parameter to 6 [steps]. For further information see Chapter 3.
INP: Fct. assignm. U 601 152 091 Fig. 3-23,
3-33
INP: Fct. assignm. U 602 152 094
INP: Fct. assignm. U 703 152 115 Fig: 3-23,

3-33, 3-172,
3-357, 3-360,
3-361, 3-362
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
7-40 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Operating mode U 601 152 092 Fig. 3-23

INP: Operating mode U 602 152 095
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7-42 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Input MEASI: Function group MEASI 056 030
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the

MEASI: General enable USER 011 100 Fig. 3-24
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.

MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig. 3-27
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P43x to
display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
MEASI: IDC< open circuit 037 191 Fig. 3-27
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P43x will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
MEASI: IDC 1 037 150 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 2 037 152 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 3 037 154 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 4 037 156 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 5 037 158 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 6 037 160 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 7 037 162 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 8 037 164 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 9 037 166 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 10 037 168 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 11 037 170 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 12 037 172 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 13 037 174 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 14 037 176 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 15 037 178 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 16 037 180 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 17 037 182 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 18 037 184 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 19 037 186 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: IDC 20 037 188 Fig. 3-27
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig. 3-27
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig. 3-28
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 037 193 Fig. 3-28
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
7-44 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P43x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The P43x identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to
several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode.
For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be cancelled.
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 601 150 121 Fig. 3-394

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 602 150 124


P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)
(This address is available OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1007 150 235
only with the P435.)

(This address is available OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 1008 150 238

Assignment of functions to output relays.
7-46 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Operating mode K 601 150 122 Fig. 3-30

OUTP: Operating mode K 602 150 125
(This address is available OUTP: Operating mode K 1007 150 236

(This address is available OUTP: Operating mode K 1008 150 239

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-48 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Output MEASO: Function group MEASO 056 020
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER 031 074 Fig. 3-32
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.

MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD 053 002 Fig. 3-36
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.

MEASO: Hold time output BCD 010 010 Fig. 3-36
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD
form.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 037 142 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 037 143 Fig. 3-36
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.

For measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" the output value
should change linearly with the measured value.
Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Range
Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. BCD" ...

in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
with:
Display values Range

BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out min. value" ...
for measured values in the range ... "BCD-Out max. value"
"measured values to be issued"
BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out min. value"

for measured values = Mx,min.
BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out max. value"

for measured values = Mx,max.
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 053 000 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time output A-1 010 114 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: Hold time output A-2 010 115
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 037 104 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 037 110
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to
be set is calculated according to the following equation:
M x,min
M x,scal,min =
M x,RL
where:
Mx,min : maximum transmitted value for the selected measured
value
M x,RL : range limit value of selected measured value
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 037 105 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 037 111
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point
of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the
following equation:
M x,knee
M x,scal,knee =
M x,RL
where:
M x,knee : knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured
value
M x,RL : range limit value of selected measured value
7-50 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 037 106 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2 037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.

Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Knee point for characteristic Designation

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
in the data model
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 037 107 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 037 113
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller
than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted.
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 037 108 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 037 114
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the
knee point of the characteristic.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 037 109 Fig. 3-38

MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 037 115
Output values Designation in the data model

Output current range "AnOut min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "AnOut max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "AnOut min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "AnOut max. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1 037 120 Fig. 3-38
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
7-52 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P43x has a total of 23 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED
indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are
not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a blocking or
malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm. LED indicator H 17
indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".
Section 6.1 describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory setting for LED
indicator H 4. At this point it is specifically emphasized that there is no permanent
connection given between the freely configurable function keys and the LED indicators
H 18 to H 23 situated directly next to these function keys.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16, H 18 – H 23) the red and green colors
can be independently assigned to functions. The third color, amber, is a combination of
red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously
present.
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green 085 184 Fig. 3-39
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.

The M A I N : H e a l t h y function is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell. 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The M AIN : Bl ocke d /fau l ty function is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell. 085 004

The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H17 red 085 185

The L O C : E d i t m o d e function is permanently assigned.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Fct.assig. H 4 red 085 007
LED: Fct.assig. H 4 green 085 057 Fig. 3-39

LED: Fct.assig. H 5 green 085 060
LED: Fct.assig. H10 green 085 075
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating mode H 1 085 182 Fig. 3-39
The E S u p d a t i n g operating mode is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 2 085 002


7-54 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)
Main function MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 003 169 Fig. 3-88
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Type of bay 220 001 Fig. 3-43
Configuration of a bay type.

MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062 Fig. 3-43
If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type No.
will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number '0'
will be displayed.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : Ti me s ync . ti me -ou t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out 103 212
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary

source.
Fault Recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
7-56 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling a protection
or control function
The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by
including the relevant protection or control functions in the device configuration and
cancelling all others (removing them from the device configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control function:
The protection or control function in question must be disabled.

None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled may be
assigned to a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to a binary
output or an LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled are selected in a list setting.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to other signals
by way of an ‘m out of n’ parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value

belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: ‘LIMIT’).
Distance Protection DIST: Function group DIST 056 014
Cancelling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the

Power swing blocking PSB: Function group PSB 056 001
Cancelling function group PSB or including it in the configuration.

If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: Function group MCMON 056 015
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration. If the

Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: Function group BUOC 056 002
protection (BUOC)
Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Function group SOTF 056 003
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)
Protective Signaling PSIG: Function group PSIG 056 004
Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the

Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Function group ARC 056 005
Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the

Automatic Synchronism ASC: Function group ASC 056 006
Check
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: Function group GFSC 056 011
protection
(This address / function group
is available only with the
P435.)
Cancelling function group GFSC or including it in the configuration.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GSCSG: Function group GSCSG 056 028
P435.)
Cancelling function group GSCSG or including it in the configuration.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008
protection
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Function group IDMT 056 009
Protection
Cancelling function group IDMTx or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Function group GFDSS 056 012
Determination Using Steady-

State Values
Cancelling function group GFDSS or including it in the configuration. If the
7-58 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Function group GFTRP 056 016
Cancelling function group GFTRP or including it in the configuration. If the

Ground fault protective GFSIG: Function group GFSIG 056 018
signaling
Cancelling function group GFSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
Transient Ground Fault TGFD: Function group TGFD 056 019
Direction Determination
Cancelling function group TGFD or including it in the configuration. If the
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Function group THERM 056 023
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Function group V<> 056 010
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Function group f<> 056 033
Protection
Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the
Power Directional Protection P<>: Function group P<> 056 045
Cancelling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Function group CBF 056 007
Protection
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Function group LIMIT 056 025
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)
Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC 056 017
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047
DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097
DEV03: Function group DEV03 210 147
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the

configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden.
DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034
Setting for the function type of the signal.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
Setting for the information number of the signal.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
Setting the information number of the command.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
7-60 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Interlocking Logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the

Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004 Fig. 3-394
CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009
Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.

If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007
Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration.

If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden..
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
PC link PC: Command blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-7
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC

interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. 003 086 Fig. 3-7
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. USER 003 172 Fig. 3-8
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 1.
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER 003 076 Fig: 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Command block. USER 103 172 Fig. 3-16
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 2.
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER 103 076 Fig. 3-16
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Fig. 3-30
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main function MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Fig. 3-58
Switching the device off-line or on-line.

MAIN: Test mode USER 003 012 Fig. 3-89
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom 010 030 Fig. 3-316,
3-342
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: Rotary field 010 049 Fig. 3-49
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.

(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field's direction, either
clockwise or anticlockwise.)
MAIN: Time tag 221 098
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time
tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse
edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating
data memory are made in chronological order or not.
7-62 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001 Fig. 3-45,

3-46
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 018 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002 Fig. 3-50
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim. 010 027 Fig. 3-51
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. 010 100 Fig. 3-52
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Inom device 010 003 Fig. 3-44
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom device 010 026 Fig. 3-44
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: Dynamic range I 031 082 Fig. 3-53,
3-115
Setting for the dynamic range of the phase current transformers as used by
the P43x.
'Highest range' dynamic range: IP = 100 Inom
'Sensitive range' dynamic range: IP = 25 Inom
Note: The lower the setting for dynamic range, the more accurately the
device will operate. However, make sure that the dynamic range
is set no lower than the maximum possible short-circuit current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009 Fig. 3-44
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec. 010 028 Fig. 3-44
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. 031 052 Fig. 3-44
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP 010 004 Fig. 3-44
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be 'Standard', if the P43x’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the
direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or –
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN 010 019 Fig. 3-44
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on

the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P43x’s 'Forward'
decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection
direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according to
Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the
setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Meas. direction P,Q 006 096 Fig. 3-53
This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured
operating values:
MAIN: Active power P prim. (004 050)
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. (004 052)
MAIN: Active power P p.u. (004 051)
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. (004 053)
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP 011 030 Fig. 3-45
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN 011 031 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the residual current is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V 011 032 Fig. 3-50
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG 011 033 Fig. 3-51
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is
displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref 011 034 Fig. 3-52
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the
measured operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic
synchronism check is displayed.
MAIN: Op. mode energy cnt. 010 138 Fig. 3-56
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy

output. 1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately).
2nd procedure: Data acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del 010 113 Fig. 3-45
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 005 248 Fig. 3-87
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 005 249 Fig. 3-87
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is enabled.
7-64 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 021 021 Fig. 3-61
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 021 022 Fig. 3-61
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 2 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Fig. 3-78
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 021 001 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 021 002 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2.
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 021 003 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 021 004 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.
MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 021 023
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2 021 024
Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time 015 067 Fig. 3-65
Setting for the duration of the close command.

MAIN: tCB,close 000 032
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power

systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic
synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only
possible if A SC : AR wi th tC B PSx = 'yes’ or A S C : MC w i th t C B
PSx = 'yes’.
MAIN: RC inh.by CB cl. 015 042 Fig. 3-65
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as

soon as the "Circuit breaker closed" signal starts.
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Fig. 3-62
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the

messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is
blocked in both cases.
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057 Fig. 3-82
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output

enable.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200 Fig. 3-40

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 221 206
Setting for the debouncing time.

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 221 207
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.

MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202 Fig. 3-40
MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205
MAIN: Change of state gr.3 221 208
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230
Setting for the command duration for a long command.

MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231
Setting for the command duration for a short command.

MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control

commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065 Fig. 3-43
When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to
control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to
control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal
continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from
the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status
signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the
control process of motor driven switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010 Fig. 3-81
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external

protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
7-66 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012 Fig. 3-81
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form
the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013 Fig. 3-81
Definition of the binary signal used by the P43x to signal the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050 Fig. 3-81
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an

external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024 Fig. 3-81
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052 Fig. 3-66
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group

signal).
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-90
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local

control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER 003 060 Fig. 3-90
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.

PSS: Keep time 003 063 Fig. 3-90
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
Self-Monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Fig. 3-91
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals

'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention 021 018 Page: 3-136
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
Fault Recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-110
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data
acquisition.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time 003 078 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time 003 079 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)
Fault Recording FT_RC: Max. recording time 003 075 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Distance Protection DIST: General enable USER 031 073 Fig. 3-113
Enabling or disabling the distance protection function.

DIST: CVT stabilization 010 031 Fig. 3-125
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.
Power swing blocking PSB: General enable USER 014 050 Fig. 3-158
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.

PSB: Operate value 014 054 Fig. 3-158,
3-161
The threshold operate value setting for the blocking function is a
percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Operating mode 014 091
This setting defines whether a power swing detection is based on

impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change
(Delta S).
PSB: Operate delay 014 052 Fig. 3-158,
3-161
Setting for the operate delay.
PSB: Release delay 014 053 Fig. 3-158,
3-161
Setting for the release delay (reset time).
PSB: Operate value, trip 014 059 Fig. 3-162
The threshold operate value setting for the power swing blocking is a
percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling
interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling
interval.
PSB: Operate delay, trip 014 063 Fig. 3-162

PSB: R 014 060 Fig. 3-159
PSB: X 014 061 Fig. 3-159
PSB: α 014 062 Fig. 3-159
Setting for the power swing polygon.

PSB: Fct. assign. block. 012 017 Fig. 3-161
Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present.

PSB: Max. blocking time 014 055 Fig. 3-161
Time limit of the blocking effect.
7-68 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
PSB: Delta T 014 090
Setting for the timer stage for operating mode P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e =

Mode Delta Z.
PSB: Perm. no. stab. PS 006 027
Threshold value for the stable power swing counter.

PSB: Perm. no. OOS 006 028
Threshold value for the instable power swing counter.

PSB: IP> 014 058 Fig. 3-161
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
PSB: Ineg> 014 057 Fig. 3-161
If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is

cancelled without time delay.
PSB: IN> 014 056 Fig. 3-161
If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled

without time delay.
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: General enable USER 014 001 Fig. 3-164
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

MCMON: Current monitoring 014 006 Fig. 3-164
This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be

monitored.
MCMON: Ineg> 014 002 Fig. 3-164
Setting for operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the

current-measuring circuit).
MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon. 014 007 Fig. 3-165
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.

MCMON: Operate delay 017 011 Fig. 3-165
Setting for the operate delay after which the 'Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty' signals
will be issued.
MCMON: FF, V enabled USER 014 009 Fig. 3-166
Enabling or disabling the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function.

MCMON: Vpos<, FF 031 053 Fig. 3-166
Setting for the Vpos< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Vneg>, FF 031 056 Fig. 3-166
Setting for the Vneg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Vneg<, FF 031 054 Fig. 3-168
Setting for the Vneg< operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Ineg>, FF 031 057 Fig. 3-166
Setting for the Ineg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.

MCMON: Operate delay FF, V 031 058 Fig. 3-167
Setting for the operate delay of fuse failure monitoring.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)
MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER 014 013 Fig. 3-168
Enabling or disabling the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference

voltage Vref.
MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref 014 012 Fig. 3-168
Setting for the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference
voltage Vref.
Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: General enable USER 014 011 Fig. 3-169,
protection (BUOC) 3-170
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
BUOC: Operating mode 014 000 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode.
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: General enable USER 011 068 Fig. 3-171
Enabling or disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.

SOTF: Operating mode 011 061 Fig. 3-171
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is
running, a general starting will lead to a trip command ("trip with starting") or
if the measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone
extension factor: D I S T : k z e H S R P S x ("trip with extension").
SOTF: Manual close timer 011 060 Fig. 3-171
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
Protective Signaling PSIG: General enable USER 015 004 Fig. 3-172
Enabling or disabling the protective signaling.
Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: General enable USER 015 060 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
Enabling or disabling the auto-reclosing control.
Automatic Synchronism ASC: General enable USER 018 000 Fig. 3-239
Check Enabling or disabling the automatic synchronism check.
ASC: Transm.cycle,meas.v. 101 212 Fig. 3-250
Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: General enable USER 018 060 Fig. 3-252
protection Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
(This address / function group GFSC: IN> 018 063 Fig. 3-253
is available only with the Setting for the operate value of the residual current.
P435.)
GFSC: VNG> 018 062 Fig. 3-253
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
Note: If an electronic zero-power directional protection relay (SUR) is

replaced by the ground fault (short-circuit) protection function, the operate
value VNG> is obtained by multiplying the V0 setting of the device by a
factor of 0.07.
(SUR: Electronic zero-power directional protection relay)
7-70 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
GFSC: Angle phiG 018 061 Fig. 3-262
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
GFSC: Start. oper. delay 018 064 Fig. 3-253
Setting for the operate delay of starting.

Note: This setting corresponds to setting t1 of the electronic zero-power
directional protection relay (SUR).
GFSC: Start. releas. delay 018 065 Fig. 3-253
Setting for the release delay of the starting.

GFSC: t1 (forward) 018 066 Fig. 3-262
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'forward'
decision.
GFSC: t2 (backward) 018 067 Fig. 3-262
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'backward'
(reverse) decision.
GFSC: t3 (non-directional) 018 068 Fig. 3-262
Setting for the operate delay of the non-directional trip signal.

Note: This setting corresponds to setting t2-t1 of the electronic zero-
power directional protection relay (SUR).
GFSC: Criteria tS active 018 071 Fig. 3-262
This setting defines the direction of time-voltage protection tripping.

GFSC: Operating mode tS 018 080 Fig. 3-256
This setting specifies whether the voltage-dependent or current-dependent

tripping time characteristic shall apply.
GFSC: Iref,N 018 076 Fig. 3-261
Setting for the reference current.

GFSC: Characteristic N 018 078 Fig. 3-261
Setting for the tripping characteristic.

GFSC: Factor kt,N 018 077 Fig. 3-261
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GSCSG: General enable USER 023 069 Fig. 3-265
protective signaling Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
is available only with the GSCSG: Operating mode 023 079 Fig. 3-270
P435.) Setting for the operating mode of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling.
GSCSG: Channel mode 023 078 Fig. 3-266,
3-268, 3-270,
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent 3-272, 3-274
communication channels or with a common communication channel.
Note: Operation with a common communication channel is only
possible, if the same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The
correct assignment of signals to the functions must be done by setting the
time delays appropriately.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)
GSCSG: Trip mode 023 088 Fig. 3-273
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip

and whether an HSR shall be triggered.
GSCSG: Tripping time 023 075 Fig. 3-267
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release
scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating
GSCSG with the other protection functions.
GSCSG: Release time send 023 076 Fig: 3-270,
3-271, 3-275
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground
fault (short-circuit) protection has dropped out.
GSCSG: tBlock 023 077 Fig. 3-269
Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit)

protection signaling in the event of a change in fault direction.
GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir. 023 089 Fig. 3-271
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in
the event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit)
protection or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward
decision.
GSCSG: Echo on receive 023 080 Fig. 3-274
This setting determines whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection

signaling operates with or without echo.
Note: Use of the echo only makes sense if the signal comparison
release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
GSCSG: Operate delay echo 023 081 Fig. 3-274
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.

GSCSG: Pulse duration echo 023 082 Fig. 3-274
Setting for echo pulse duration.

GSCSG: tBlock echo 023 083 Fig. 3-274
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a
change in fault direction.
GSCSG: Weak infeed trip 023 084 Fig. 3-272
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.
Note: Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal
comparison release scheme has been selected as the operating
mode.
GSCSG: Op.delay weak infeed 023 087 Fig. 3-272
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.

GSCSG: Frequency monitoring 023 085 Fig. 3-268
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be

monitored.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: General enable USER 031 068 Fig. 3-276
protection Enabling or disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
7-72 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: General enable USER 017 096 Fig. 3-287
Protection Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: General enable USER 016 060 Fig. 3-299
Determination Using Steady- Enabling or disabling ground fault direction determination by steady-state
State Values values.
GFDSS: Operating mode 016 090 Fig. 3-299
This setting specifies whether steady-state power evaluation or steady-state

current evaluation will be performed.
Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: General enable USER 014 005 Fig. 3-313,
3-314
Disabling and enabling ground fault protection signaling.
Ground fault protective GFSIG: General enable USER 016 078 Fig. 3-315
signaling
Disabling or enabling ground fault protection signaling.
Transient Ground Fault TGFD: General enable USER 016 040 Fig. 3-316
Direction Determination
Enabling or disabling the transient ground fault direction determination.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: General enable USER 022 050 Fig. 3-323
Enabling or disabling the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Operating mode 022 063 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection.
Time-Voltage Protection V<>: General enable USER 023 030 Fig. 3-328
Enabling or disabling the time-voltage protection function.
Over-/Underfrequency f<>: General enable USER 023 031 Fig. 3-338

Protection Enabling or disabling the over-/underfrequency protection function.
f<>: Selection meas. volt 018 202 Fig. 3-339
Setting for the voltage that is used for frequency measurement.

f<>: Evaluation time 018 201 Fig. 3-340
Setting the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
f<>: Undervolt. block. V< 018 200 Fig. 3-340
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below
this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Power Directional Protection P<>: General enable USER 014 220 Fig. 3-343
Enabling or disabling the power directional protection function.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: General enable USER 022 080 Fig. 3-357
Protection Enable/disable the circuit breaker failure protection function.
CBF: Start with man. trip 022 154 Fig. 3-361,
3-362
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux. 022 159 Fig. 3-361,
3-362
Selection of trip signals - assigned to Gen. trip command 1 - for which, in
addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated.
CBF: tCBF 011 067
Setting for the operate delay at the end of which the ‘Circuit breaker failure’
signal is issued.
CBF: I< 022 160 Fig. 3-359,
3-361, 3-362,
3-368, 3-369
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
(This address is available CBF: Trip 1p 022 163 Fig. 3-364
only with the P435.) Setting to 'Yes' allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. Then a
1-pole general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF (see section "CBF 1-
pole operating mode").
(This address is available CBF: t1 1p 022 164 Fig. 3-364
only with the P435.) Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 1-pole operating mode.
CBF: t1 3p 022 165 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
CBF: t2 022 166 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1 022 167 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2 022 168 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1 022 169 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2 022 170 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
7-74 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
CBF: Delay/starting trig. 022 155 Fig. 3-367
The signal CBF : Tr ip s ig na l is issued when this timer stage’s time

duration has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB 022 171 Fig. 3-368
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal
from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are
recognized through the current criterion (see section "Fault behind CB
protection").
CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv 022 172 Fig. 3-369
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: General enable USER 014 010 Fig. 3-370
Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.

LIMIT: I> 014 004 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I>> 014 020 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI> 014 031 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>> 014 032 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I< 014 021 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I<< 014 022 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI< 014 033 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<< 014 034 Fig. 3-370
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG> 014 023 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>> 014 024 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG> 014 035 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tVPG>> 014 036 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG< 014 025 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<< 014 026 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG< 014 037 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<< 014 038 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP> 014 027 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>> 014 028 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP> 014 039 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>> 014 040 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP< 014 029 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP<< 014 030 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP< 014 041 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP<< 014 042 Fig. 3-371
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG> 014 043 Fig. 3-372
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>> 014 044 Fig. 3-372
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
7-76 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tVNG> 014 045 Fig. 3-372
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>> 014 046 Fig. 3-372
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: Vref> 042 144 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V, i.e. ordering option Vnom
= 50 to 130 V {5 poles} for ASC).
LIMIT: Vref>> 042 145 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref> 042 148 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
LIMIT: tVref>> 042 149 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
LIMIT: Vref< 042 146 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: Vref<< 042 147 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref< 042 150 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref<< 042 151 Fig. 3-374
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-77

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig. 3-373
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig. 3-375
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
Logic LOGIC: General enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-377
Enable/disable the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig. 3-376,
3-383
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig. 3-383
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
7-78 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 030 000 Fig. 3-377

LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 030 004
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 030 036
These settings assign functions to the outputs.

LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 030 001 Fig. 3-377
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 030 005
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-79

7 Settings
(continued)
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-377
LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 030 006
Settings for timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
7-80 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-377

Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-383
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 002
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-81

7 Settings
(continued)
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-383
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 019
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-82 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000
CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005
Selection of the command designation.

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002 Fig. 3-394
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007
Selection of the command operating mode.
Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008
Selection of the signal designation.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-83

7 Settings
(continued)
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001 Fig. 3-395

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009
Selection of the signal operating mode.

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003 Fig. 3-395
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002 Fig. 3-395
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090
The logic '1' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.
7-84 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets
Main function MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078 Fig: 3-114,
3-115, 3-116,
3-117, 3-169,
3-170, 3-214,
3-232, 3-247
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.
(This address is available MAIN: 3p tr.if HSR off PSx 015 065 024 034 024 094 025 054 Fig. 3-74
only with the P435.) This setting defines whether single-pole trip commands shall be converted
to a three-pole trip command when ARC is disabled.
MAIN: Ground starting PSx 001 249 001 250 001 251 002 001
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-

linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
MAIN: Phase prio. 2pG PSx 010 041 001 082 001 083 001 084 Fig. 3-125
The selection of measured values in the event of two-phase grounded faults

is a function of the set phase priority.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx 010 040 001 079 001 080 001 081 Fig. 3-123
For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground

starting or another phase starting needs to be transfer-tripped. The user
may choose to always trip the ground starting function or - as a function of
current magnitude - to trip ground or phase starting. See the section
entitled Starting Logic in Chapter 3 for more information.
MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090 Fig. 3-59
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.

MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087 Fig. 3-59
Setting for the current threshold for disablion of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: Rush I2fn/Ifn PSx 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093 Fig. 3-59
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Line length PSx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008 Fig. 3-108
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015 Fig. 3-108
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Start data acqu. PSx 010 011 010 042 010 043 010 044 Fig. 3-106
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault
data should take place.
FT_DA: Outp. flt.locat. PSx 010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035 Fig. 3-106
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-85

7 Settings
(continued)
Distance Protection DIST: I>> PSx 010 054 010 074 010 094 011 014 Fig. 3-114
Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting.

DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx 010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028 Fig. 3-117
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance

starting is enabled.
Note: This setting is effective only when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r.PSx 010 119 010 120 010 121 010 122 Fig. 3-117
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance

starting is enabled.
Note: This setting is effective only when "Dynamic range I" is set to
'Sensitive range'.
DIST: Operat. mode V< PSx 010 067 010 087 011 007 011 027 Fig. 3-118
Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting.

DIST: V< PSx 010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting.

DIST: Operat. mode Z< PSx 010 066 010 086 011 006 011 026 Fig. 3-119
Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.

DIST: Xfw PSx 010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.

DIST: Rfw,PG PSx 010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-

ground loops.
DIST: Rfw,PP PSx 010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-

phase loops.
DIST: ß PSx 010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023 Fig. 3-122
Angle setting for load blinding during underimpedance starting.

DIST: Zfw,PG PSx 010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for

phase-to-ground loops.
DIST: Zfw,PP PSx 010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for

phase-to-phase loops.
DIST: Zbw/Zfw PSx 010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013 Fig. 3-122
Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse)

direction.
7-86 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Z evaluation PSx 025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033 Fig. 3-122
This setting determines whether the P43x will carry out the starting
impedance calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase current
corrected by the set ground factor or using twice the phase current.
Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in
low-impedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in
healthy lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is
calculated by the distance measuring system using solely the phase current
corrected by the set ground factor.
DIST: IN> high range PSx 010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015 Fig. 3-115
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
Note: This setting is effective only when Highest range is set for
‘Dynamic range I’.
DIST: IN> sens. range PSx 010 123 010 124 010 125 010 126 Fig. 3-115
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
'Sensitive range'.
DIST: tIN> PSx 010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017 Fig. 3-115
In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN>

should be set so as to avoid erroneous ground starting resulting from
residual current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-to-
ground capacitances.
Note: For single-pole ungrounded faults, starting proceeds does not
occur until tIN> has elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that
transferred starting does not anticipate starting in another phase.
DIST: VNG> PSx 010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016 Fig. 3-115
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
DIST: VNG>> PSx 010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022 Fig. 3-115
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
DIST: tVNG>> PSx 010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021 Fig. 3-115
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger.

DIST: Characteristic PSx 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097 Fig. 3-130
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.

DIST: Op. mode zone 4 PSx 012 000 012 050 013 000 013 050 Fig. 3-141,
3-155
Zone 4 can be used as a special zone. This setting defines the use of
zone 4.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-87

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: X1 (polygon) PSx 012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx 012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx 012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon

characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
DIST: α1 (polygon) PSx 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063 Fig. 3-138
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 6 in the R direction (resistance line).
DIST: σ1 (polygon) PSx 072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086 Fig. 3-138
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon
of impedance zones 1 to 4 in the X direction (reactance line).
DIST: Z1 (circle) PSx 012 042 073 091 074 091 075 091 Fig. 3-134
Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular

characteristic (in secondary values).
7-88 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: α1 (circle) PSx 072 090 073 090 074 090 075 090 Fig. 3-134
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active.
In this case, the setting at this address determines the angle where arc
compensation becomes active in zones 1 to 6.
DIST: Arc comp. circle PSx 012 038 012 090 012 091 012 092 Fig. 3-131
Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is

selected.
DIST: Direction N1 PSx 012 023 012 073 013 023 013 073 Fig. 3-142
This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to

6 or final timer stage 7 measure – relative to the basic measuring direction
determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP.
DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx 010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118 Fig. 3-128,
3-129
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the
measured fault angle is used for the direction determination and the
impedance calculation.
DIST: t1 PSx 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078 Fig. 3-139,
3-140
DIST: t2 PSx 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t3 PSx 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t4 PSx 012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t5 PSx 012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t6 PSx 012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t7 PSx 012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143 Fig. 3-141
DIST: t8 PSx 012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147 Fig. 3-141
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional

and non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-89

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)·X1
R1,zeKU = (kzeHSR)·R1
X1,zeHSR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,zeHSR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:

Z1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)·Z1
The zone extension HSR is controlled by
Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective signaling
is not ready
A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready
Switch on to fault protection
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
DIST: kze,PP HSR PSx 012 035 012 085 013 035 013 085 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1
reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following
applies to the measurement:
X1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)·X1
R1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)·R1
X1,zeHSR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,zeHSR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor

Z1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)·Z1
Zone extension is controlled by the following factors:
Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective
signaling is not ready
A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready
An appropriately configured binary signal input
7-90 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops.
The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and
resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the
measurement:
X1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·X1
R1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·R1
X1,zeTDR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,zeTDR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor

Z1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·Z1
Z1,zeTDR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor

Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as
another TDR is permitted.
DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx 012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1
reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following
applies to the measurement:
X1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·X1
R1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·R1
X1,zeTDR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,zeTDR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor

Z1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)·Z1
Z1,zeTDR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor

Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as
another TDR is permitted.
DIST: t1,ze PSx 026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025 Fig. 3-139,
3-140
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-91

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Abs. value kG PSx 012 037 012 087 013 037 013 087 Fig. 3-121
Setting for the absolute value of the complex ground factor kG.
Z 0 − Zpos
kG =
3 ⋅ Zpos
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance
kG =
( X 0 − X pos )2 + (R0 − Rpos )2
3 ⋅ Rpos 2 + X pos 2
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
DIST: Angle kG PSx 012 036 012 086 013 036 013 086 Fig. 3-121
Setting for the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor,
kG.
Z 0 − Zpos
kG =
3 ⋅ Zpos
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance
kG =
( X 0 − X pos )2 + (R0 − Rpos )2
3 ⋅ Rpos 2 + X pos 2
X 0 − X pos X pos
k G angle = arc tan − arc tan
R0 − Rpos Rpos
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
7-92 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
(This address is available DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx 011 050 011 051 011 052 011 053 Fig. 3-157
only with the P435.) For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of
phase-to-ground faults shall be single-pole or three-pole.
Note: When the P43x is being operated with ARC, which will carry out
a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting
here should be 1-pole.
(This address is available DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx 011 054 011 055 011 056 011 057 Fig. 3-157
only with the P435.) For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of
phase-to-phase faults shall be single-pole or three-pole. Where a single-
pole trip has been selected, there is a choice as to whether the trip in the
event of a two-pole starting should be for the leading or the trailing phase.
Note: When the P43x is being operated with ARC, which will carry out
a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting
here should be 1-pole.
Power swing blocking PSB: Enabled PSx 015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking
function is enabled.
Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: I> PSx 010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018 Fig. 3-169,
Operate value setting for the phase currents of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
BUOC: tI> PSx 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
BUOC: IN> PSx 010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note: This setting is only active if the setting at
MAIN : N eutra l- po in t tre a tm. is low-impedance grounding.
BUOC: tIN> PSx 010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
Protective Signaling PSIG: Enabled PSx 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017 Fig. 3-172
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is

enabled.
PSIG: Operating mode PSx 015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020 Fig. 3-178
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.

PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx 015 036 015 037 015 040 015 041 Fig. 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal
as a function of direction or distance.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-93

7 Settings
(continued)
PSIG: Oper. mode trip PSx 015 107 015 108 015 113 015 114 Fig: 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a
function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Tripping time PSx 015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023 Fig. 3-173
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
PSIG: Release t. send PSx 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021 Fig: 3-175,
3-180, 3-181,
3-182, 3-183,
3-185, 3-186,
3-188, 3-189,
3-191, 3-192,
3-194, 3-195,
3-199
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
PSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 015 012 024 051 025 011 025 071 Fig. 3-194,
3-195
This setting defines whether the transmitting relay will be operated in
energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized
(NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle'), i.e., 'Transm.relay make co' or
'Transm.relay break c', respectively.
Note: This setting is active only in the 'DC loop' operating mode.
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022 Fig. 3-203,
3-204
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or
without echo.
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028 Fig. 3-203,
3-204
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx 015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029 Fig. 3-203,
3-204
Setting for echo pulse duration.
PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx 015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027 Fig. 3-202
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.
PSIG: V< weak infeed PSx 015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026 Fig. 3-202
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.

PSIG: tV< PSx 015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025 Fig. 3-202
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.

PSIG: tBlock PSx 015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030 Fig. 3-177
Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
7-94 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
PSIG: 3ended line prot PSx 006 039 006 046 006 047 006 048 Fig. 3-174
This setting determines whether the P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T and

P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T signals are to be linked in an 'AND' (setting
to 'Yes') or an 'OR' gate (setting to 'No')
PSIG: Frequency monit. PSx 015 025 024 011 024 071 025 031 Fig. 3-176
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be

monitored.
Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Enabled PSx 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.
ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044 Fig. 3-208,
3-222
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx 015 100 015 101 015 102 015 103 Fig. 3-206,
3-220
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only
TDR, or only a test HSR.
ARC: Operative time 1 PSx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Setting for the operative time 1.
ARC: Operative time 2 PSx 015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062 Fig. 3-236
Setting for operative time 2.

(This address is available ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045 Fig. 3-225
only with the P435.) The operating mode setting defines which of the following reclosure types is
permitted.
TDR only permitted
HSR/TDR permitted
Test HSR only permit
Note: If a single-pole HSR is to be carried out, then the user must
select the 1-pole setting at either
D IST : Tr ip zo ne 1 PG or D IST : Tr ip z one 1 PP.
ARC: Trip time HSR PSx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060 Fig. 3-210,
3-224
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a HSR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
(This address is available ARC: Dead time 1p PSx 015 055 024 029 024 089 025 049 Fig. 3-236
only with the P435.) Dead time setting for a single-pole HSR.
ARC: Dead time 3p PSx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
ARC: Dead time max PSx 015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063 Fig. 3-236
Setting for the maximum dead time.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-95

7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Mon. PSIG recv. PSx 015 082 024 050 025 010 025 070 Fig. 3-217,
3-235
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is
monitored during the dead time.
ARC: Zone ext. f. HSR PSx 015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053 Fig. 3-216,
3-234
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by
the zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and
while the operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the ‘0’
setting, only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: Trip time TDR PSx 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061 Fig. 3-210,
3-224
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or
the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the
BUOC operating mode is set accordingly – if a TDR is permitted and
protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: TDR dead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Setting for the TDR dead time.
ARC: Zone ext. f. TDR PSx 015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059 Fig. 3-216,
3-234
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended
prior to a TDR.
ARC: Enable RRC PSx 015 085 024 044 025 004 025 064 Fig. 3-214,
3-232
Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.
ARC: tRRC PSx 015 086 024 045 025 005 025 065 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).
ARC: V> RRC PSx 015 087 024 046 025 006 025 066 Fig. 3-214,
3-232
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC
to be carried out.
ARC: Reclaim time PSx 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Setting for the reclaim time.
ARC: Block. time int. PSx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041 Fig. 3-209,
3-223
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by the P43x.
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052 Fig. 3-209,
3-223
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
7-96 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Zone ext.dur. RC PSx 015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067 Fig. 3-216,
3-234
This setting defines whether the following takes place:
A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR
that is not synchronism-checked.
Zone extension will occur with each reclose command.
ARC: Parallel trip PSx 015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
This setting defines whether the trip commands of a protection device
operating together with the P43x will affect operation of the ARC function.
For further details see the section entitled ‘Parallel Blocking’ in Chapter 3.
Automatic Synchronism ASC: Enabled PSx 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023 Fig. 3-239
Check This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism
check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: CB assignment PSx 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134 Fig. 3-249
This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
ASC: System integrat. PSx 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138 Fig. 3-249
This setting defines whether ASC will operate in 'Autom. synchron. check' or
'Autom. synchr. control' mode.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030 Fig. 3-240
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031 Fig. 3-240
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for RRC PSx 018 006 077 033 078 033 079 033 Fig. 3-240
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required

before reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032 Fig. 3-240
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by

ASC.
ASC: Operative time PSx 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034 Fig. 3-248
Setting for the operative time for ASC.

ASC: Measurement loop PSx 031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044 Fig. 3-238
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage,

must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to
phases A & B The measurement loop should be set to 'Loop A-B'.
ASC: Phi offset PSx 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042 Fig. 3-246,
3-247
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
ASC: AR op. mode PSx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028 Fig. 3-246
Auto-reclosing control:
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-97

7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: AR with tCB PSx 000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032 Fig. 3-244
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043 Fig. 3-244
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx.
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040 Fig. 3-244
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx.
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041 Fig. 3-244
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035 Fig. 3-246
Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036 Fig. 3-246
Setting for the maximum differential voltage between measured and
reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta f max PSx 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038 Fig. 3-246
Setting for the maximum differential frequency between measured and
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037 Fig. 3-246
Setting for the maximum differential angle between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
7-98 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039 Fig. 3-246
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
ASC: MC op. mode PSx 000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059 Fig. 3-247
Manual close command:

Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: MC with tCB PSx 000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105

In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes
ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx 000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063 Fig. 3-245

This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx 000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067 Fig. 3-245

reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
ASC: MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx.
ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx 000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071 Fig. 3-245

reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
ASC: MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx.
ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx 000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 Fig. 3-245

which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx 000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055 Fig. 3-247

Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism
checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx 000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083 Fig. 3-247

Setting for the maximum differential voltage between measured and
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-99

7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: MC delta f max PSx 000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088 Fig. 3-247

Setting for the maximum differential frequency between measured and
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx 000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093 Fig. 3-247

Setting for the maximum differential angle between measured and reference
voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx 000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101 Fig. 3-247

which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: Enabled PSx 018 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 Fig. 3-252
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-
(This address / function group circuit) protection is enabled.
P435.)
Ground fault (short-circuit) GSCSG: Enabled PSx 023 071 023 072 023 073 023 074 Fig. 3-265
protective signaling This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-
(This address / function group circuit) protection signaling is enabled.
P435.)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Enabled PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098 Fig. 3-276
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: I> PSx 072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007 Fig. 3-277
Setting for operate value I>.

DTOC: I>> PSx 072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008 Fig. 3-277
Setting for operate value I>>.

DTOC: I>>> PSx 072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009 Fig. 3-277
Setting for operate value I>>>.

DTOC: I>>>> PSx 072 010 073 010 074 010 075 010 Fig. 3-277
Setting for operate value I>>>>.

DTOC: tI> PSx 072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019 Fig. 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>.

DTOC: tI>> PSx 072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020 Fig. 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>.

DTOC: tI>>> PSx 072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021 Fig. 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>.

DTOC: tI>>>> PSx 072 022 073 022 074 022 075 022 Fig. 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>>.
7-100 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx 017 055 073 042 074 042 075 042 Fig. 3-284
Setting for the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
DTOC: tIN,interm. PSx 017 056 073 038 074 038 075 038 Fig. 3-284
Setting for the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground
faults.
DTOC: Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx 017 057 073 039 074 039 075 039 Fig. 3-284
Setting for the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.

DTOC: Ineg> PSx 072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011 Fig. 3-278
Setting for operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>> PSx 072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012 Fig. 3-278
Setting for operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx 072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013 Fig. 3-278
Setting for operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>>> PSx 072 014 073 014 074 014 075 014 Fig. 3-278
Setting for operate value Ineg>>>>.

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg> PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negative-
sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>> PSx 072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>

DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx 072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>

DTOC: tIneg>>>> PSx 072 026 073 026 074 026 075 026 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>>

DTOC: Evaluation IN PSx 073 189 073 190 073 202 073 219 Fig. 3-279
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
DTOC: IN> PSx 072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015 Fig. 3-280
Setting for operate value IN> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: IN>> PSx 072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016 Fig. 3-280
Setting for operate value IN>> (IN = residual current).

DTOC: IN>>> PSx 072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017 Fig. 3-280
Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN = residual current).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-101

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: IN>>>> PSx 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018 Fig. 3-280
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Chapter 'Technical Data').
DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.

DTOC: tIN>> PSx 072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.

DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.

DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx 072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.

DTOC: VNG> PSx 010 045 010 060 010 080 010 139 Fig. 3-282
This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement
voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
DTOC: Angle phiG PSx 004 092 004 247 004 248 004 249 Fig. 3-282
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
DTOC: Direction tIN> PSx 072 032 072 042 072 082 072 091 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Direction tIN>> PSx 072 033 072 043 072 083 072 092 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Direction tIN>>> PSx 072 034 072 044 072 084 072 093 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Direction tIN>>>>PSx 072 035 072 045 072 085 072 094 Fig. 3-283
The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement

direction of the residual current stages.
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Enabled PSx 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000 Fig. 3-287
Protection
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent
protection is enabled (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,P PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).

IDMT: Characterist. P PSx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Ch. factor kt,P PSx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current
system).
IDMT: Release P PSx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Direction P PSx 072 062 073 062 074 062 075 062 Fig. 3-298
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT

protection function (phase current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. P PSx 072 065 073 065 074 065 075 065 Fig. 3-298
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance

protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (phase current system).
7-102 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. P PSx 072 068 073 068 074 068 075 068 Fig. 3-298
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event
of measuring voltage failure (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,neg PSx 072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Character. neg. PSx 072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Factor kt,neg PSx 072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT: Release neg. PSx 072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
IDMT: Direction neg. PSx 072 063 073 063 074 063 075 063 Fig. 3-298

protection function (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Dir. meas. neg PSx 072 066 073 066 074 066 075 066 Fig. 3-298

protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (negative-sequence current
system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt.neg PSx 072 069 073 069 074 069 075 069 Fig. 3-298
of measuring voltage failure (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx 073 222 073 239 073 245 073 255 Fig. 3-288
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents
or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
IDMT: Iref,N (meas.) PSx 001 169 001 170 001 171 001 172
IDMT: Iref,N (calc.) PSx 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).

Depending on the setting at ID M T : Eva lu a ti on IN PSx, either
IDMT: Iref,N (c alc .) PSx or IDMT: Iref,N (meas .) PSx is used.
The measured base current allows lower settings.
IDMT: Factor KI,N PSx 001 173 001 174 001 175 001 176
The set factor ID M T : Factor Ire f,IN is multiplied by the reference

quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the
current in the residual current measuring system.
IDMT: Characterist. N PSx 072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT: Min. trip time N PSx 072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079
Setting for the minimum trip time of the residual current measuring system
This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is
exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless
of the value of the current.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-103

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Factor kt,N PSx 072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current
system).
IDMT: Release N PSx 072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061 Fig. 3-294
Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT: Direction N PSx 072 064 073 064 074 064 075 064 Fig. 3-298

protection function (residual current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. N PSx 072 067 073 067 074 067 075 067 Fig. 3-298

protection function will be used or the direction decision formed from the
negative-sequence current and voltage (residual current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. N PSx 072 076 073 076 074 076 075 076 Fig. 3-298
of measuring voltage failure (residual current system).
IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx 002 193 002 194 002 195 002 196
Setting for parameter Xneg to correct the measuring voltage (see sections
IDMT, GFSC, "Improved directional measurement for series compensated
line applications").
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Enabled PSx 001 050 001 051 001 052 001 053 Fig. 3-299
determination using This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFDSS function is
steady-state values enabled.
GFDSS: Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx 016 063 000 236 000 237 000 238 Fig: 3-301,
3-307, 3-310
Setting for the operating mode of the ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values. The following settings are possible: The following
settings are possible:
"cos ϕ circuit" for resonant-grounded systems.
"sin ϕ circuit" for isolated neutral-point systems.
GFDSS: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 083 001 011 001 012 001 013 Fig. 3-300
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for direction determination: The displacement voltage calculated from the
phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90
transformer of the P43x.
GFDSS: Measurem. direc. PSx 016 070 001 002 001 003 001 004 Fig. 3-301,
3-307
This setting defines the measuring direction for the 'forward' or 'backward'
decision.
GFDSS: VNG> PSx 016 062 000 233 000 234 000 235 Fig. 3-301,
3-307
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
GFDSS: tVNG> PSx 016 061 000 230 000 231 000 232 Fig. 3-301,
3-307
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG> trigger.
GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas.) PSx 016 091 001 044 001 045 001 046 Fig. 3-301,
3-307
Setting for the frequency of the measured values evaluated in steady-state
power evaluation.
7-104 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
GFDSS: f/fnom (I meas.) PSx 016 092 001 047 001 048 001 049 Fig. 3-305
Setting for the frequency of the measured values evaluated in steady-state

current evaluation.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> LS PSx 016 064 000 239 000 240 000 241 Fig. 3-304
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx 016 065 000 242 000 243 000 244 Fig. 3-304
Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the line side direction.
Note: This setting is effective only in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx 016 066 000 245 000 246 000 247 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the forward
direction.
GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx 016 072 001 005 001 006 001 007 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the
forward direction.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> BS PSx 016 067 000 251 000 252 000 253 Fig. 3-304
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the 'BS' (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx 016 068 000 248 000 249 000 250 Fig. 3-304
Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the direction of the busbar
side.
Note: This setting is effective only in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx 016 069 000 254 000 255 001 001 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the backward
(reverse) direction.
GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx 016 073 001 008 001 009 001 010 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the
backward direction.
GFDSS: IN> PSx 016 093 001 017 001 018 001 019 Fig. 3-305
Setting for the operate value of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Operate delay IN PSx 016 094 001 020 001 021 001 022 Fig. 3-305
Setting for the operate delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Release delay IN PSx 016 095 001 023 001 024 001 025 Fig. 3-305
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of steady-state current evaluation.
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx 016 111 001 029 001 030 001 031 Fig. 3-310
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx 016 112 001 032 001 033 001 034 Fig. 3-310
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘BS’ (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-105

7 Settings
(continued)
GFDSS: Y(N)> PSx 016 113 001 035 001 036 001 037 Fig. 3-311
Setting for the operate value of the admittance for non-directional ground
fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance evaluation').
GFDSS: Phi offset PSx 016 110 001 026 001 027 001 028 Fig. 3-307
This setting is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system

transformers (in the admittance evaluation mode).
GFDSS: Oper.delay Y(N)> PSx 016 114 001 038 001 039 001 040 Fig. 3-311
Setting for the operate delay value of the admittance for non-directional
ground fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance evaluation').
GFDSS: Rel. delay Y(N)> PSx 016 115 001 041 001 042 001 043 Fig. 3-311
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the admittance for non-
directional ground fault determination (in operating mode 'admittance
evaluation').
Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Enabled PSx 001 135 001 148 001 149 001 150
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFTRP function is
enabled.
Ground fault protective GFSIG: Enabled PSx 001 134 001 136 001 137 001 138
signaling This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFSIG function is
enabled.
GFSIG: Operate delay PSx 016 076 001 142 001 143 001 144 Fig. 3-315
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal.

GFSIG: Rel. time send PSx 016 074 001 139 001 140 001 141 Fig. 3-315
Setting for the reset time of the send signal.

GFSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 016 077 001 145 001 146 001 147 Fig. 3-315
Setting for the send relay operating mode.
Transient Ground Fault TGFD: Enabled PSx 001 054 001 055 001 056 001 057 Fig. 3-316
Direction Determination This setting defines the parameter subset in which the TGFD function is
enabled.
TGFD: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 048 001 058 001 059 001 060 Fig. 3-317
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for evaluation: The displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a
voltage transformer assembly or the displacement voltage calculated from
the three phase-to-ground voltages.
TGFD: Measurem. direc. PSx 016 045 001 073 001 074 001 075 Fig. 3-318
The direction measurement of the transient ground fault direction

determination function depends on the connection of the measuring circuits.
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be
'Standard', if the P43x’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the
outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or – given a
connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to
be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
Note: The global setting at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s .
c i r c . I N does
not affect the direction determination feature of the transient
ground fault direction determination function.
7-106 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
TGFD: VNG> PSx 016 041 001 061 001 062 001 063 Fig. 3-318
Setting for the neutral-point displacement voltage threshold.

TGFD: Operate delay PSx 016 044 001 067 001 068 001 069 Fig. 3-318

TGFD: IN,p> PSx 016 042 001 064 001 065 001 066 Fig. 3-318
Setting for the residual current threshold. A peak value is evaluated.

TGFD: Buffer time PSx 016 043 001 070 001 071 001 072 Fig. 3-319
Setting for the signal buffer time for transient ground fault direction
determination.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Enabled PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig. 3-323
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload

THERM: Iref PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the reference current.

THERM: Factor kP PSx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running.
In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time
constant 1.
THERM: Max.object temp. PSx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max. cool. temp. PSx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

Note: This setting is only active if the coolant temperature is measured
via the PT 100 or 20 mA.
THERM: Select CTA PSx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig. 3-325
Selecting if and how the coolant temperature is measured: Via the PT100 or
the 20mA input.
THERM: Coolant temp. PSx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time
if coolant temperature is not measured.
THERM: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx 072 178 073 178 074 178 075 178 Fig. 3-325
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will
be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
THERM: Θ warning PSx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-107

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Θ trip PSx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.

Note: If the operating mode has been set to 'Absolute replica', the value
here will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is
hidden as far as the local control panel is concerned.
THERM: Hysteres. Θ,trip PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig. 3-326
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig. 3-326
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.
Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Enabled PSx 076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 Fig. 3-328
This setting defines the parameter subset in which V<> protection is

enabled.
V<>: Operating mode PSx 076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001 Fig. 3-329
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages ('Star' operating

mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages ('Delta' operating mode) will be
monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function,
the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/√3 in the
Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the
following example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
80 V (phase-to-phase):
OperateVal ue 80 V
Setting = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of

46.2 V (phase-to-phase):
OperateValue 46.2 V 46.2V ⋅ 3
Setting = = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V 100 V
3 3
V<>: I enable V< PSx 001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161
Setting the enable threshold for the minimum current monitor.

V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx 001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165
Activating the minimum current monitoring operating mode.

V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002 Fig. 3-335
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be

monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P43x or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig. 3-330
Setting for operate value V>.

V<>: V>> PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig. 3-330
Setting for operate value V>>.
7-108 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: tV> PSx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig. 3-330
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx 076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027 Fig. 3-330
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV>> PSx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig. 3-330
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig. 3-331
Setting for operate value V<.

V<>: V<< PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig. 3-331
Setting for operate value V<<.

V<>: tV< PSx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig. 3-331
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx 076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028 Fig. 3-331
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV<< PSx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig. 3-331
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: Vpos> PSx 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015 Fig. 3-333
Setting for operate value Vpos>.

V<>: Vpos>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016 Fig. 3-333
Setting for operate value Vpos>>.

V<>: tVpos> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017 Fig. 3-333
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.

V<>: tVpos>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018 Fig. 3-333
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.

V<>: Vpos< PSx 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019 Fig. 3-333
Setting for operate value Vpos<.

V<>: Vpos<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020 Fig. 3-333
Setting for operate value Vpos<<.

V<>: tVpos< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021 Fig. 3-333
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.

V<>: tVpos<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022 Fig. 3-333
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.

V<>: Vneg> PSx 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023 Fig. 3-334
Setting for operate value Vneg>.

V<>: Vneg>> PSx 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024 Fig. 3-334
Setting for operate value Vneg>>.

V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025 Fig. 3-334
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.

V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026 Fig. 3-334
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-109

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: VNG> PSx 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011 Fig. 3-336
Setting for operate value VNG>.

V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012 Fig. 3-336
Setting for operate value VNG>>.

V<>: tVNG> PSx 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013 Fig. 3-336
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.

V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014 Fig. 3-336
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.

V<>: Vref> PSx 007 064 007 071 007 075 007 079 Fig. 3-337
Setting for operate value Vref>.

V<>: Vref>> PSx 007 065 007 068 007 072 007 076 Fig. 3-337
Setting for operate value Vref>>.

V<>: tVref> PSx 007 066 007 069 007 073 007 077 Fig. 3-337
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>.

V<>: tVref>> PSx 007 067 007 070 007 074 007 078 Fig. 3-337
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>>.

V<>: Vref< PSx 007 086 007 097 007 101 007 105 Fig. 3-337
Setting for operate value Vref<.

V<>: Vref<< PSx 007 087 007 098 007 102 007 106 Fig. 3-337
Setting for operate value Vref<<.

V<>: tVref< PSx 007 088 007 099 007 103 007 107 Fig. 3-337
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<.

V<>: tVref<< PSx 007 096 007 100 007 104 007 108 Fig. 3-337
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<<.

V<>: tTransient PSx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig. 3-331
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig. 3-330
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 Fig. 3-333,
3-337
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived
voltages such as Vneg and VNG.
7-110 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Enabled PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 Fig. 3-338
Protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
f<>: Oper. mode f4 PSx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency

protection.
f<>: f1 PSx 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 Fig. 3-342
f<>: f2 PSx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
f<>: f3 PSx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
f<>: f4 PSx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies:
The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 Fig. 3-342
f<>: tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
f<>: tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
f<>: tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: df1/dt PSx 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 Fig. 3-342
f<>: df2/dt PSx 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
f<>: df3/dt PSx 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
f<>: df4/dt PSx 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
'f with df/dt' has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1 PSx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Delta f2 PSx 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
f<>: Delta f3 PSx 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
f<>: Delta f4 PSx 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Setting for Delta f.

'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1 PSx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Delta t2 PSx 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
f<>: Delta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
f<>: Delta t4 PSx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Setting for Delta t.

'f w. Delta f/Delta t' has been selected.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-111

7 Settings
(continued)
Power Directional Protection P<>: Enabled PSx 014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255 Fig. 3-343
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional

P<>: P> high range PSx 017 203 017 204 017 205 017 213 Fig. 3-345
Setting operate value P> for the active power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: P> sens. range PSx 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202
Setting operate value P> for the active power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay P> PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>.

P<>: Release delay P> PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P>.

P<>: Direction P> PSx 017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139 Fig. 3-346
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
P<>: P>> high range PSx 017 214 017 215 017 216 017 217 Fig. 3-345
Setting operate value P>> of active power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: P>> sens. range PSx 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143
Setting operate value P>> of active power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Release delay P>>PSx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P>>.

P<>: Direction P>> PSx 017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159 Fig. 3-346
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip
signal will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147 Fig. 3-345
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
P<>: Q> high range PSx 017 218 017 219 017 220 017 221 Fig. 3-347
Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.

'Highest range'.
7-112 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Q> sens. range PSx 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163
Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Release delay Q> PSx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q>.

P<>: Direction Q> PSx 017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179 Fig. 3-348
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
P<>: Q>> high range PSx 017 222 017 223 017 224 017 225 Fig. 3-347
Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: Q>> sens. range PSx 017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183
Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>.

P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q>>.

P<>: Direction Q>> PSx 017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199 Fig. 3-348
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip
signal will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187 Fig. 3-347
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
P<>: P< high range PSx 017 013 017 014 017 016 017 020 Fig. 3-349
Setting operate value P< for the active power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: P< sens. range PSx 017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033
Setting operate value P< for the active power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 Fig. 3-349
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<.

P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 Fig. 3-349
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-113

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Direction P< PSx 017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233 Fig. 3-350
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional' fault
decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 Fig. 3-349
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P< of active power.
P<>: P<< high range PSx 017 068 017 021 017 025 017 026 Fig. 3-349
Setting operate value P<< for the active power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: P<< sens. range PSx 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237
Setting operate value P<< for the active power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Release delay P<<PSx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249 Fig. 3-349
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<<.

P<>: Direction P<< PSx 017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253 Fig. 3-350
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241 Fig. 3-349
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P<< of active power.
P<>: Q< high range PSx 017 069 017 038 017 039 017 045 Fig. 3-352
Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: Q<< high range PSx 017 079 017 046 017 049 017 051 Fig. 3-352
Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.

'Highest range'.
P<>: Q< sens. range PSx 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038
Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055 Fig. 3-352,
3-354
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059 Fig. 3-352,
3-354
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<.
P<>: Direction Q< PSx 018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084 Fig. 3-353
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal
decisions.
7-114 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 Fig. 3-352
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q< of reactive power.
P<>: Q<< sens. range PSx 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088
Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.

'Sensitive range'.
P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216 Fig. 3-352
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239 Fig. 3-352
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<<.

P<>: Direction Q<< PSx 018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245 Fig. 3-349,
3-353
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip
signal will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' (reverse) or 'non-directional'
fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098 Fig. 3-352
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q<< of reactive power.
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 Fig: 3-349,
3-352, 3-354
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by stages P<, P<<, Q<
and Q<< after the respective operate delays have elapsed.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-115

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.4 Control
Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003 Fig. 3-82
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002 Fig. 3-82
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
Note: This parameter is visible only when
C O M M 1 : B a s i c I E C 8 7 0 - 5 e n a b l is set to 'Yes'.
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022 Fig. 3-60,
3-388
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029 Fig. 3-60
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.

MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for
a limited time period).
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap.
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000
DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050
DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. 210 100
Setting for the designation of the respective external device.

DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004 Fig. 3-384,
3-390
DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054
DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. 210 104
Setting for the switchgear operating time (switching device).

DEV01: Latching time 210 005
Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear

position signal – "Open" or "Closed" – has been received.
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011 Fig. 3-384,
3-390
DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061
DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and
chatter suppression.
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012 Fig. 3-384,
3-390
DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062
DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112
This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be

suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
7-116 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027 Fig: 3-384,

3-385, 3-390
DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077
DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024 Fig. 3-389
DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074
DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. 210 124
Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014 Fig. 3-384,
3-390
DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064
DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 114
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in /

unplugged) of the switch truck plug.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021 Fig. 3-388
DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 2” of the protection function.
definitions.
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close
command" of the protection function.
definitions.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019 Fig. 3-385
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069
DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-117

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020 Fig. 3-385
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070
DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Open' command.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Close' command.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039 Fig. 3-386
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089
DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 139
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
7-118 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040 Fig. 3-386

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090
DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 140
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041 Fig. 3-386
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091
DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042 Fig. 3-386
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092
DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7-119

7 Settings
(continued)
Interlocking Logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000 Fig. 3-393

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 250 009
Definition of the interlock conditions.
7-120 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

8 Information and Control Functions
The P43x generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel.
All this information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.
Note:
In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is

indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which
displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet,
"Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
8.1 Operation
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Device DVICE: Processor frequency 104 099
Display of the clock frequency of the processor on processor module P.
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. 120 040
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored 120 041
Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages

within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result 120 057
COMM3: Loop back receive 120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
Measured Data Input MEASI: Current IDC 004 134 Fig. 3-27
Display of the input current.

MEASI: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig. 3-27
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin p.u. 004 136 Fig. 3-27
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig. 3-28
Display of the scaled linearized value.

MEASI: Temperature 004 133 Fig. 3-29
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-1

(continued)
MEASI: Temperature p.u. 004 221 Fig. 3-29
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
MEASI: Temperature Tmax 004 233 Fig. 3-29
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature

input on the analog p/c board.
Measured Data Output MEASO: Current A-1 005 100 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Current A-2 005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-85
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time of day 003 091 Fig. 3-85
Display of the time of day.

Note: The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Time switching 003 095 Fig. 3-85
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig. 3-55
Display of system frequency.

MAIN: IA prim,demand 006 226 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IB prim,demand 006 227 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IC prim,demand 006 228 Fig. 3-46
Display the three phase currents as primary quantities.

MAIN: IA prim,demand stor. 006 223 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IB prim,demand stor. 006 224 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IC prim,demand stor. 006 225 Fig. 3-46
Display the three stored phase currents as primary quantities.

MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. 005 050 Fig. 3-45
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay 005 036 Fig. 3-45
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
8-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
MAIN: IP,max prim.,stored 005 034 Fig. 3-45,

3-46
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim. 005 055 Fig. 3-45
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current A prim. 005 040 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current B prim. 006 040 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current C prim. 007 040 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) prim. 005 010 Fig. 3-45
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IN prim. 004 043 Fig. 3-47
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. 008 042 Fig. 3-50
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. 009 042 Fig. 3-50
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. 005 042 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim. 006 042 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim. 007 042 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim. 005 012 Fig. 3-50
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage VNG prim. 004 041 Fig. 3-51
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. 005 046 Fig. 3-52
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. 008 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage VPP,min prim 009 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-B prim. 005 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary

quantity.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-3

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim. 006 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim. 007 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Appar. power S prim. 005 025
Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Active power P prim. 004 050 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. 004 052 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim 005 061 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim 005 062 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React.en. outp. prim 005 063 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React. en. inp. prim 005 064 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Frequency f p.u. 004 070 Fig. 3-55
Display of system frequency referred to fnom.

MAIN: Current IP,max p.u. 005 051 Fig. 3-45
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IA p.u.,demand 006 235 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IB p.u.,demand 006 236 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IC p.u.,demand 006 237 Fig. 3-46
Display of the delayed phase currents referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored 005 035 Fig. 3-45
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IA p.u.,demand stor. 006 232 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IB p.u.,demand stor. 006 233 Fig. 3-46
MAIN: IC p.u.,demand stor. 006 234 Fig. 3-46
Display of the delayed stored phase currents referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IP,min p.u. 005 056 Fig. 3-45
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay 005 037 Fig. 3-45,
3-46
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.
MAIN: Current A p.u. 005 041 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current B p.u. 006 041 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.
8-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
MAIN: Current C p.u. 007 041 Fig. 3-45
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ipos p.u. 009 016 Fig. 3-45
Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ineg p.u. 009 015 Fig. 3-45
Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u. 005 011 Fig. 3-45
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IN p.u. 004 044 Fig. 3-47
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom.

MAIN: Appar. power S p.u. 005 026
Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u. 008 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u. 009 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. 005 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. 006 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. 007 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u. 009 018 Fig. 3-50
Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u 005 073 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u 005 074 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u 005 075 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Angle phi N p.u. 005 076 Fig. 3-53
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG referred to 100°.
MAIN: Angle ΣVPG vs. IN 005 009
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
MAIN: Angle ΣVPG/IN p.u. 005 072 Fig. 3-53
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN referred to 100°.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-5

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u. 009 017 Fig. 3-50
Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/©3 p.u. 005 013 Fig. 3-50
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom .

MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u. 004 042 Fig. 3-51
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 referred to Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. 005 047 Fig. 3-52
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to

Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u. 008 045 Fig. 3-50
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u. 009 045 Fig. 3-50
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. 005 045 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u. 006 045 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u. 007 045 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Active power P p.u. 004 051 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. 004 053 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal

apparent power Snom.
MAIN: Active power factor 004 054 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated active power factor.

MAIN: Load angle phi A 004 055 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.

MAIN: Load angle phi B 004 056 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.

MAIN: Load angle phi C 004 057 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.

MAIN: Angle phiG 004 072 Fig. 3-53
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG.
MAIN: Phase rel.,IN vs ΣIP 004 073 Fig. 3-54
The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are

compared.
MAIN: Current ΣI unfilt. 004 074
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
8-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Current IN,act p.u. 004 045 Fig. 3-304

State Values
Display of the updated value for the active component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr.IN,reac p.u. 004 046 Fig. 3-304
Display of the updated value for the reactive component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 004 047 Fig. 3-305
Display of the updated value for the harmonic content of residual current
referred to IN,nom. This display is only active when the steady-state current
evaluation mode of the ground fault direction determination function
(GFDSS) is enabled.
GFDSS: Admitt. Y(N) p.u. 004 191 Fig. 3-310
Display of the updated admittance value referred to YN,nom.

With setting: GFDSS: Eva lu a ti on VNG set to 'Measured':
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNGnom
With setting: GFDSS: Eva lu a ti on VNG set to 'Calculated':
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
GFDSS: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 004 192 Fig. 3-310
Display of the updated conductance value referred to YN,nom.

GFDSS: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 004 193 Fig. 3-310
Display of the updated susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Status THERM replica 004 016 Fig. 3-326,
3-95
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
THERM: Object temperature 004 137 Fig. 3-326,
3-95
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
THERM: Coolant temperature 004 149 Fig. 3-326,
3-95
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at
TH ER M : Se lec t C T A.
When set to 'Default temp. value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to 'From PT 100' the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA input'
the temperature measured via an external transducer will be displayed.
THERM: Pre-trip time left 004 139 Fig. 3-326,
3-95
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection
function will reach the tripping threshold.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-7

(continued)
THERM: Therm. replica p.u. 004 017
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object temp. p.u. 004 179
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. 004 178
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Temp. offset replica 004 109 Fig. 3-326,
3-95
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Communication interface 3 COMM3: State receive 1 120 000
COMM3: State receive 2 120 003
Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State send 1 121 000
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
8-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Output 1 state 104 100
Status Events
GSSE: Output 2 state 104 103
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.

GSSE: Input 1 state 105 000
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-9

(continued)
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010
Substation Event
GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
8-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
Configurable function keys F_KEY: State F1 080 122 Fig. 3-22

F_KEY: State F2 080 123
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:

'Without function': No functions are assigned to the function key.
'Off': The function key is in the "Off" position.
'On': The function key is in the "On" position.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-11

(continued)
Binary input INP: State U 601 152 090 Fig. 3-23

INP: State U 602 152 093
INP: State U 603 152 096
INP: State U 604 152 099
INP: State U 605 152 102
INP: State U 606 152 105
INP: State U 701 152 108
INP: State U 702 152 111
INP: State U 703 152 114
INP: State U 704 152 117
INP: State U 705 152 120
INP: State U 706 152 123
INP: State U 801 152 126
INP: State U 802 152 129
INP: State U 803 152 132
INP: State U 804 152 135
INP: State U 805 152 138
INP: State U 806 152 141
INP: State U 807 184 025
INP: State U 808 184 029
INP: State U 809 184 033
INP: State U 810 184 037
INP: State U 811 184 041
INP: State U 812 184 045
INP: State U 813 184 049
INP: State U 814 184 053
INP: State U 815 184 057
INP: State U 816 184 061
INP: State U 817 184 065
INP: State U 818 184 069
INP: State U 819 184 073
INP: State U 820 184 077
INP: State U 821 184 081
INP: State U 822 184 085
INP: State U 823 184 089
INP: State U 824 184 093
INP: State U 901 152 144
INP: State U 902 152 147
INP: State U 903 152 150
INP: State U 904 152 153
INP: State U 1001 152 162
INP: State U 1002 152 165
INP: State U 1003 152 168
INP: State U 1004 152 171
INP: State U 1005 152 174
INP: State U 1006 152 177
INP: State U 1201 152 198
INP: State U 1202 152 201
INP: State U 1203 152 204
INP: State U 1204 152 207
INP: State U 1205 152 210
INP: State U 1206 152 213
INP: State U 1401 190 001
8-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
INP: State U 1402 190 005
INP: State U 1403 190 009
INP: State U 1404 190 013
INP: State U 1405 190 017
INP: State U 1406 190 021
INP: State U 1601 192 001
INP: State U 1602 192 005
INP: State U 1603 192 009
INP: State U 1604 192 013
INP: State U 1605 192 017
INP: State U 1606 192 021
INP: State U 1607 192 025
INP: State U 1608 192 029
INP: State U 1609 192 033
INP: State U 1610 192 037
INP: State U 1611 192 041
INP: State U 1612 192 045
INP: State U 1613 192 049
INP: State U 1614 192 053
INP: State U 1615 192 057
INP: State U 1616 192 061
INP: State U 1617 192 065
INP: State U 1618 192 069
INP: State U 1619 192 073
INP: State U 1620 192 077
INP: State U 1621 192 081
INP: State U 1622 192 085
INP: State U 1623 192 089
INP: State U 1624 192 093
INP: State U 1801 194 001
INP: State U 1802 194 005
INP: State U 1803 194 009
INP: State U 1804 194 013
INP: State U 1805 194 017
INP: State U 1806 194 021
INP: State U 2001 153 086
INP: State U 2002 153 089
INP: State U 2003 153 092
INP: State U 2004 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
'Low': Not energized.
'High': Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-13

(continued)
Binary outputs OUTP: State K 601 150 120 Fig. 3-30

OUTP: State K 602 150 123
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
(This address is available OUTP: State K 1007 150 234

(This address is available OUTP: State K 1008 150 237

OUTP: State K 1201 151 008
OUTP: State K 1202 151 011
OUTP: State K 1203 151 014
OUTP: State K 1204 151 017
OUTP: State K 1205 151 020
OUTP: State K 1206 151 023
OUTP: State K 1207 151 026
OUTP: State K 1208 151 029
OUTP: State K 1401 169 001
OUTP: State K 1402 169 005
OUTP: State K 1403 169 009
OUTP: State K 1404 169 013
OUTP: State K 1405 169 017
OUTP: State K 1406 169 021
OUTP: State K 1407 169 025
OUTP: State K 1408 169 029
OUTP: State K 1601 171 001
8-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
OUTP: State K 1602 171 005
OUTP: State K 1603 171 009
OUTP: State K 1604 171 013
OUTP: State K 1605 171 017
OUTP: State K 1606 171 021
OUTP: State K 1607 171 025
OUTP: State K 1608 171 029
OUTP: State K 1801 173 001
OUTP: State K 1802 173 005
OUTP: State K 1803 173 009
OUTP: State K 1804 173 013
OUTP: State K 1805 173 017
OUTP: State K 1806 173 021
OUTP: State K 2001 151 200
OUTP: State K 2002 151 203
OUTP: State K 2003 151 206
OUTP: State K 2004 151 209
OUTP: State K 2005 151 212
OUTP: State K 2006 151 215
OUTP: State K 2007 151 218
OUTP: State K 2008 151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

'Without function': No functions are assigned to the output relay.
'Low': The output relay is not energized.
'High': The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-15

(continued)
LED indicators LED: State H 1 green 085 180 Fig. 3-39

LED: State H 2 yell. 085 000
LED: State H 3 yell. 085 003
LED: State H 4 red 085 006 Fig. 3-39

LED: State H 5 red 085 009
LED: State H10 red 085 024
LED: State H17 red. 085 181
LED: State H 4 green 085 056
LED: State H10 green 085 074
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:

'Inactive': The LED indicator is not energized.
'Active': The LED indicator is energized.
8-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals
Local control panel LOC: Edit mode 080 111
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT 030 230
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT 030 231
LOC: Illumination on EXT 037 101
LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005 Fig. 3-6

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004 Fig. 3-6
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT 037 074 Fig. 3-9,
3-10, 3-11
COMM1: Command blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. 037 075 Fig. 3-9,

3-10, 3-11
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219 Fig. 3-9
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: IEC 870-5, ILS 003 221 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig. 3-12
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig. 3-13
COMM1: COURIER 103 041
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT 006 054 Fig.*: 3-87

COMM3: Communications fault 120 043 Fig. 3-19
COMM3: Comm. link failure 120 044 Fig. 3-19
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 120 045
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
IEC: Control reservation 221 082
Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device

("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").
EC Generic Substation GSSE: IED link faulty 105 181
Status Events Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp to each GSSE. Up to that time a repetition of GSSE will be carried
out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-17

(continued)
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000
Substation Event
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an

external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001
8-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-19

(continued)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,

representing the state of an external device.
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-21

IRIGB: Synchron. ready 023 202 Fig. 3-21
Measured Data Input MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT 006 076 Fig.*: 3-87
MEASI: Enabled 035 008 Fig. 3-24
MEASI: PT100 open circuit 040 190 Fig. 3-29
MEASI: Overload 20mA input 040 191 Fig. 3-27
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. 040 192 Fig. 3-27
8-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Binary outputs OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-30
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT 040 015 Fig. 3-30
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-30
OUTP: Latching reset 040 088 Fig. 3-30
Measured Data Output MEASO: Enabled 037 102 Fig. 3-32

MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT 036 085 Fig. 3-33
MEASO: Reset output EXT 036 087 Fig. 3-34
MEASO: Output reset 037 117 Fig. 3-34
MEASO: Valid BCD value 037 050 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Value A-1 output 037 118 Fig. 3-38
MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
MEASO: Value A-2 output 037 119
Main function MAIN: Healthy 060 001
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked
to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 g r e e n .
MAIN: Enable protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209 Fig. 3-87
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT 005 210 Fig.*: 3-87
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT 005 211 Fig.*: 3-87
MAIN: Reset meas.v.en. EXT 005 212 Fig.*: 3-87
MAIN: Group reset 2 EXT 005 252 Fig. 3-87
MAIN: General reset EXT 005 255 Fig.*: 3-87
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-61

MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138 Fig.*: 3-87
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-78
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061 Fig. 3-163,
3-240, 3-252
MAIN: M.c.b. trip VNG EXT 002 183 Fig. 3-163
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT 036 086 Fig. 3-163,
3-240
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT 041 023 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT 031 028 Fig. 3-64,
3-360, 3-368,
3-369
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-21

(continued)
MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT 036 051 Fig. 3-65,

3-165, 3-168,
3-208, 3-222,
3-274, 3-313,
3-314
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed A EXT 031 029 Fig. 3-64,
only with the P435.) 3-368, 3-369
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed B EXT 031 030 Fig. 3-64,
only with the P435.) 3-368, 3-369
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed C EXT 031 031 Fig. 3-64,
only with the P435.) 3-368, 3-369
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 037 018 Fig. 3-77
MAIN: Parallel trip EXT 037 019 Fig. 3-65,
3-218, 3-236
(This address is available MAIN: Trip A parallel EXT 036 052 Fig. 3-65,
only with the P435.) 3-236
(This address is available MAIN: Trip B parallel EXT 036 053 Fig. 3-65,
(This address is available MAIN: Trip C parallel EXT 036 054 Fig. 3-65,
MAIN: Transfer trip. EXT 120 046 Fig. 3-76
(This address is available MAIN: Transfer trip. A EXT 120 047

(This address is available MAIN: Transfer trip. B EXT 120 048

(This address is available MAIN: Transfer trip. C EXT 120 049

(This address is available MAIN: Blocking 1p trip EXT 041 078 Fig. 3-157,
MAIN: Man. close cmd. EXT 041 022 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Enable control 221 058 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Manual close EXT 036 047 Fig. 3-171
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset 040 139 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
MAIN: Test mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-89
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig. 3-86
MAIN: Time switching EXT 003 096
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-85

MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: CB open 3p 031 040 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: CB open >=1p 031 039 Fig. 3-64
(This address is available MAIN: CB open A 031 032 Fig. 3-64
(This address is available MAIN: CB open B 031 033 Fig. 3-64
(This address is available MAIN: CB open C 031 034 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: CB closed 3p 031 042 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: CB closed >= 1p 031 038 Fig. 3-64
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed A 031 035 Fig. 3-64
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed B 031 036 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Protect. not ready 004 060 Fig. 3-62
(This address is available MAIN: CB closed C 031 037 Fig. 3-64
8-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
MAIN: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 031 041 Fig. 3-64

MAIN: Test mode 037 071 Fig. 3-89
MAIN: Blocked/faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-78
MAIN: Manual trip signal 034 017 Fig. 3-77
MAIN: Man. close command 037 068 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 036 251 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
MAIN: Gen. trip command 035 071 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Man. cl. cmd.enabl. 039 113 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 036 005 Fig. 3-73,
3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip signal 1, A 036 006 Fig. 3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip signal 1, B 036 007 Fig. 3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip signal 1, C 036 008 Fig. 3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip signal 1, 1p 037 252

MAIN: Trip signal 1, 3p 037 253
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 036 023 Fig. 3-73,

3-75
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 036 071 Fig. 3-75,
3-76
(This address is available MAIN: Trip command 1, A 036 072 Fig. 3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip command 1, B 036 073 Fig. 3-75
(This address is available MAIN: Trip command 1, C 036 074 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 036 022 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Final trip 038 103 Fig. 3-79,
3-80
MAIN: Close command 037 009 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: General starting 036 000 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Starting A 036 001 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
MAIN: Starting B 036 002 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
MAIN: Starting C 036 003 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
MAIN: Starting GF 036 004 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023 Fig. 3-60,
3-388
MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. 041 027 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018 Fig. 3-83
MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. 041 028 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Rush restr. C trig. 041 029 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Send transfer trip 001 207 Fig. 3-76
(This address is available MAIN: Send transfer trip A 001 208

MAIN: CB trip internal 221 006 Fig. 3-81
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-23

(continued)
(This address is available MAIN: Send transfer trip B 001 209

(This address is available MAIN: Send transfer trip C 001 210

MAIN: CB tripped 221 016 Fig. 3-81
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Ground fault 041 087 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Communication error 221 019 Fig. 3-84
MAIN: Ground fault A 041 054 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Ground fault B 041 055 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Ground fault C 041 056 Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Gnd. fault forw./LS 041 088 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Gnd. fault backw./BS 041 089 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Without function 060 000
MAIN: Without function 061 000
MAIN: Device selection key 006 001
MAIN: Device OPEN key 006 002
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101 Fig. 3-385

MAIN: Device CLOSE key 006 003
MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102
MAIN: Local/Remote key 006 004 Fig. 3-6

MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via user EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-90
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-90
PSS: Control via user 036 102 Fig. 3-90
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset 003 061 Fig. 3-90
PSS: PS 1 activated ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-90
PSS: Actual param. subset 003 062 Fig. 3-90
PSS: PS 1 active 036 090 Fig. 3-90
Self-Monitoring SFMON: CB faulty EXT 098 072
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-91

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-91
SFMON: Warm restart exec. 041 202
SFMON: Cold restart exec. 041 201
SFMON: Cold rest. checksum 093 024
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
SFMON: Blocking HW failure 090 019
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
8-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
SFMON: Faulty DSP 093 127
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
SFMON: Power supply faulty 093 083
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000
SFMON: Defect.module slot10 097 009
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071
SFMON: Module N +15V faulty 093 096
SFMON: Module N -15V faulty 093 097
SFMON: Module N DAC faulty 093 095
SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
SFMON: Error K 601 097 070
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-25

(continued)
(This address is available SFMON: Error K 1005 097 106




8-26 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
SFMON: Output 30 098 053
SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-93

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112
SFMON: IRIGBsynchron. error 093 117
SFMON: Inom not adjustable 093 118
SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG 098 132 Fig. 3-252

SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001 Fig. 3-165
SFMON: Vneg> triggered 098 014 Fig. 3-165
SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009 Fig. 3-165
SFMON: FF, V triggered 098 021 Fig. 3-167
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022 Fig. 3-168
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: Meas.circ.VNG faulty 098 254
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-27

(continued)
SFMON: Mea.circ.Vref faulty 098 255
SFMON: BUOC not active 098 002 Fig. 3-169,

3-170
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC 098 003 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC 098 004 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005 Fig. 3-164
SFMON: Zero sequ. starting 098 015 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016 Fig. 3-163
(This address is available SFMON: Meas. circuits GFSC 098 013 Fig. 3-264
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI 093 145
SFMON: CTA error 098 034 Fig. 3-325

SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG 098 006 Fig. 3-175

(This address is available SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval. 098 019 Fig. 3-179
SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GFSIG 098 012 Fig. 3-315
(This address is available SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG 098 027 Fig. 3-266
SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035 Fig. 3-326
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094 Fig. 3-321
SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098 Fig. 3-316
SFMON: Peripheral fault 098 018 Fig. 3-163
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 114 Fig. 3-38
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 093 115
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116 Fig. 3-27
SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024 Fig. 3-29
SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025 Fig. 3-27
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026 Fig. 3-27
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028 Fig. 3-342
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 098 124
For a detailed description of the signals provided by the SFMON function

see Chapter 10.
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 213 Fig. 3-87
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 240 Fig. 3-93,
3-321
Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 241 Fig. 3-94,
3-95, 3-96,
3-97
OL_RC: Record. in progress 035 003 Fig. 3-96
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-97
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 242 3-98, 3-103,
3-104
GF_RC: Record. in progress 035 005 Fig. 3-103
GF_RC: GF memory overflow 035 006 Fig. 3-104
8-28 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Trigger EXT 036 088 Fig. 3-106
Fault Recording FT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 243 Fig. 3-110,
3-111, 3-112
FT_RC: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-110
FT_RC: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-110
FT_RC: Record. in progress 035 000 Fig. 3-110
FT_RC: System disturb. runn 035 004 Fig. 3-110
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-111
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 035 002
Distance Protection DIST: Zone extension EXT 036 046 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT 036 034
DIST: Blocking Z1,e EXT 036 036
DIST: Enabled 036 104 Fig. 3-113

DIST: General starting 036 240
DIST: Starting I>> A 040 064 Fig. 3-124

DIST: Starting I>> B 040 065 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting I>> C 040 097 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting V< A 040 067 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting V< B 040 075 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting V< C 040 096 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting Z< 036 241 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting Z< A 040 070 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting Z< B 040 071 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Starting Z< C 040 072 Fig. 3-124
DIST: Start. switch. to PG 040 052 Fig. 3-116
DIST: VNG>> triggered 036 015 Fig. 3-115
DIST: Fault forward / LS 036 018 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Fault backward / BS 036 019 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Direct. using Vmeas 038 045 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Direct. using memory 038 047 Fig. 3-128
DIST: Forw. w/o measurem. 038 044 Fig. 3-128
DIST: tVmemory running 040 034 Fig. 3-126
DIST: Zone extension 036 065 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
DIST: Zone extension HSR 036 103 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
DIST: Zone extension TDR 038 022 Fig. 3-134,
3-138
DIST: tIN> running 036 105 Fig. 3-115
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed 036 016 Fig. 3-115
DIST: t1 elapsed 036 026 Fig. 3-139,
3-140
DIST: t1,ze elapsed 035 079 Fig. 3-139,
3-140
DIST: t2 elapsed 036 027 Fig. 3-141
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-29

(continued)

DIST: Trip signal 036 009 Fig. 3-155
DIST: Trip signal zone 1 035 072 Fig. 3-72,
3-155
DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze 035 074 Fig. 3-155
DIST: Trip sig. zone 2-8 035 073 Fig. 3-73
DIST: Trip signal zone 2 041 084 Fig. 3-155
DIST: Impedance in zone 6 037 200 Fig. 3-156
DIST: Zero sequ. starting 036 021 Fig. 3-123
Power swing blocking PSB: Blocking init. EXT 036 069 Fig. 3-161
PSB: Enabled 040 095 Fig. 3-158
PSB: Enable delay runn. 036 058 Fig. 3-158,
3-161
PSB: Blocking initiated 036 032 Fig. 3-158,
3-161
PSB: Z within polygon 036 024 Fig. 3-159
PSB: IP> triggered 036 012 Fig. 3-161
PSB: Ineg> triggered 036 011 Fig. 3-161
PSB: IN> triggered 036 010 Fig. 3-161
PSB: Perm. no. PS reach 006 030
PSB: Perm. no. OOS reach 006 035
PSB: Trip signal 036 025 Fig. 3-162
Measuring-Circuit Monitoring MCMON: Blocking FF,V EXT 002 182
MCMON: Enabled 040 094 Fig. 3-164

MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 040 087 Fig. 3-164
MCMON: Undervoltage 038 038 Fig. 3-165
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 038 049 Fig. 3-165
MCMON: Vneg> triggered 041 079 Fig. 3-165
MCMON: FF, V triggered 035 081 Fig. 3-167
MCMON: FF, Vref triggered 038 100 Fig. 3-168
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 038 023 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: M.circ. Vref flty. 007 213 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: M.circ. VNG flty. 007 214 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 040 078 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 037 020 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: Zero sequ. starting 041 080 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: Peripheral fault 038 024 Fig. 3-163
MCMON: Meas. voltage o.k. 038 048 Fig. 3-165
8-30 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Backup overcurrent-time BUOC: Enabled 040 093 Fig. 3-169,

BUOC: Active 037 021 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
BUOC: Starting 036 013 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
BUOC: Trip signal 036 014 Fig. 3-169,
3-170
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Par. ARC running EXT 039 063 Fig. 3-171
SOTF: Enabled 040 069 Fig. 3-171
SOTF: Z1 extended 035 076 Fig. 3-171
SOTF: tManual-close runn. 036 063 Fig. 3-171
SOTF: Trip signal 036 064 Fig. 3-171
Protective Signaling PSIG: Enable EXT 037 025 Fig. 3-172

PSIG: Disable EXT 037 026 Fig. 3-172
PSIG: Test telecom. EXT 036 038 Fig. 3-205
PSIG: Telecom. faulty EXT 004 064 Fig. 3-173,
3-266
PSIG: Blocking EXT 036 049 Fig. 3-172,
3-266
PSIG: Block. weak inf. EXT 036 255
PSIG: Receive (B) EXT 006 037
PSIG: Receive (A) EXT 036 048 Fig. 3-175,

3-176, 3-181,
3-183, 3-186,
3-189, 3-192,
3-195, 3-196,
3-199, 3-202,
3-204
PSIG: Weak inf. trigg. EXT 043 062 Fig. 3-202
PSIG: Freq. mon. trig. EXT 038 080 Fig. 3-176
PSIG: Ext. enabled 037 023 Fig. 3-172
PSIG: Enabled 015 008 Fig. 3-172
PSIG: Ready 037 027 Fig. 3-172
PSIG: Not ready 037 028 Fig. 3-172
PSIG: Test telecom. 034 016 Fig. 3-205
PSIG: Telecom. faulty 036 060 Fig. 3-175
PSIG: Op.mode invalid 043 065 Fig. 3-179
PSIG: Send (signal) 036 035 Fig. 3-180,
3-181, 3-182,
3-183, 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192, 3-194,
3-195, 3-199,
3-203, 3-204,
3-205
PSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 024 Fig. 3-180,
3-181, 3-182,
3-183, 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192, 3-194,
3-195, 3-199,
3-203, 3-204,
3-205
PSIG: Receive 006 036 Fig. 3-174
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-31

(continued)
PSIG: Receive (signal) 037 029 Fig. 3-180,

3-181, 3-182,
3-183, 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192, 3-194,
3-195, 3-197,
3-199
PSIG: Z1 extended 035 075 Fig. 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192, 3-194,
3-195
PSIG: t1 revers.interlock 036 020 Fig. 3-197
PSIG: Weak infeed start. 043 064 Fig. 3-202
PSIG: Trip signal 038 007 Fig. 3-180,
3-181, 3-182,
3-183, 3-185,
3-186, 3-188,
3-189, 3-191,
3-192, 3-194,
3-195,
3-199
Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Reset counters EXT 005 244 Fig.*: 3-87
ARC: Enable EXT 037 010 Fig. 3-207,

3-221
ARC: Disable EXT 037 011 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR A EXT 037 014 Fig. 3-230
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR B EXT 037 015 Fig. 3-230
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR C EXT 037 016 Fig. 3-230
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C EXT 037 017 Fig. 3-230
ARC: General starting EXT 037 096 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Blocking EXT 036 050 Fig. 3-209,
3-223
ARC: CB drive ready EXT 004 066 Fig. 3-208,
3-222
ARC: Ext. enabled 037 013 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
ARC: Enabled 015 064 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR A 034 020 Fig. 3-230
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR B 034 021 Fig. 3-230
(This address is available ARC: Test HSR C 034 022 Fig. 3-230
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C 034 023 Fig. 3-212,
3-230
ARC: Blocked 004 069 Fig. 3-209,
3-223
ARC: Ready 004 068 Fig. 3-208,
3-222
ARC: Not ready 037 008 Fig. 3-208,
3-222
ARC: Reject test HSR 036 055 Fig. 3-212,
3-230
8-32 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
ARC: Block. time running 037 004 Fig. 3-209,

3-223
ARC: Cycle running 037 000 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Oper. time 1 running 037 005 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Oper. time 2 running 037 065 Fig. 3-236
ARC: Dead time running 037 002 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
(This address is available ARC: Dead time 1p running 037 066 Fig. 3-236
ARC: Dead time 3p running 037 067 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Max. dead time runn. 037 069 Fig. 3-236
ARC: Dead time TDR runn. 037 003 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Reclaim time running 036 042 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: (Re)close request 037 077 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: (Re)close signal HSR 037 007 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: (Re)close signal TDR 037 006 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Reclosure successful 036 062 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: Sig.interr. CB trip 036 040 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
ARC: 3p final trip 036 043 Fig. 3-218,
3-236
Automatic Synchronism ASC: Reset counters EXT 006 074 Fig. 3-251
Check
ASC: Enable EXT 037 049 Fig. 3-239
ASC: Disable EXT 037 061 Fig. 3-239
ASC: AR close request EXT 000 106
ASC: Blocking EXT 037 048 Fig. 3-240

ASC: Test close requ. EXT 037 064 Fig. 3-241
ASC: Enabl.close requ.EXT 037 063 Fig. 3-241
ASC: Close request EXT 037 062 Fig. 3-241
ASC: Ext. enabled 037 092 Fig. 3-239
ASC: Enabled 018 024 Fig. 3-239
ASC: Blocked 038 018 Fig. 3-240
ASC: Ready 037 079 Fig. 3-240
ASC: Not ready 037 082 Fig. 3-240
ASC: Test close request 034 019 Fig. 3-241
ASC: Close request 034 018 Fig. 3-241
ASC: Cycle running 038 019 Fig. 3-248
ASC: Operat.time running 037 093 Fig. 3-248
ASC: Close enable 037 083 Fig. 3-244,
3-245
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch 037 085 Fig. 3-244,
3-245
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch 037 084 Fig. 3-246,
3-247
ASC: Close rejection 037 086 Fig. 3-248
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-33

(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: Enable EXT 039 095 Fig. 3-252
protection
P435.)
GFSC: Disable EXT 039 096 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Blocking EXT 043 068 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Ext. enabled 039 097 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Enabled 038 094 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Ready 039 093 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Not ready 039 094 Fig. 3-252
GFSC: Monitor. triggered 038 095 Fig. 3-264
GFSC: IN> triggered 039 088 Fig. 3-253
GFSC: VNG> triggered 039 089 Fig. 3-253
GFSC: Starting 038 096 Fig. 3-253
GFSC: Direct.determ.enabl. 043 061 Fig. 3-253
GFSC: Fault forward / LS 039 090 Fig. 3-262
GFSC: Fault backward / BS 039 091 Fig. 3-262
GFSC: t1 elapsed 038 097 Fig. 3-262
GFSC: Trip signal 039 092 Fig. 3-262
Ground fault (short-circuit) GSCSG: Enable EXT 043 050 Fig. 3-265
protection signaling GSCSG: Disable EXT 043 051 Fig. 3-265
(This address / function group GSCSG: Test telecom. EXT 043 056 Fig. 3-275
is available only with the GSCSG: Telecom. faulty EXT 043 053 Fig. 3-266
P435.) GSCSG: Blocking EXT 043 052 Fig. 3-266
GSCSG: Receive EXT 043 055 Fig. 3-268,
3-270, 3-271,
3-272, 3-274
GSCSG: Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT 043 054 Fig. 3-268
GSCSG: Ext. enabled 043 066 Fig. 3-265
GSCSG: Enabled 023 070 Fig. 3-265
GSCSG: Ready 043 057 Fig. 3-266
GSCSG: Not ready 043 058 Fig. 3-266
GSCSG: Test telecom. 034 029 Fig. 3-275
GSCSG: Send signal 043 059 Fig. 3-270,
3-271, 3-274,
3-275
GSCSG: Tripping time elaps. 043 063 Fig. 3-267
GSCSG: Telecom. faulty 046 060
GSCSG: Trip signal 043 060 Fig. 3-270,

3-271, 3-272
8-34 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT 041 060 Fig. 3-277
protection DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 041 061 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Blocking tI>>> EXT 041 062 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Blocking tI>>>> EXT 041 100 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Blocking tIneg> EXT 041 102 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Blocking tIneg>> EXT 041 103 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 041 104 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>>> EXT 041 105 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT 041 063 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT 041 064 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>> EXT 041 065 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>>> EXT 041 101 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Enabled 040 120 Fig. 3-276
DTOC: Starting I> 035 020 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Starting I>> 035 021 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Starting I>>> 035 022 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Starting I>>>> 035 023 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: tI> elapsed 040 010 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: tI>> elapsed 040 011 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: tI>>> elapsed 040 012 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: tI>>>> elapsed 035 032 Fig. 3-277
DTOC: Starting Ineg> 035 024 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Starting Ineg>> 035 025 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> 035 026 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>>> 035 027 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed 035 033 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed 035 034 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed 035 035 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: tIneg>>>> elapsed 035 036 Fig. 3-278
DTOC: Starting IN> 035 028 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Starting IN>> 035 029 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Starting IN>>> 035 030 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Starting IN>>>> 035 031 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Fault N forward 035 047 Fig. 3-282
DTOC: Fault N backward 035 048 Fig. 3-282
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,i. runn 040 086 Fig. 3-284
DTOC: tIN>,interm. elapsed 040 099 Fig. 3-284
DTOC: tIN> elapsed 035 037 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: tIN>> elapsed 035 038 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed 035 039 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed 035 040 Fig. 3-280
DTOC: Trip sig. tIN>,intm. 039 073 Fig. 3-284
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> 035 043 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> 035 044 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> 035 045 Fig. 3-283
DTOC: Trip sign. tIN>>>> 035 046 Fig. 3-283
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-35

(continued)
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Block. tIref,P> EXT 040 101 Fig. 3-294
Protection
IDMT: Block. tIref,neg>EXT 040 102 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Block. tIref,N> EXT 040 103 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Enabled 040 100 Fig. 3-287
IDMT: Starting Iref,P> 040 080 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,P> 040 084 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Starting Iref,neg> 040 107 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 040 108 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Starting Iref,N> 040 081 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,N> 040 085 Fig. 3-294
IDMT: Neg.seq.syst. forw. 035 041 Fig. 3-297
IDMT: Neg.seq.syst. backw. 035 042 Fig. 3-297
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Reset counters EXT 005 245 Fig. 3-306,
determination using 3-312
steady-state values GFDSS: GF (curr.) eval. EXT 038 020 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: Enabled 042 096 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: GF (pow.) ready 038 026 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: GF (pow.) not ready 038 027 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: GF (curr.) evaluat. 039 071 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: GF (curr.) ready 038 028 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: GF (curr.) not ready 038 029 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: Admittance ready 038 167 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: Admittance not ready 038 168 Fig. 3-299
GFDSS: Grd. fault pow./adm. 009 037 Fig. 3-301
GFDSS: Forward / LS 009 035 Fig. 3-304,
3-307, 3-310
GFDSS: Direct. backward/BS 009 036 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
GFDSS: Starting forward/LS 009 040 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
GFDSS: Starting backward/BS 009 041 Fig. 3-310
GFDSS: Trip signal forw./LS 009 031 Fig. 3-304,
3-310
GFDSS: Ground fault (curr.) 009 038 Fig. 3-305
GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> 009 074 Fig. 3-311
GFDSS: Trip Y(N)> 009 075 Fig. 3-311
GFDSS: Trip signal Y(N)> 009 072 Fig. 3-311
Ground Fault Tripping GFTRP: Blocking EXT 037 046 Fig. 3-313,
3-314
GFTRP: VNG> triggered EXT 037 047 Fig. 3-314
GFTRP: Enabled 040 092 Fig. 3-313,
3-314
GFTRP: Trip signal 037 091 Fig. 3-313,
3-314
Ground fault protective GFSIG: Test telecom. EXT 037 045 Fig. 3-315
signaling GFSIG: Receive EXT 037 044 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Enabled 040 091 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Test telecom. 034 025 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Telecom. faulty 038 017 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Send (signal) 037 088 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 089 Fig. 3-315
GFSIG: Trip signal 037 087 Fig. 3-315
8-36 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Transient Ground Fault TGFD: Blocking EXT 004 034 Fig. 3-316
Direction Determination TGFD: Reset counters EXT 005 246 Fig.*: 3-87
TGFD: Reset signal EXT 004 140 Fig. 3-320
TGFD: Enabled 037 100 Fig. 3-316
TGFD: Ready 037 080 Fig. 3-316
TGFD: Not ready 037 081 Fig. 3-316
TGFD: Ground fault 004 033 Fig. 3-318
TGFD: Direct. determined 004 030 Fig. 3-319
TGFD: Forward / LS 004 031 Fig. 3-319
TGFD: Direct. backward/BS 004 032 Fig. 3-319
TGFD: Signal reset 004 141 Fig. 3-320
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Therm.repl.block EXT 041 074 Fig. 3-326
THERM: Reset replica EXT 038 061 Fig. 3-327
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig. 3-323
THERM: Reset replica 039 061 Fig. 3-327
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig. 3-326
THERM: CTA error EXT 038 062 Fig. 3-325
THERM: Warning 039 025 Fig. 3-326
THERM: Trip signal 039 020 Fig. 3-326
THERM: Buffer empty 039 112 Fig. 3-326
THERM: CTA error 039 111 Fig. 3-325
THERM: Within pre-trip time 041 109 Fig. 3-326
THERM: Setting error,block. 039 110 Fig. 3-326
Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT 041 090 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT 041 091 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT 041 092 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT 041 093 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Blocking tVneg> EXT 041 094 Fig. 3-334
V<>: Blocking tVneg>> EXT 041 095 Fig. 3-334
V<>: Blocking tVNG> EXT 041 072 Fig. 3-336
V<>: Blocking tVNG>> EXT 041 073 Fig. 3-336
V<>: Blocking tVref> EXT 007 036 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Blocking tVref>> EXT 007 037 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Blocking tVref< EXT 007 039 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Blocking tVref<< EXT 007 046 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig. 3-328
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig. 3-328
V<>: Not ready 042 004 Fig. 3-328
V<>: Starting V>/>> A(-B) 041 031 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Starting V>/>> B(-C) 041 032 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Starting V>/>> C(-A) 041 033 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Starting V> 3-pole 041 097 Fig. 3-330
V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig. 3-330
V<>: tV> elapsed 041 034 Fig. 3-330
V<>: tV> 3-pole elapsed 041 098 Fig. 3-330
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-37

(continued)
V<>: tV>> elapsed 041 035 Fig. 3-330

V<>: Starting V</<< A(-B) 041 038 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting V</<< B(-C) 041 039 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting V</<< C(-A) 041 040 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting V< 3-pole 042 005 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV< elapsed 041 041 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV< elaps. transient 042 023 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed 042 006 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV< 3p elaps. trans. 042 024 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Fault V< 3-pole 041 111 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV<< elapsed 041 042 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. 042 025 Fig. 3-331
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans. 042 007 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig. 3-331
V<>: Starting Vpos> 042 010 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Starting Vpos>> 042 011 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos> elapsed 042 012 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos>> elapsed 042 013 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Starting Vpos< 042 014 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Starting Vpos<< 042 015 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos< elapsed 042 016 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos< elaps. trans. 042 026 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Fault Vref< 007 061 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Fault Vpos< 041 113 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos<< elapsed 042 017 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos<< elaps.trans. 042 027 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Fault Vref<< 007 062 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Fault Vpos<< 041 114 Fig. 3-333
V<>: tVpos</<< elap.trans 042 018 Fig. 3-333
V<>: Starting Vneg> 042 019 Fig. 3-334
V<>: Starting Vneg>> 042 020 Fig. 3-334
V<>: tVneg> elapsed 042 021 Fig. 3-334
V<>: tVneg>> elapsed 042 022 Fig. 3-334
V<>: Starting VNG> 041 044 Fig. 3-336
V<>: Starting VNG>> 042 008 Fig. 3-336
V<>: tVNG> elapsed 041 045 Fig. 3-336
V<>: tVNG>> elapsed 041 046 Fig. 3-336
V<>: Starting Vref> 007 051 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Starting Vref>> 007 052 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref> elapsed 007 047 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref>> elaps. 007 048 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Starting Vref< 007 055 Fig. 3-337
V<>: Starting Vref<< 007 056 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref< elapsed 007 053 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref<< elaps. 007 054 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref< elaps. trans. 007 057 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref<< elaps.trans. 007 060 Fig. 3-337
V<>: tVref</<< elap.trans 007 063 Fig. 3-337
8-38 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-87

Protection f<>: Blocking f1 EXT 042 103 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Blocking f2 EXT 042 104
f<>: Enabled 042 100 Fig. 3-338

f<>: Ready 042 101 Fig. 3-338
f<>: Not ready 042 140 Fig. 3-338
f<>: Blocked by V< 042 102 Fig. 3-340
f<>: Starting f1 042 107 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Starting f1/df1 042 108 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Delta f1 triggered 042 109 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed 042 110 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Trip signal f1 042 111 Fig. 3-342
f<>: Starting f2 042 115
f<>: Starting f2/df2 042 116
f<>: Delta f2 triggered 042 117
f<>: Delta t2 elapsed 042 118
f<>: Trip signal f2 042 119
Power Directional Protection P<>: Blocking P> EXT 035 082 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Blocking P>> EXT 035 083 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Blocking Q> EXT 035 084 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Blocking Q>> EXT 035 085 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Blocking tP< EXT 035 050 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT 035 051 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT 035 052 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT 035 053 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Enabled 036 250 Fig. 3-343
P<>: Starting P> 035 086 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Starting P>> 035 089 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Signal P> delayed 035 087 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Signal P>> delayed 035 090 Fig. 3-345
P<>: Trip signal P> 035 088 Fig. 3-346
P<>: Trip signal P>> 035 091 Fig. 3-346
P<>: Starting Q> 035 092 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Starting Q>> 035 095 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Signal Q> delayed 035 093 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed 035 096 Fig. 3-347
P<>: Trip signal Q> 035 094 Fig. 3-348
P<>: Trip signal Q>> 035 097 Fig. 3-348
P<>: Starting P< 035 054 Fig. 3-349
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-39

(continued)
P<>: Starting P<< 035 060 Fig. 3-349

P<>: Signal P< delayed 035 055 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Signal P<< delayed 035 061 Fig. 3-349
P<>: tP< elapsed trans. 035 056 Fig. 3-349
P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. 035 062 Fig. 3-349
P<>: tP</tP<< elaps.trans 035 178 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Fault P< 035 057 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Fault P<< 035 063 Fig. 3-349
P<>: Trip signal P< 035 058 Fig. 3-350
P<>: Trip signal P<< 035 064 Fig. 3-350
P<>: Trip signal P< trans 035 059 Fig. 3-350
P<>: Trip sig. P<< trans. 035 065 Fig. 3-350
P<>: Starting Q< 035 066 Fig. 3-351,
3-352
P<>: Starting Q<< 035 010 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Signal Q< delayed 035 067 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Signal Q<< delayed 035 011 Fig. 3-352
P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. 035 068 Fig. 3-352
P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. 035 016 Fig. 3-352
P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans 035 179 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Fault Q< 035 069 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Fault Q<< 035 049 Fig. 3-352
P<>: Trip signal Q< 035 155 Fig. 3-353
P<>: Trip signal Q<< 035 176 Fig. 3-353
P<>: Trip sig. Q< trans. 035 156 Fig. 3-353
P<>: Trip sig. Q<< trans. 035 177 Fig. 3-353
P<>: Direction P forw. 035 181 Fig. 3-355
P<>: Direction P backw. 035 191 Fig. 3-355
P<>: Direction Q forw. 035 193 Fig. 3-356
P<>: Direction Q backw. 035 194 Fig. 3-356
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Ready 038 009
Protection CBF: Startup 3p 038 211 Fig. 3-362

CBF: Blocking EXT 038 058 Fig. 3-358
CBF: Starting trig. EXT 038 016 Fig. 3-367
CBF: Enable EXT 038 041 Fig. 3-357
CBF: Disable EXT 038 042 Fig. 3-357
CBF: Enabled 040 055 Fig. 3-357
CBF: Not ready 040 025 Fig. 3-358
CBF: Trip signal 040 026 Fig. 3-367
CBF: Starting 038 021 Fig. 3-367
CBF: Ext./user enabled 038 040 Fig. 3-357
CBF: CB failure 036 017 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
CBF: Start 3p EXT 038 205 Fig. 3-362
(This address is available CBF: Start A EXT 038 206 Fig. 3-361
(This address is available CBF: Start B EXT 038 207

(This address is available CBF: Start C EXT 038 208
8-40 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
CBF: Start enable EXT 038 209 Fig. 3-361,

3-362
CBF: CB pos. implausible 038 210 Fig. 3-360
(This address is available CBF: Startup A 038 212 Fig. 3-361
(This address is available CBF: Startup B 038 213

(This address is available CBF: Startup C 038 214

CBF: Trip signal t1 038 215 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
(This address is available CBF: Trip signal t1, A 038 216 Fig. 3-364
(This address is available CBF: Trip signal t1, B 038 217 Fig. 3-364
(This address is available CBF: Trip signal t1, C 038 218 Fig. 3-364
CBF: Trip signal t2 038 219 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
CBF: Trip command t1 038 220 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
(This address is available CBF: Trip command t1, A 038 221 Fig. 3-366
(This address is available CBF: Trip command t1, B 038 222 Fig. 3-366
(This address is available CBF: Trip command t1, C 038 223 Fig. 3-366
CBF: Trip command t2 038 224 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
CBF: Fault behind CB 038 225 Fig. 3-368
CBF: TripSig CBsync.super 038 226 Fig. 3-369
CBF: CBsync.superv A open 038 227 Fig. 3-369
CBF: CBsync.superv B open 038 228 Fig. 3-369
CBF: CBsync.superv C open 038 229 Fig. 3-369
CBF: Current flow A 038 230 Fig. 3-359
CBF: Current flow B 038 231 Fig. 3-359
CBF: Current flow C 038 232 Fig. 3-359
CBF: Current flow Phx 038 233 Fig. 3-359
CBF: CB faulty EXT 038 234 Fig. 3-363,
3-364
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig. 3-370,

3-374
LIMIT: tI> elapsed 040 220 Fig. 3-370
LIMIT: tI>> elapsed 040 221 Fig. 3-370
LIMIT: tI< elapsed 040 222 Fig. 3-370
LIMIT: tI<< elapsed 040 223 Fig. 3-370
LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed 040 224 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed 040 225 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed 040 226 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed 040 227 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed 040 228 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed 040 229 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed 040 230 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed 040 231 Fig. 3-371
LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed 040 168 Fig. 3-372
LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed 040 169 Fig. 3-372
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-41

(continued)
LIMIT: tVref> elapsed 042 152 Fig. 3-374

LIMIT: tVref>> elapsed 042 153 Fig. 3-374
LIMIT: tVref< elapsed 042 154 Fig. 3-374
LIMIT: tVref<< elapsed 042 155 Fig. 3-374
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> 040 180 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed 040 182 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed 040 183 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed 040 186 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed 040 187 Fig. 3-373
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: tT> elapsed 040 172 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed 040 173 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: tT< elapsed 040 176 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed 040 177 Fig. 3-375
LIMIT: tVrefxx triggered 221 237
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-377

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-377

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-376
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-376

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
8-42 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
LOGIC: 1 has been set 034 067 Fig. 3-376

LOGIC: 2 has been set 034 068
LOGIC: 1 set externally 034 075 Fig. 3-376

LOGIC: 2 set externally 034 076
LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-377

LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-377
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig. 3-377
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034
LOGIC: Output 2 (t) 042 035
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-43

(continued)
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030 Fig. 3-40,
3-384, 3-390
DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080
DEV03: Open signal EXT 210 130
DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031 Fig. 3-40,

3-384, 3-390
DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081
DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131
DEV01: Control state 210 018 Fig. 3-20,

3-384, 3-390
DEV02: Control state 210 068 Fig. 3-20
DEV03: Control state 210 118 Fig. 3-20
DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036 Fig. 3-384,
3-390
DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086
DEV03: Switch. device open 210 136
DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037 Fig. 3-384,

3-390
DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087
DEV03: Switch.device closed 210 137
DEV01: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 038 Fig. 3-384,

3-390
8-44 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
DEV02: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 088
DEV03: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 138
DEV01: Open command 210 028 Fig. 3-389

DEV02: Open command 210 078
DEV03: Open command 210 128
DEV01: Close command 210 029 Fig. 3-389

DEV02: Close command 210 079
DEV03: Close command 210 129
DEV01: Open cmd. received 218 000 Fig. 3-385

DEV02: Open cmd. received 218 002
DEV03: Open cmd. received 218 004
DEV01: Close cmd. received 218 001 Fig. 3-385

DEV02: Close cmd. received 218 003
DEV03: Close cmd. received 218 005
Interlocking Logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032 Fig. 3-393

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-45

(continued)
Single-Pole Commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001 Fig. 3-394

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006
Single-Pole Signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004 Fig. 3-395
SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005 Fig. 3-395
SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012
SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013
8-46 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Device DVICE: Service info 031 080 031 080
Local control panel LOC: Param. change enabl. 003 010
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test 003 180 Fig. 3-15
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test spont.sig.start 003 184 Fig. 3-15
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM1: Test spont.sig. end 003 186 Fig. 3-15
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test 103 180 Fig. 3-17
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test spont.sig.start 103 184 Fig. 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM2: Test spont.sig. end 103 186 Fig. 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Rset.No.tlg.err.USER 120 037
COMM3: Send signal for test 120 050
COMM3: Log. state for test 120 051
COMM3: Send signal, test 120 053
COMM3: Loop back send 120 055
COMM3: Loop back test 120 054
COMM3: Hold-time for test 120 052
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Reset statistics 105 171
Status Events
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L 105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H 105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx message counter 105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset counters.
GSSE: Rx message counter 105 163
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-47

(continued)
GSSE: No. bin.state chang. 105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Tx last sequence 105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
GSSE: Tx last message 105 166
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. reject. messages 105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED view selection 105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. messages 105 172
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.

GSSE: IED Rx last sequence 105 173
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx last message 105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED missed messages 105 175
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED missed changes 105 176
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED time-outs 105 177
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .
Measured Data Input MEASI: Reset Tmax USER 003 045
Resetting of measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9)

to the updated measured values.
8-48 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Binary outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-30
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.

OUTP: Relay assign. f.test 003 042 Fig. 3-31
Selection of an output relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay test 003 043 Fig. 3-31
The output relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration of the set
time ( O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t ).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled.
OUTP: Hold-time for test 003 044 Fig. 3-31
Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.
Measured Data Output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116 Fig. 3-34
Resetting the measured data output function.
Main function MAIN: General reset USER 003 002 Fig. 3-86
Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured Ground Fault Data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-86
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER 021 005 Fig. 3-365,
3-366
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER 003 033 Fig. 3-46
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-49

(continued)
MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER 003 032 Fig. 3-56
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER 003 007 Fig. 3-65,
3-79, 3-80
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253 Fig. 3-87
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER 005 254 Fig. 3-87
Group of resetting commands.

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER 003 040 Fig. 3-77
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting
is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
MAIN: En.man.clos.cmd.USER 003 105 Fig. 3-65
Setting for the release of a close command from the local control panel.
MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER 018 033 Fig. 3-65
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm restart 003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart 000 085
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. Parameter
values used by the after a cold restart have been selected in such a
manner that the is blocked after a cold restart.
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER 100 001 Fig. 3-92
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 008 Fig. 3-93
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER 100 003 Fig. 3-97
Reset of the overload memory.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. USER 100 000 Fig. 3-104
Reset of the ground fault memory.
8-50 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Fault Recording FT_RC: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-110
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 006 Fig. 3-111
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Power swing blocking PSB: Reset statistics 006 029
Resetting counters, used for extended counter values-based tripping.
Protective Signaling PSIG: Enable USER 003 132 Fig. 3-172
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Disable USER 003 131 Fig. 3-172
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Test telecom. USER 015 009 Fig. 3-205
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Auto-Reclosing Control ARC: Enable USER 003 134 Fig. 3-207,

3-221
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Disable USER 003 133 Fig. 3-207,
3-221
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
(This address is available ARC: Test-HSR A USER 011 063 Fig. 3-230
only with the P435.) A test HSR is triggered in phase A.
(This address is available ARC: Test-HSR B USER 011 064 Fig. 3-230
only with the P435.) A test HSR is triggered in phase B.
(This address is available ARC: Test-HSR C USER 011 065 Fig. 3-230
only with the P435.) A single pole test HSR is triggered with phase selectivity.
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER 011 066 Fig. 3-212,
3-230
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
ARC: Reset counters USER 003 005 Fig. 3-219,
3-237
The ARC counters are reset.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-51

(continued)
Automatic Synchronism ASC: Enable USER 003 136 Fig. 3-239

Check Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
ASC: Disable USER 003 135 Fig. 3-239
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Close request USER 018 004 Fig. 3-241
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the
CB if the check of the ASC is positive.
ASC: Reset counters USER 003 089 Fig. 3-251
The ASC counters are reset.

ASC: Test close requ USER 018 005 Fig. 3-241
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to
the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: Enable USER 003 138 Fig. 3-252
protection Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel.
is available only with the GFSC: Disable USER 003 137 Fig. 3-252
P435.) Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control
panel.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GSCSG: Enable USER 003 140 Fig. 3-265
protective signaling Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local
(This address / function group control panel.
P435.) GSCSG: Disable USER 003 139 Fig. 3-265
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local

control panel.
GSCSG: Test telecom. USER 023 086 Fig. 3-275
Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: Reset counters USER 003 004 Fig. 3-306,
Determination Using Steady- 3-312
State Values
The counters for the ground fault direction determination function using
steady-state values are reset.
Ground fault protective GFSIG: Test telecom. USER 016 079 Fig. 3-315
signaling
8-52 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Transient ground fault TGFD: Reset signal USER 003 009 Fig. 3-320
The direction decisions can be reset while the buffer time is elapsing.
TGFD: Reset counters USER 003 022 Fig. 3-322
The counters for the transient ground fault direction determination function
are reset.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Reset replica USER 022 061
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080
Protection Resetting the measured event values f<> : m a x. fre qu . for f> and
f < > : m in . f r e qu . for f< .
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Enable USER 003 016 Fig. 3-357
Protection Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
CBF: Disable USER 003 015 Fig. 3-357
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-377

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-377
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
8.1.3 Operating data recording
Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. data record. 003 024 Fig. 3-92
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Mon. signal record. 003 001 Fig. 3-93
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-53

(continued)
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event counters
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. telegram errors 120 042
Number of corrupted telegrams.
Main function MAIN: No. general start. 004 000 Fig. 3-70,
3-71
Number of general starting signals.
MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for
a limited time period).
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 004 006 Fig. 3-79,
3-80
Number of general trip commands 1.
(This address is available MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, A 005 006 Fig. 3-80
(This address is available MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, B 005 007 Fig. 3-80
(This address is available MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, C 005 008 Fig. 3-80
Number of general trip commands 1 per phase.
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 009 050 Fig. 3-79,
3-80
Number of general trip commands 2.
MAIN: No. final trip cmds. 004 005 Fig. 3-79,
3-80
Number of final trip commands.
MAIN: No. close commands 009 055 Fig. 3-65
Number of close commands.

MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out 009 090 Fig. 3-56
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp 009 091 Fig. 3-56
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
input was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out 009 092 Fig. 3-56
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp 009 093 Fig. 3-56
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-92
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
8-54 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: No. monit. signals 004 019 Fig. 3-93
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload Recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101 Fig. 3-96
Number of overload events.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: No. ground faults 004 100 Fig. 3-103
Number of ground faults.
Fault Recording FT_RC: No. of faults 004 020 Fig. 3-110
Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. system disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-110
Number of system disturbances.
Power swing blocking PSB: No. stab. PSwing 006 025
Number of stable power swings.

PSB: No. OOS 006 026
Number of unstable power swings.
Auto-reclose control ARC: No. of HSR A 004 001 Fig. 3-237

(This address is available
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase A.
(This address is available ARC: No. of HSR B 004 002 Fig. 3-237
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase B.
(This address is available ARC: No. of HSR C 004 003 Fig. 3-237
Number of high-speed reclosures in phase C.
ARC: No. of HSR A-B-C 004 004 Fig. 3-219,
3-237
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
ARC: Number TDR 004 008 Fig. 3-219,
3-237
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Automatic Synchronism ASC: No. RC aft. man.clos 004 009 Fig. 3-251
Check Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
ASC: No. close requests 009 033 Fig. 3-251
Number of close requests.

ASC: No. close rejections 009 034 Fig. 3-251
Number of close rejections.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-55

(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: No. of trip signals 009 054 Fig. 3-263
protection Number of trip signals.
(This address is available
Ground Fault Direction GFDSS: No. GF power/admitt. 009 002 Fig. 3-312
State Values
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
GFDSS: No. GF (curr. meas) 009 003 Fig. 3-306
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: No. GF admitt. Y(N) 009 060
Number of ground faults (non-directional) detected by the admittance

evaluation method.
GFDSS: No. GF forward/LS 009 000 Fig. 3-312
Number of ground faults in the forward direction.

GFDSS: No. GF backward/BS 009 001 Fig. 3-312
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Transient Ground Fault TGFD: No. GF 004 015 Fig. 3-322

Direction Determination Number of transient ground faults.
TGFD: No. GF forward/LS 004 013 Fig. 3-322
Number of transient ground faults in the forward direction.

TGFD: No. GF backward/BS 004 014 Fig. 3-322
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Operation counter 210 043
DEV02: Operation counter 210 093
DEV03: Operation counter 210 143
DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003
8-56 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
8.2.2 Measured event data
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: ΣItrip A 009 071
CBM: ΣItrip B 009 073
CBM: ΣItrip C 009 076
Sum of the ruptured currents.
Overload data acquisition OL_DA: Overload duration 004 102 Fig. 3-94
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: Status THERM replica 004 147 Fig. 3-95
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load current THERM 004 058 Fig. 3-95
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object temp. THERM 004 035 Fig. 3-95
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant temp. THERM 004 036 Fig. 3-95
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at

TH ER M : Se lec t C T A.
When set to 'Default temp. value' the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to 'From 20 mA input'
the temperature measured via an external transducer will be displayed.
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHERM 004 148 Fig. 3-95
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
OL_DA: Offset THERM replica 004 154 Fig. 3-95
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-57

(continued)
Ground fault data acquisition GF_DA: GF recording time 009 100 Fig. 3-98
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault.
GF_DA: GF duration pow.meas 009 024 Fig. 3-99
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state power evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.u. 009 020 Fig. 3-100
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage of the most recent ground

fault referred to Vnom.
Note: This display is only active when the steady-state power
evaluation mode of the GFDSS ground fault direction
determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN p.u. 009 021 Fig. 3-100,
3-102
Display of the residual current of the most recent ground fault referred to
IN,nom.
Note: This display is only active when the ground fault direction
determination function using steady state values (GFDSS) is
enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN,act p.u. 009 022 Fig. 3-100
Display of the active component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note: This display is active only when the steady-state power
GF_DA: Curr.IN,reac p.u. 009 023 Fig. 3-100
Display of the reactive component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note: This display is only active when the steady-state power
GF_DA: GF durat. curr.meas. 009 026 Fig. 3-101
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state current evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
GF_DA: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 009 025 Fig. 3-102
Display of the residual current component having the set filter frequency for
the most recent ground fault (referred to IN,nom).
8-58 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration 008 010 Fig. 3-105
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running time 004 021 Fig. 3-105
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Meas. loop selected 004 079 Fig. 3-107
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.

FT_DA: Fault current P p.u. 004 025 Fig. 3-107
Display of the phase current referred to Inom.

FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u. 004 026 Fig. 3-107
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to

Vnom .
FT_DA: Fault loop angle P 004 024 Fig. 3-107
Display of the fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. 004 049 Fig. 3-107
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.

FT_DA: Fault loop angle N 004 048 Fig. 3-107
Display of the ground fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault react., prim. 004 029 Fig. 3-107
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. 004 028 Fig. 3-107
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec 004 023 Fig. 3-107
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault locat. percent 004 027 Fig. 3-108
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx.
FT_DA: Fault location 004 022 Fig. 3-108
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.

FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt. 004 037 Fig. 3-109
Display of the load impedance (in Ω) after the general starting condition of
distance protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault has
been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P43x.
FT_DA: Load angle post-flt. 004 038 Fig. 3-109
Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of
distance protection has ended.
The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the distance
protection function of the P43x.
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt 004 039 Fig. 3-109
Display of the residual current referred to Inom after the general starting
condition of time-overcurrent protection has ended.
The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the distance
protection function of the P43x.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-59

(continued)
Automatic Synchronism ASC: Voltage Vref 004 087 Fig. 3-238,

Check 3-250
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop 004 088 Fig. 3-238,
3-250
ASC: Volt. magn. diff. 004 091 Fig. 3-246,
3-247, 3-250
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop
voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Angle difference 004 089 Fig. 3-246,
3-247, 3-250
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
ASC: Frequency difference 004 090 Fig. 3-246,
3-247, 3-250
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
Ground fault (short-circuit) GFSC: Angle VNG/IN 009 098 Fig. 3-262
protection Angle between residual current and neutral-displacement voltage when

(This address is available triggers IN> and VNG> are both operating.
This display only appears when the ground fault (short-circuit) protection
function is active.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Angle VNG/IN 009 004 Fig. 3-282

protection Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement
voltage
Over-/Underfrequency f<>: Max. frequ. for f> 005 002
Protection Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.

f<>: Min. frequ. for f< 005 001
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
8-60 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
8.2.3 Event Recording
Overload Recording OL_RC: Overload recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-97

OL_RC: Overload recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-97
Point of entry into the overload log.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 1 033 010 Fig. 3-104
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 2 033 011 Fig. 3-104
Point of entry into the ground fault log.
Fault Recording FT_RC: Fault recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-111

FT_RC: Fault recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-111
Point of entry into the fault log.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 8-61

8-62 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Instructions
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the beginning of
Chapter 5 must be observed.
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as
the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must
conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always
disconnect the device from the supply.
In units for pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for current transformer
connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers
before loosening the threaded terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the device is shut off.
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting
cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Commissioning Test
Preparation
After the P43x has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see Chapter 3, ‘Self-Monitoring’). The LED indicators for ‘Operation’ (H1)
and ‘Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the P43x is ready for
operation. This is perceptible when the text "P43x" appears in the first line on the LCD.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Chapter 6, ‘Enabling
Parameter Changes’), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings
from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interfaces are to be used to set the P43x
and reading out event records, then the following setting parameters must first be
configured:
‘Par/DvID/’ folder:
DVICE: Device password 1
DVICE: Device password 2
‘Par/Conf/’ folder:
PC: Name of manufacturer
PC: Bay address
PC: Device address
PC: Baud rate
PC: Parity bit
COMM1: Function group COMM1
COMM1: General enable USER
COMM1: Name of manufacturer
COMM1: Line idle state
COMM1: Baud rate
COMM1: Parity bit
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
COMM1: Octet comm. address
COMM1: Octet address ASDU
COMM2: Name of manufacturer
COMM2: Line idle state
COMM2: Baud rate
COMM2: Parity bit
COMM2: Octet comm. address
COMM2: Octet address ASDU
COMM3: Baud rate
9-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder:
PC: Command blocking
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
COMM1: Command blocking
COMM1: S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k . U S E R
COMM2: Command blocking
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
Further instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.
Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before the blocking is cancelled:
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder):
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e 'Yes' (on)'
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P43x, it is possible to determine
whether the P43x is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during testing, the trip commands
can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R (‘Par/Func/Glob’
folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is
desired, it is possible to issue a three-pole trip command for a set time duration at
M A I N : M a n . t r i p c m d . U S E R (‘Oper/CtrlTest’ folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local
control panel is password-protected (see section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control
Operations’ in Chapter 6).
Note: The manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip
command 1 or trip command 2.
If the P43x is connected at the control station level, the user is advised to activate the
test mode via M A I N : T e s t m o d e U S E R (folder ‘Par/Func/Glob’) or an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified
accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
9-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary

signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the protection
device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
"Low": Not energized.

"High": Energized.
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t , ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). It is
password-protected (see Chapter 6, ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’).
Note: Testing is possible only if the device has been switched to "off-line"
beforehand at M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Checking the
communications interfaces
signals
When using the IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C interface protocols, each
signal generated in the P43x can be transmitted to the connected control station for test
purposes. First select the signal to be tested (C O M M x : S e l . s p o n t a n . s i g . t e s t ,
‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). The respective signal is transmitted according to
C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . s t a r t or C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . e n d
(‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). This control action is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the protection

function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P43x, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m .
s u b s e t (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
Checking distance
protection
Before checking the distance protection function using a single-phase testing device,
disable the measuring circuit monitoring function (M C M O N : E n a b l e d U S E R ,
‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) and the fuse failure monitoring function (M C M O N : F F , V
e n a b l e d U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) since they would otherwise always operate
and block distance protection after the set operate delay had elapsed. Furthermore, the
signal at the binary signal input configured for M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T must
have a logic value of 0.
Checking starting
The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Figure 9-1). The slope of
the impedance line plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of the settings for
underimpedance starting and the phase displacement between the measured values
(see Figure 9-2).
9-1 Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram
9-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking I> (Imin), V< and I>>:

The phase displacement between the measured values V and I should be selected so as
to be smaller than the angle set at D I S T : β P S x .
Checking Z<:
The phase displacement between the measured values V and I should be selected so as
to be greater than the angle set at D I S T : β P S x .
Note: The measured values should be selected in accordance with the selected
operate values such that only one starting measuring system operates.
Operation of the checked starting threshold is possible by checking the
phase-selective and starting-selective state signals ('Oper/Cycl/Log' folder).
9-2 Characteristic of underimpedance starting
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)
When checking underimpedance starting using single-phase test current, we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for phase-to-phase starting:
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
V test ⋅ e jϕtest
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕZ
I test ⋅ e j0 °
For absolute value and angle this means:
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
ϕtest = ϕ Z
where:
Z<: Starting Impedance
ϕZ : Impedance Angle
Vtest: Test Voltage
I test : Test Current
ϕtest: Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle ϕ Z in the range
φL < φz < 110°, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
X fw
Z< =
sin ϕ Z
Xfw: D I S T : X f w P S x setting
The limit angle ϕL is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:
X fw
ϕ L = arc tan
Rfw
Rfw : D I S T : R f w , P G P S x or D I S T : R f w , P P P S x setting
9-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If underimpedance starting is to be checked under all angle conditions, then the starting
impedances for the individual angle ranges are calculated according to the following
equations:
Angle Range Starting Impedance
β ≤ϕ Z ≤ϕ L Rfw
Z< =
cos ϕ Z
(180° + β )≤ϕ Z ≤(180° + ϕ L ) Rfw Z

Z< = ⋅ bw
cos ϕ Z Z fw
(180° + ϕ L ) < ϕ Z ≤ 290° X fw Z bw

Z< = ⋅
sin ϕ Z Z fw
β: D I S T : β P S x setting
Zbw
: D I S T : Z b w / Z f w P S x setting
Zfw
When phase-to-ground starting conditions are checked, the D I S T : Z e v a l u a t i o n

P S x setting must be taken into account. If ZPG=VPG / 2*/P is set, then the equations
given for phase-to-phase starting apply. If, on the other hand, ZPG=VPG /(/P + kG*IN) is
set, then the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for
D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one and/or the setting for
D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test is carried out using single-
phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:
V test
= (1 + k G ) ⋅ Z <
I test
V test ⋅ e jϕ test
I test ⋅ e j 0° ( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
V test
= ⎛⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cos ϕ G ⎞⎟ ⋅ Z <
2
I test ⎝ ⎠
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
cos ϕ Z + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
or
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
cos ϕ test + k G ⋅ cos (ϕ test − ϕ G )
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
Z<: Starting Impedance
kG : D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting
ϕG : D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest: Test Voltage
ϕ test : Phase angle between test voltage and test current
From the input measured values, the P43x calculates the residual current IN and the
neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting. They are
calculated according to the following equations:
I N = I A + I B + IC
1
V NG = ⋅ V A −G + V B −G + V C −G
3
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation formula for
VNG given above is that the D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x triggers
operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅ nom
3
VNG>: D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x setting
For a single-phase test where | I B | = | I C | = 0, the following applies to currents:
I test = IN > ⋅Inom
IN>: D I S T : I N > P S x setting
Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LED indicator if starting also
operates in a phase. The operation of ground starting can be observed, independently
of the operation of phase starting, at D I S T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g
(‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
The values determined by the P43x for the residual current IN and the neutral-point
displacement voltage VNG are displayed by the operating data display (current:
M A I N : C u r r e n t I N p . u . and voltage: M A I N : V o l t a g e V N G p . u . in the
‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder).
9-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking distance and

directional measurement
When checking the impedance zones using single-phase test current we obtain the
following relation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phase loop:
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
= 2 ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
j 0°
I test ⋅ e
V test
= 2 ⋅ Z<
I test
ϕ test = ϕ Z
where:
Z<: Tripping impedance
Vtest: Test Voltage
Characteristics
With the P43x, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern calculation of
the tripping impedances.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-13

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Circle characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the P43x.
If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the characteristic
shown in Figure 9-3 is obtained when measuring with sinusoidal quantities.
9-3 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Circle’ setting
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges −45 ° < ϕ Z < α and 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) is
then calculated as follows:
Z trip = Z ⋅ (1 + sin δ )
The following relation applies in the range −45 ° < ϕ Z < α :

δ = α − ϕZ
The following relation applies in the range 135 ° < ϕ Z < ( α + 180 ° ) :
δ = α − ϕ Z + 180 °
where:
Z trip : Actual tripping impedance
Z: settings D I S T : Z 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D I S T : Z 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x
α: settings D I S T : α 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D I S T : α 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x
9-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to
one and/or the setting for D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test
is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate
condition is obtained:
V test
I test
(
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z< )
I test ⋅ e j 0°
( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
V test ⎛ 2 ⎞
= ⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
I test ⎝ ⎠
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
or
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin(ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
where:
ϕG: D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest: Test Voltage
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-15

9 Commissioning
(continued)
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze ⋅ Z1
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
kze: D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x or
D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x setting
Z1: D I S T : Z 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x setting
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:

An appropriately configured signal input.
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone extension
factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function.
Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension factor kze HSR
may be activated during the reclose command – if set accordingly.
9-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic
The tripping impedance is calculated in the range of the reactance limits (for impedance
angle φZ this means in the range φL < φZ < 90°) as follows:
X
Z< =
sin ϕ Z
X: DIST: X1 (polygon) PSx to

D I S T : X 6 ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting
The limit angle φL is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance
limits and is calculated as follows:
X
ϕ L = arc tan
X
R+
tan α
R: DIST: R1,PG ( p o l y g o n ) P S x to
DIST: R6,PG ( p o l y g o n ) P S x or
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx to
DIST: R6,PP ( p o l y g o n ) P S x settings
α: DIST: α1 (polygon) PSx to

DIST: α6 (polygon) PSx settings
9-4 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the ‘Polygon’ setting
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-17

9 Commissioning
(continued)
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the range of
0° < φZ < φL), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the following equation:
R
Z< =
sin ϕ Z
cos ϕ Z −
tan α
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be
taken into account if the setting for D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to
one and/or the setting for D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x is not equal to 0°. When the test
is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate
condition is obtained:
V test
I test
(
= 1 + kG ⋅ Z< )
I test ⋅ e j 0° ( )
= 1 + k G ⋅ e jϕ G ⋅ Z < ⋅ e jϕ Z
V test ⎛ 2 ⎞
= ⎜1 + k G + 2 ⋅ k G ⋅ cosϕG ⎟ ⋅ Z <
I test ⎝ ⎠
sinϕ Z + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ Z + ϕ G )
ϕ test = arc tan
or
sinϕ test + k G ⋅ sin (ϕ test − ϕ G )

ϕ Z = arc tan
where:
ϕG: D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting
Vtest: Test Voltage
9-18 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
In impedance zone 1, the set kze zone extension factors enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze ⋅ R1
Xtrip = kze ⋅ X1
where:
Rtrip: Actual tripping resistance
Xtrip: Actual tripping reactance
kze: D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x or
D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x setting
R1: DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx or

D I S T : R 1 , P P ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting
X1: D I S T : X 1 ( p o l y g o n ) P S x setting
Whether the kze HSR zone extension factors are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:

An appropriately configured binary signal input.
Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to zone extension factor
kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function. Regardless of
the readiness of protective signaling, zone extension factor kze HSR may be activated
during the reclose command – if set accordingly.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-19

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the voltage

memory
The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination. The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for
direction determination.
If the voltage memory is to be tested using a single-phase test device, checking should
only be done for an A-B fault.
Voltage V A − B is greater than 0.65 Vnom.
The frequency is in the range 0.95 ⋅ f nom < f < 105

. ⋅ f nom .
With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing voltage
(VA-B), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement for 2 s maximum.
The P43x determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether the
direction will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the set angle á
(D I S T : α n ( p o l y g o n ) P S x , n: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). The following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:

V memory 0 . 0 0 2 V nom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom
Enabled ϕX ϕX
Not enabled ϕF α
ϕX: Angle determined using the stored voltage
ϕF: Angle determined using the selected measured values
V meas : Selected measuring voltage
The method for determining ϕX is described in Chapter 3 section ‘Distance and

Directional Measurement’.
The user can check to make sure connection to the system’s current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle (M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i A , M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i B , and
M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i C in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder). The load angles for all
three phases must be approximately equal. The load angles are only determined if at
least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.
9-20 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking measuring-circuit
monitoring
Both the current- and voltage-measuring circuits are monitored. Operation of the
monitoring functions can be observed by selecting logic state signals
M C M O N : M e a s . c i r c . V , I f a u l t y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder ) or M C M O N : M .
c i r c . V , V r e f f l t y . (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder). The monitoring signals can also be
entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading out the monitoring
signal memory.
Current-measuring circuits
Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125 Inom flows in at least one
phase. The P43x determines the absolute value of the negative-sequence component,
from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence component is calculated
according to the following equation:
Clockwise rotary field Anti-clockwise rotary field

(new terminology: (new terminology:
Phase sequence A-B-C): Phase sequence A-C-B):
I neg =
1
(
I + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) I neg =
1
(
I + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ IC
3 A
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240
The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is:
I neg ≥ (Ineg > ) ⋅ I P,max
With
Ineg >: M C M O N : I n e g > setting
With a single-phase test current we obtain:
1
I neg = ⋅I
3 test
I P,max = I test
For the operate condition that means:
1
⋅I ≥ ( I neg > ) ⋅ I test
3 test
0.333 ≥ (Ineg >)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with single-
phase test current is only possible if the threshold operate value is set at less than 0.333.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-21

9 Commissioning
(continued)
For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:
1 1
I neg = ⋅I + a2 ⋅ ( − I test ) = ⋅ I test
3 test 3
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
1
⋅ I test ≥ ( Ineg >) ⋅ I test
3
0.577 ≥ (Ineg> )
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with a two-
phase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold operate value is
set at less than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the monitoring
function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current greater than
0.125 Inom after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed.
Voltage-measuring circuits
Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at least one
phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/√3. Other enabling criteria that can
be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling criteria at
M C M O N : O p . m o d e v o l t . m o n . in the ‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder):
One of the phase currents must exceed 0.05 Inom.

The signal at the binary signal input configured for M A I N : C B c l o s e d
s i g . E X T must have a logic value of ‘1’.
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, the P43x determines the absolute
value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following equation:
Clockwise rotating field (or Phase sequence A-B-C):
V neg =
1
3
(
⋅ 1V A − G + a 2 ⋅ 1V B − G + a ⋅ 1V C − G )
Anti-clockwise rotating field (or Phase sequence A-C-B):
1
(
V neg = ⋅ 1V A − G + a ⋅ 1V B − G + a 2 ⋅ 1V C − G
3
)
0
a = e j 120
0
a 2 = e j 240
9-22 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at 0.2 Vnom/√3. The result of a single-
phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0 and also of the calculation formula for Vneg given
above is that the trigger operates when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
Vnom
V test ≥ 3 ⋅ 0.2 ⋅
3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
Checking backup
overcurrent-time protection
The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) – provided it has been
appropriately set – is brought about by the measuring-circuit monitoring function or the
tripping of the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker on the line side.
If the current exceeds the set operate value (B U O C : I > P S x ), then starting occurs in
the corresponding phase(s). After the set time delay (B U O C : t I > P S x ) has elapsed,
the P43x trips. If M A I N : N e u t r a l p o i n t t r e a t is set to Low-impedance-
grounding, then SN starting occurs if the residual current IN calculated by the P43x
exceeds the operate value set at B U O C : I N > P S x . After the set time delay has
elapsed (B U O C : t I N > P S x ) , the P43x trips.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked.
If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages B U O C : t I > P S x and
B U O C : t I N > P S x are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then
issued instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 s delay for zero-sequence
starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is
elapsing.
The P43x calculates the resultant current IN according to the following equation:
I N = I A + I B + IC
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test current is
obtained:
I test = IN > ⋅Inom
at which the operate value (BUOC: I N > P S x ) is reached.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-23

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking protective
signaling
The protective signaling function can only be tested if protective signaling is ready.
This can be determined by checking logic state signal P S I G : R e a d y
(‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
Protective signaling is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking P S I G : E n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)
This may be due to the following reasons:
P S I G : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Log/’ folder) is set to ‘No’.
P S I G : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
Protective signaling is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input
or from the integrated local control panel. (This can be determined by checking
logic state signal P S I G : E x t . e n a b l e d in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly configured
binary signal input (P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T ).
A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be determined
by checking logic state signal P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal for test
purposes using a setting parameter (P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R in the
‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input.
This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set reset time. If the ‘with
echo’ setting has been selected in the protection device at the remote station, then the
received signal will be returned.
9-24 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the auto-

reclosing function
The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal ARC: R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
The ARC function is not enabled.

(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E n a b l e d ,
( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)). This can have the following causes:
A R C : E n a b l e d U S E R ('Par/Func/Log' folder) is set to ‘No’.
A R C : E n a b l e P S x ( i n one of the ‘Par/Func/PSx/’ folders, depending on the
parameter subset) is set to ‘No’.
ARC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a setting
parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A R C : E x t . e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)
The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, backup DTOC
protection, Ground Fault protection (P435 only), Ground Fault (Short-Circuit)
Protection Signaling (P435 only), a manual trip command or via an appropriately
configured signal input (ARC: B l o c k i n g E X T ). (This can be determined by
checking logic state signal A R C : E n a b l e d , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
ARC: CB drive ready EXT.
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T . The circuit breaker position signal is only
necessary if the setting at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . P S x is 'Yes'.
An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
ARC: C y c l e r u n n i n g in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
An ASC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
A S C : C y c l e r u n n i n g , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder, P435 only).
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes using a setting parameter or by
triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command and
then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-25

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the automatic

synchronism check
The automatic synchronism check can only take place if it is ready. This can be
determined by checking logic state signal A S C : R e a d y .
The possible reasons for the ASC function not being ready are as follows:
The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic state
signal A S C : E n a b l e d , ( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)). This can have the following
causes:
A S C : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) has been set to ‘No’.
A S C : E n a b l e P S x (‘Par/Oper/PSx/’ folder, depending on the parameter
subset) has been set to ‘No’.
ASC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a setting
parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A S C : E x t . e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
A logic ‘1’ signal is present at the binary signal inputs configured for M A I N : M . c . b .
t r i p V E X T or M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T .
The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input configured for
ASC: Blocking EXT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of blocking.
For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms using A S C : T e s t
c l o s e r e q u U S E R the setting parameter (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder) or by triggering an
appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : T e s t c l o s e r e q u . E X T ). The
check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The P43x checks
whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set conditions. If a positive
decision is reached, then there is an A S C : C l o s e e n a b l e signal. No (re-)close
command takes place! If the check determines that enabling is not permitted, the signal
A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n is issued.
9-26 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground fault

short-circuit protection
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is only available with the P435.
Ground fault short-circuit protection can be checked only if it is ready. It can be
interrogated via the logic state signal G F S C : R e a d y ( ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
If ground fault short-circuit protection is not ready, this may be due to the following
reasons:
Ground fault short-circuit protection is not enabled. (This can be determined by

checking logic state signal G F S C : E n a b l e d , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder). This may
be due to the following reasons:
G F S C : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) has been set to ‘No’.
G F S C : E n a b l e P S x (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, depending on the parameter
subset) has been set to ‘No’.
Ground fault short-circuit protection is disabled via an appropriately configured
binary signal input or a setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal G F S C : E x t . e n a b l e d ,
‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
On the binary signal input configured to M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T a logic ‘1’

signal is present.
The ground fault short-circuit protection function calculates the neutral displacement
voltage VN-G via the three phase-to-ground voltages according to the following equation:
1
V NG = ⋅ V A −G + V B −G + V C −G
3
In the case of a single-phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation
formula for VNG given above is that trigger G F S C : V N G > operates when the test
voltage exceeds the following value:
Vnom
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅
3
VNG > : Setting G F S C : V N G >
The operation of the trigger can be determined by checking logic state signal G F S C :
V N G > t r i g g e r e d (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-27

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground fault

signaling
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is only available with the P435.
Ground fault short-circuit protection signaling can be checked using a setting parameter
(G S C S G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R ) or by triggering an appropriately configured
binary signal input (G S C S G : T e s t t e l e c o m . E X T ). The P435 then generates a
send signal for 500 ms.
Checking the steady-state-

power ground fault
direction detection
If values for both residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage are available as
measuring quantities the P435 will determine the direction of a ground fault by steady-
state power evaluation of the measuring values. Depending on the setting either the
value calculated by the P435 or the value measured at the transformer T 90 will be
evaluated as the neutral-point displacement voltage. If current values only can be
measured the P435 will decide on "ground fault" ('Steady-state current' evaluation)
because of the residual current value level. Switching from steady-state power to
steady-state current evaluation is made using a setting parameter or by triggering an
Should the system permit such operation a ground fault on the busbar side (BS) or on
the line side (LS) may be simulated by wiring a short circuit. Then the P435 must issue
the corresponding signal. It is assumed that threshold values for residual current (set at
G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > B S P S x and G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > L S P S x
with steady-state power evaluation or G F D S S : I N > with steady-state current
evaluation) and the neutral-point displacement voltage (set at G F D S S : V N G > ) are
exceeded.
A ground fault functional test by wiring a short circuit is, in most cases, not possible as
there is the danger of a double ground fault occurring. As an alternative it is possible to
wire the system’s CTs and VTs such that a functional test is possible without causing a
ground fault.
The residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P435
are displayed as measured operating values in primary quantities referred to the nominal
quantities of the P435.
Ancillary circuit for systems

with ground fault
compensation
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer is removed and the
associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-5 and 9-6). This will
produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller by
the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A line
current transformer must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-5).
9-28 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-5 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards BS
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-29

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If a core-balance current transformer is used to measure the residual current, a test-wire

is inserted to obtain a current flow from the phase B line (see figure 9-6). The ancillary
circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current and voltage
vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the busbar is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault on the
line side.
P43x
45Z5064B_EN
9-6 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and core balance current transformer, ground fault towards BS
9-30 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Ancillary circuit for isolated

neutral-point systems
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer’s primary side is removed
and the associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-7 and 9-8). This
will produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller
by the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A and B
line current transformers must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-7).
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-31

9 Commissioning
(continued)
P43x
9-7 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards LS
9-32 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If a core-balance current transformer is used to measure the residual current, a test-wire

is inserted to obtain a current flow from the phase B and C lines (see figure 9-8).
The ancillary circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current and
voltage vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the line side is displayed in the example.

The current connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground
fault on the busbar side.
P43x
45Z5066B_EN
9-8 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and core balance current transformers, ground fault towards LS
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9-33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the transient

ground fault direction
determination
A secondary check of the transient ground fault direction determination is only possible
by applying a testing device which is capable of simulating the transient pulse with
sufficient accuracy. Otherwise it is possible that the transient ground fault direction
determination will not operate as the logic has been designed specifically to detect such
transient pulses.
Completion of
commissioning
Before the protection device is released for operation, the user should make sure that
the following steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been canceled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Blocking of the trip command has been canceled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Protection has been activated (‘on’).
(M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H1) should be on.
9-34 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P43x to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled "Unpacking and Packing" in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P43x
is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P43x from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P43x issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see
section "Monitoring Signal Memory Readout" in Chapter 6). The table below lists
possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has
been entered at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P43x
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070
Warning configured for LED H3.

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100
Warning configured for an output relay.
Key:
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . f a u l t .
2)
: The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
SFMON: Cold rest. checksum 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart /

Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.

Device blocking
SFMON: Blocking HW failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
Multiple signal: Output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: -/-

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.

Device blocking
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

Device blocking
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

Device blocking
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.

Device blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Module in wrong slot.

Device blocking
Defective module in slot x.

Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

10-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
RAM fault on communication module A.

SFMON: Module N +15V faulty 093 096
The +15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: Module N -15V faulty 093 097
The -15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: Power supply faulty 093 083
One of the internal supply voltages + 24 V, +15 V or -15V has dropped

below a minimum value.

Device blocking
SFMON: Module N DAC faulty 093 095
The digital-to-analog converter of the transient ground fault evaluation

module is defective.

SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
The checksum feature of the transient ground fault evaluation module has
detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
Fault in the program or data memory of the transient ground fault evaluation
module.

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module.

10-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective.

SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
Undefined operation code.

Device blocking
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation.

Device blocking
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt.

Device blocking
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.

Device blocking
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.

Device blocking
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.

Device blocking
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.

Device blocking
10-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
Software overloaded.

Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

RAM fault on communication module A.

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
Incorrect or invalid software for transient ground fault evaluation module has
been downloaded.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded.

SFMON: Inom not adjustable 093 118
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG 098 132
The neutral-point displacement voltage monitor has triggered.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the ground fault
(function groups GFSC,
GSCSG) if they were set so that
they would operate with
measured values of the
neutral-point displacement
voltage.
2)
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of distance protection,

directional measurement of
inverse-time overcurrent
protection and time-voltage
protection, and switching to
backup overcurrent protection,
if applicable.
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of

the phase-to-ground voltages.

SFMON: Vneg> triggered 098 014
The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring

has been triggered.

SFMON: IRIGBsynchron. error 093 117
The IRIGB interface is enabled but no plausible input signal is received.

SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of automatic

synchronism check (ASC)
10-10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.

SFMON: FF, V triggered 098 021
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.

SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.

SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or

the reference voltage faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.

detected.
SFMON: Meas.circ.VNG faulty 098 254
The voltage-measuring circuits for the neutral-point displacement voltage

are faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the neutral-point

displacement voltage monitor
if it were set so that it would
evaluate the measured value
of the neutral-point
displacement voltage.

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Mea.circ.Vref faulty 098 255
The voltage-measuring circuits for the reference voltage are faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the reference

voltage monitor.

SFMON: BUOC not active 098 002
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been

blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time
protection.

detected.
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC 098 003

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.

detected.
SFMON: BUOC active with ARC 098 004

blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
ARC is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.

detected.
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the

current-measuring circuits.

SFMON: Zero sequ. starting 098 015
The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered

without phase starting.

10-12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits

faulty.

detected.
SFMON: CTA error 098 034
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.

detected.
SFMON: Meas. circuits GFSC 098 013
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection monitoring has been triggered.

detected.
SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG 098 006
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of protective

signaling
SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval. 098 019
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling are not identical.

SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GFSIG 098 012
The transmission channel for ground fault protective signaling is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of ground fault

SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG 098 027
The transmission channel of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling

is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-13

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal

overload protection.
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094
The monitoring function for transient ground fault direction determination

has operated.

SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098
A protective function has been activated that is not permitted for operation
at a system frequency of 60 Hz.

SFMON: Peripheral fault 098 018
Multiple signal:

detected.
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
10-14 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus. 098 124
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit
breaker's (CB) status signals.

SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: Faulty DSP 093 127
The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.

Device blocking
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
Since the last complete valid message was transmitted the time set at
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t has elapsed and the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s was

exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default
values.

SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . has elapsed indicating a

persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
The has detected a hardware error in the effective connection InterMiCOM

(communication interface 3).

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 10-15

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI 093 145
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display

(DHMI).

Device blocking
SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024
The P43x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.

detected.
SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025
The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded.

detected.
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026
The P43x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

detected.
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for 'overfrequency'

monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under

frequency protection function
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by

selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.

10-16 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
The P43x is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the
operating temperatures are approx. +45°C inside the devices, the required maintenance
interval can be increased by about 1 year.
The P43x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock!
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note: Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used

(see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.

11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the
battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing

The P43x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P43x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of sub-functions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the device’s general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the
phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be
done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase
ungrounded fault. For this test, the short-circuit current should be dimensioned so that a
loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device terminals with the set
impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the two-
phase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary opto-inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 11-5

11-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of

-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see chapter
entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither
condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P43x for approximately 10 minutes.
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 12-1

12-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P43x is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3,5
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2
Assembly material 88512-4-9650539-301
(for flush-mounted case to form a 19” rack)
Empty 40TE sub-rack 88512-4-9650535-301
40TE frame 88512-4-9650545-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 13-1

13-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612
14 Order Information
14.1 Order Information for P433
MiCOM P433
P433 Distance Protection Device P4 3 3- 9 0 -308 -4xx -612 -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -410
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -411
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T1...T4) 2) 9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) 4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) 5
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2

for the control of up to 3 switchgear units

and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays)

Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays A
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC B
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 4 high break contacts C
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts D
Further add. options:

Without 0
With TGF (transient ground fault direction determination) module
3)
1
With analog module 2
With TGF and analog module 3) 3
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
With TGF and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)
3)
5
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension no.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8)
-461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8)
-462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) 8) -463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
8)
-464
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 14-1

(continued)
MiCOM P433
With communication / information interface:
Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only -91
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC61850 -94

For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95

Language:
English (German)
4)
Without order extension no.
Px40 English (English)
4)
On request -800
German (English)
4)
-801
French (English)
4)
On request -802
Spanish (English)
4)
On request -803
Polish (English)
4)
On request -804
Russian (English)
4) 7)
On request -805
Information about Ordering Options
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
14-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

(continued)
14.2 Order Information for P435
MiCOM P435
Basic device:
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -415
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T1...T4)
2)
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) 4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) for Automatic Synchronism Check 5
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
With 3 binary modules (add. 18 binary inputs and 24 output relays) 5) 3
With 4 binary modules (add. 24 binary inputs and 32 output relays)
5)
4



With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays)
5)
9
and 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)
5)
A

5)
B
5)
C
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays A
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC B
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 4 high break contacts C
P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 14-3

(continued)
MiCOM P435
Switching threshold on binary inputs:
>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension no.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8)
-461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8)
-462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8)
-463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
8)
-464
With communication / information interface:

Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only -91
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
Protocol IEC61850 -94

For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95

Language:
English (German) 4) Without order extension no.
Px40 English (English)
4)
On request -800
German (English)
4)
-801
French (English)
4)
On request -802
Spanish (English) 4) On request -803
Polish (English)
4)
On request -804
Russian (English)
4) 7)
On request -805
Information about Ordering Options

2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
5) For 84TE version only
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number
(-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic
characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be
available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra
characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English"
ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data
models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold

The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P43x/EN M/Ac7 Version: -612 11/2010
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P43x/EN M/Am7 Version: -612 -614 -615 -630 -631, Vol. 1 06/2011

Asdasd

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asdasd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P433, P435

Distance Protection Devices

Version P433 -308 -410/411 -612

Content P43x/EN M/Ac7 (-612)

Distance Protection Devices

Installation of the DHMI:

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 7

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 9

3.12 Main Functions of the P43x (Function Group MAIN) 3-70

10 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

3.25 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) 3-241

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 11

3.45 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) 3-504

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 Local Control Panel 6-1

12 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 13

1 Application and Scope

MiCOM P433: Medium-voltage systems with 3-pole high-speed reclosure (HSR)

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-1

Protection Functions P433 P435

21 DIST Distance protection

1-2 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

Control Functions P433 P435

Communication Functions P433 P435

COMM1, Two RS 485 or fiber-optic communication interfaces

Measured Value Functions P433 P435

MEASI Analog measured value input / output

For further functions see Appendix A1

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-3

Control/Monitoring of Communication COMM1 COMM2 IEC Recording

21 50/27 VTS/CTS 51 P,N 50/51 P,Q,N 51/67 P,Q,N 32 49 50BF/62 25 79 67N

85-21 68 27/59 P,Q,N 81 O/U 85-67N

InterMiCOM COUNT SIG_1 CMD_1 MEASI MEASO

1-1 Functional diagram

1-4 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-5

Parameter subset selection

Inputs and outputs

1-6 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 1-7

Local control panel

One channel of the communication interfaces is designed to comply either with

1-8 P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612

2.2 General Data

General device data

Dimensions and Connections

Communication interfaces - COMM1, COMM2, COMM3:

P43x/EN M/Ac7 // AFSV.12.10220 D /// P433-308-410/411-612 // P435-308-413/414/415-612 2-1

Communication interface IEC 61850:

IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug

Current Measuring Inputs:

Other inputs and outputs:

Creepage Distances and Clearances

2.3 Environmental Conditions

Ambient Humidity Range